BC 6800 Service Manual

BC-6800
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
II
Copyright
2011-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-03 (Version: 2.0).
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)

owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
I
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
zThis equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
zIt is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to
carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result
in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
zBe sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
III
Customer Service Department
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial

park,Nanshan,Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestrae 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
IV
Version Record
Version Updated Contents Related T/N & S/N Updated Date
1.0 First version Released N/A
1Update Error Code TXQ-12009-BC-6800
2Added Preventive Maintenance TXQ-12013-BC-6800

Chapter TXQ-12022-BC-6800
3Updated FRU List SXQ-12001-BC-6800
4Updated PC software name to DMU TXQ-12027-BC-6800
5DMU IP connection screen changed
6RUO parameters updated from12 items

to 14 items;
7 Add ASTM protocol option in DMU

setup;
8Correct some unclear pictures in

hardware;
9Update partly materials name and part

numberlike WC2 Waste BathDeleted
some wrong items;
2.0 2012.9
10Add part numbers of some cables in
FRU List;
11Vacuum Relieve Valve(Regulator)

updated the life time from 3-years to
4-years;
12:Add801-3100-00208-00/Pneumatic
connecter kit into FRU List;
130:Add801-3110-00114-00/reagents
connecter kit (6 colors) (FRU);
14Correct DMU light status
15: Add Scanner Rotation Function in

auxiliary Setup and update Rotation
scanner Debug screen in SPU
16Add floater setup option
17Add USB protection Open/close

function
V
Table of Contents
Copyright................................................................................................................................... I
Version Record ........................................................................................................................ V
Table of Contents..................................................................................................................... 1
1 Using This Manual ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Introduction............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 General Operations.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.4 Symbol ..................................................................................................................... 1-2
2 Product Specification........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Equipment Name ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Power Supply Requirement ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Dimension and Weight ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.4 Measurement Mode ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.5 Sample Types........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.6 Minimum Sample Volume ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.7 Throughput ............................................................................................................... 2-2
2.8 Capacity of the Autoloader ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.9 Performance Specifications...................................................................................... 2-3
2.10 Conditions of Use................................................................................................... 2-13
2.11 Sound ..................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.12 Functions of the Analyzer....................................................................................... 2-14
3 Software System................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Introduction of Startup and Shutdown ...................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Menu Structure......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.4 Password.................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.5 Analyzer Software Update ..................................................................................... 3-20
3.6 DMU Software Installation...................................................................................... 3-26
3.7 DMU Software Update ........................................................................................... 3-33
1
Table of Contents
3.8 Backup and Restoration......................................................................................... 3-37
3.9 Connection device between the DMU and analyzer.............................................. 3-40
3.10 LIS Communication Setup ..................................................................................... 3-45
3.11 Uni-directional LIS Communication........................................................................ 3-48
3.12 Bi-Directional LIS Communication ......................................................................... 3-54
4 Operation Principles ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Measurement of the Optical Channel ...................................................................... 4-1
4.2 HGB Measurement .................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 RBC/PLT Measurement ........................................................................................... 4-4
5 Fluidics ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Parameter Measurement ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Reagent System....................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Measurement Flow................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Sample Volume ........................................................................................................ 5-6
5.5 Time of Preparation and Measurement.................................................................... 5-6
5.6 Temperature of Fluidics............................................................................................ 5-6
5.7 Reagent Consumption Volume ................................................................................ 5-7
5.8 Sample Dilution Flow ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.9 Introduction to Fluidic Parts...................................................................................... 5-9
5.10 Pneumatic System ................................................................................................. 5-20
5.11 Detailed Introduction to Fluidic Channels .............................................................. 5-26
5.12 Introduction to Sequences ..................................................................................... 5-34
6 Optical System................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Introduction of Optical Theories ............................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Optical System Structure.......................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Troubleshooting of the Optical System .................................................................... 6-4
7 Hardware System............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Data and COME Carrier Board ................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Drive Control Board................................................................................................ 7-16
7.4 Motherboard ........................................................................................................... 7-26
7.5 Network Board ....................................................................................................... 7-30
7.6 Power Board........................................................................................................... 7-32
2
Table of Contents
7.7 Power Patching Board ........................................................................................... 7-36
7.8 Laser Drive Board .................................................................................................. 7-38
7.9 Scatter Pre-amplification Boards ........................................................................... 7-43
7.10 Fluorescence Pre-amplification Board ................................................................... 7-49
7.11 Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board.................................................................... 7-54
7.12 Heating Control Board............................................................................................ 7-56
7.13 Diluent Heating Board ............................................................................................ 7-60
7.14 Valve Drive Board................................................................................................... 7-64
7.15 Indicator Board....................................................................................................... 7-74
7.16 Touchscreen Control Board.................................................................................... 7-75
7.17 Prefix List of Board Interfaces ................................................................................ 7-76
7.18 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches ........................................................... 7-77
8 Mechanical System ........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Analyzer Structure.................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Appearance .............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 Layout Introduction................................................................................................... 8-3
9 Replacing the FRU............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Removal and Installation of the Board ..................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Sheath Fluid Impedance Bath................................................................................ 9-11
9.4 Aperture.................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.5 HGB Bath Assembly............................................................................................... 9-16
9.6 RBC Bath Assembly............................................................................................... 9-17
9.7 SRV Assembly........................................................................................................ 9-17
9.8 Sample Probe ........................................................................................................ 9-23
9.9 Pneumatic Unit....................................................................................................... 9-24
9.10 Barcode Scanner Assembly ................................................................................... 9-26
9.11 Radiator Fan........................................................................................................... 9-27
9.12 Power Supply Assembly......................................................................................... 9-28
9.13 Diaphragm pump.................................................................................................... 9-30
9.14 WBC Mixing Assembly ........................................................................................... 9-33
9.15 WBC Bath Assembly .............................................................................................. 9-35
9.16 Reagent Pre-Heating Bath Assembly .................................................................... 9-36
9.17 Sheath Fluid Pre-heating Bath Assembly .............................................................. 9-38

3
Table of Contents
9.18 Diluent Heating Bath Assembly.............................................................................. 9-39
9.19 Sheath Fluid Filter .................................................................................................. 9-40
9.20 Waste Filter ............................................................................................................ 9-40
9.21 START Switch Assembly........................................................................................ 9-41
9.22 Pressure Regulator ................................................................................................ 9-42
9.23 Vacuum Overflow Valve ......................................................................................... 9-43
9.24 Screen Assembly ................................................................................................... 9-45
9.25 Tube Clamp for Mixing ........................................................................................... 9-46
9.26 Autoloading Assembly............................................................................................ 9-47
9.27 Piercing Unit ........................................................................................................... 9-48
9.28 Autoloader .............................................................................................................. 9-50
9.29 Tube Sensor Assembly .......................................................................................... 9-52
9.30 Cistern and Waste Bath ......................................................................................... 9-53
9.31 Syringe Assembly................................................................................................... 9-56
9.32 Filter and Drying Assembly .................................................................................... 9-60
9.33 Replacing the Backwater Bath Assembly .............................................................. 9-61
9.34 USB Assembly ....................................................................................................... 9-62
9.35 Mindray Valve......................................................................................................... 9-63
9.36 Burkert Valve .......................................................................................................... 9-66
9.37 Waste Valve............................................................................................................ 9-67
9.38 Gas Valve ............................................................................................................... 9-68
9.39 SMC 2-way Fluidic Valves...................................................................................... 9-69
9.40 Probe Wipe of the Open-Vial Module .................................................................... 9-70
9.41 Optical System ....................................................................................................... 9-71
9.42 Units in the Autoloader ........................................................................................... 9-79
9.43 Power Board and Power Conversion Board .......................................................... 9-85
9.44 Pressure Detection Board ...................................................................................... 9-87
9.45 Indicator Board....................................................................................................... 9-88
9.46 Valve Control Board ............................................................................................... 9-89
9.47 Heating Control Board............................................................................................ 9-91
9.48 Data Board and Power Drive Board....................................................................... 9-92
9.49 Mother Board ......................................................................................................... 9-93
9.50 Liquid Level Detection Board ................................................................................. 9-95
9.51 Network Port Patching Board................................................................................. 9-96
4
Table of Contents
9.52 Diluent Heating Control Board ............................................................................... 9-97
9.53 Touchscreen Control Board.................................................................................... 9-98
9.54 Pneumatic Unit Control Board................................................................................ 9-99
9.55 Boards inside the Optical System ........................................................................ 9-100
9.56 Cap Assembly ...................................................................................................... 9-101
9.57 Transformer.......................................................................................................... 9-102
9.58 Replacing the Wires ............................................................................................. 9-103
9.59 Replacing the Connectors.................................................................................... 9-104
9.60 Components inside the Assemblies ..................................................................... 9-106
9.61 Replacing the Photocoupler (PHC/Sensor) ..........................................................9-111
10 Error Code ...................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Message Area Error ............................................................................................... 10-3
10.3 Error Area Error...................................................................................................... 10-6
11 Preventive Maintenance................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1 Tools and Consumables......................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Service Plan ........................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 Status Check ........................................................................................................ 11-23
11.4 Regular Replacement .......................................................................................... 11-26
12 FRU LIST......................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Board list ................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Valve list ................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.3 Tube and Connector list ......................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Part list ................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.5 Cable list................................................................................................................. 12-9
12.6 Wearing parts list.................................................................................................. 12-10
A.1 Rubber Tubing Information ................................................................................... 12-13
A2. Connector Information .......................................................................................... 12-14
A3. Connecting Tubing Information ............................................................................. 12-16
A4. Other Material Information .................................................................................... 12-16
A5. Valve Information .................................................................................................. 12-17
A6. Table of All Tubes .................................................................................................. 12-21
5
Table of Contents
6
1 Using This Manual
zBe sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this manual
and the operator's manuals.
1.1 Scope
To use this manual effectively, you need the following capabilities:
Comprehensive knowledge of circuit and fluidics;

Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;
Comprehensive knowledge of controls;
Comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;
Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;
Using basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology;
Using a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope;
Reading pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.
1.2 Introduction
This manual comprises 13 chapters and the fluidic diagrams in appendices.
1.3 General Operations

Name Operation
press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK it

Click
with the mouse.
to CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard or
Enter the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or
to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit that you want to

delete by clicking the left button of the mouse or using
[][][Home][End], and then delete the character after the
Delete
cursor by pressing [Del], or delete the character before the cursor
by pressing [BackSpace] ([] on the upper right part of the soft
keyboard).
1-1
Click the arrow buttons by the ends of the scroll bar, or move the
Drag Scroll Bar cursor to the slide bar and press the left key of the mouse; or
press the slide bar with your finger.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display the
SELECT from pull-down list, (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
pull-down list CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys
(for pull-down list) ([][][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the current list and press
[ENTER] to select the desired item.
1.4 Symbol
You will find the following symbols in this manual.
Symbol It means...
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.

alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.

alerting you to information that requires your attention.
read the statement below the symbol . The statement is

alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
Symbol It means...
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
1-2
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
TYPE B DEVICE
BATCH CODE
USE BY
SERIAL NUMBER
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
Manufacturer
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Be sure to observe the following precautions when you are servicing the analyzer for the safety
of patients and operators.
1-3
zIt is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to
carry out a reasonable installation plan. Neglect of this may result in
machine breakdown or injury of human health.
zNever use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g. ethanol)
around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
zContacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached to

power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to electronic
components. Power down before removing covers to access electronic
components.
zConnect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
zTo prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, pincher and
piercer.
zPossible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during normal operation, removal and maintenance.
zBe sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according

to government regulations.
zThe reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper personal
protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory
procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
zIf the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
zImproper servicing may damage the analyzer. Improper maintenance may

damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer strictly as instructed by the
service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the maintenance.
zFor problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray customer
service department for maintenance advice.
zTo prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove metal
1-4
jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
zElectrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. Electrostatic

discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a possibility of
ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD
workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
zThis equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
zSamples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
zAll the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious, so take
proper protective measures for operation and maintenance.
zThe sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-5
2 Product Specification
2.1 Equipment Name
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Model: BC-6800/BC-6600
2.2 Power Supply Requirement

Table 2-1 Power Supply Requirement
Voltage Frequency Power

a.c. 110V/115V 10% 50/60Hz 2Hz 500VA
Analyzer (outside China)
a.c. 220V/230V10% 50/60Hz 2Hz 500VA
Analyzer (China) (220V/230V)10% 50Hz/60Hz2Hz 500VA
a.c. 110V/115V10% 60Hz 2Hz 600VA
Pneumatic unit (outside China) 50Hz 2Hz 450VA
a.c. 220V/230V10%
60Hz 2Hz 300 VA
Pneumatic unit (China) (220V)10% 50Hz 1Hz 400VA
2.3 Dimension and Weight

Table2-2 Analyzer Dimension and Weight
Dimension (width x depth x height mm) Weight(Kg)
Analyzer 680850700 125
Pneumatic unit 310480430 20
2.4 Measurement Mode

There are 8 measurement modes altogether:
CBC, CBC+DIFF, CBC+DIFF+RET, CBC+RET, RET, CBC+DIFF+NRBC,

CBC+DIFF+RET+NRBC and CBC+NRBC.
2.5 Sample Types

The supported sample types are:
1) anticoagulated venous blood (use EDTAK2 or EDTAK3 as the anticoagulant, for whole
blood analysis)
2) capillary blood (for predilute analysis)
2-1
2.6 Minimum Sample Volume
To ensure the effective analysis of samples, the minimum sample volumes are specified as
follows:
1) Autoloading mode: 1ml

2) Open vial mode: 0.5ml (excluding predilute mode)
2.7 Throughput
1) Autoloading mode
Table 2-3 Throughput of auto-loading mode
Measurement CBC CBC+ CBC+DIFF CBC+ CBC+ CBC+DIFF+ CBC+DIFF+ RET

Mode DIFF +RET RET NRBC NRBC RET+NRBC
Throughput
125 125 90 90 125 125 90 90
(analyses/hour)
2) Open-vial mode
Table 2-4 Throughput of open-vial mode
CBC CBC+ CBC+DIFF CBC+ CBC+ CBC+DIFF CBC+DIFF+ RET

DIFF +RET RET NRBC +NRBC RET+NRBC
Whole blood mode
(continuous
analyses) 125 125 90 90 125 125 90 90
(analyses/hour)
Whole blood mode
(single analysis) 75 75 60 60 75 75 60 60
(analyses/hour)
Predilute mode
(single analysis) 36 36 30 30 36 36 30 30
(analyses/hour)
2.8 Capacity of the Autoloader

Each tube rack can be loaded with 10 tubes.
The autoloader can be loaded with 10 tube racks at the most.
The maximum capacity of a single loading is 100 tubes.
2-2
2.9 Performance Specifications
2.9.1 Sample Aspiration Volumes

OV-WB mode: 150ul
AL-WB mode: 200ul
OV-PD mode: 40 ul
2.9.2 General Performance Requirements

Table 2-5 General performance requirements
Items Temperature Design Requirement

No more than 30 minutes
Requirement of startup time 1532
(normal and abnormal startup)
(the time taken from power-on
1522 No more than 15 minutes
to ready-for-analysis)
2340 No more than 10 minutes
No more than 15 minutes
Requirement of shutdown time 1532
(normal shutdown)
2.9.3 Analysis Parameters

1) 33 reporting parameters
Table 2-6 Reporting parameters
Clone Name Abbreviation

White Blood Cell count WBC
Basophils number Bas#
Basophils percentage Bas%

Leukon (11 parameters)
Neutrophils number Neu#
Neutrophils percentage Neu%
Eosinophils number Eos#
Eosinophils percentage Eos%
Lymphocytes number Lym#
Lymphocytes percentage Lym%
Monocytes number Mon#
Monocytes percentage Mon%
Reticulocyte percentage RET%

meters)
(6para
clone
RET
Reticulocyte number RET#

2-3
Immature reticulocyte fraction IRF
Low fluorescent ratio LFR
Middle fluorescent ratio MFR
High fluorescent ratio HFR
Red Blood Cell count RBC
Hemoglobin Concentration HGB
Mean Corpuscular Volume MCV

RBC clone (10 parameters)
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCH
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCHC

Concentration
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width Coefficient RDW-CV
of Variation
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width Standard RDW-SD
Deviation
Hematocrit HCT
Nucleated red blood cell number NRBC#
Nucleated red blood cell percentage NRBC%
Platelet count PLT
Mean Platelet Volume MPV

(6 parameters)
PLT clone
Platelet Distribution Width PDW
Plateletcrit PCT
Platelet-large cell ratio P-LCR
Platelet-large cell count P-LCC
2) 14 RUO parameters
Table 2-7 RUO parameters
Name Abbreviation
High fluorescent Cell number HFC#
High fluorescent Cell percentage HFC%
Immature Granulocyte IMG#
Immature Granulocyte percentage IMG%
Optical Red Blood Cell count RBC-O
Optical Platelet count PLT-O
Platelet count- Impedance PLT-I
Optical white blood cell count WBC-O
2-4
White blood cell count -DIFF WBC-D
White blood cell count BASO WBC-B
White blood cell count-NRBC WBC-N
Platelet Distribution Width Standard Deviation PDW-SD
Infected RBC number INR#
Infected RBC ratio INR
3) Graphs
Table 2-8 Graphs
Type Channel Name Three-dimensional

Scattergram
DIFF optical DIFF Scattergram
channel Yes
BASO optical BASO

channel Scattergram No
RET Scattergram Yes

Scattergram PLT-O
RET optical No
Scattergram
channel
RET-EXT
Scattergram No
NRBC optical NRBC

channel Scattergram Yes
RBC sheath fluid RBC Histogram /

Histogram impedance channel PLT Histogram /
2.9.4 Flag Messages
Table 2-9 Flag messages
Clone Name
WBC WBC Abn Scattergram
2-5
NRBC Abn Scattergram
Neutropenia
Neutrophilia
Lymphopenia
Lymphocytosis
Monocytosis
Eosinophilia
Basophilia
Leukocytopenia
Leukocytosis
NRBC present
Blasts?
Abn Lympho/ Blasts
Immature Gran?
Left Shift?
Atypical Lympho?
NRBC?
RBC Lyse resistance?
RBC Abn Distribution
RET Abn Scattergram
Dimorphic Population
Reticulocytosis
Anisocytosis
Microcytosis
Macrocytosis
RBC
Hypochromia
Anemia
Erythrocytosis
RBC Aggulutination?
Turbudity/HGB Interference?
Iron Deficiency?
Fragments?
PLT Abn Scattergram
PLT Abn Distribution
PLT Thrombocytopenia
Thrombocytosis
PLT Clumps?
Overall judgment Pancytopenia
2-6
2.9.5 Measurement and Display Range
1) Condition
WBC 0~500109/L
RBC 0~8.001012/L
HGB 0~250g/L
PLT 0~5000109/L
HCT 075%
RET% 030%
RET 0~0.81012/L
2) Display range
WBC 0.00~999.99109/L
Neu%/Lym%/ Mon%/ Eos%/ Bas% 0100%
RBC 0.00~99.991012/L
HGB 0~300g/L
PLT 0~9999109/L
HCT 0.0100.0%
MCV (0.0-250.0)fL
RET% 0100%
RET 0.0000~9.99991012/L
NRBC% 09999.99%
NRBC# 0~9999.99109/L
2.9.6 Background requirement

Background analysis method: run diluent sample and get the analysis result.
The background specification of BC-6800 is as follows:
Table 2-10 Background requirements
Parameter Background requirement

WBC 0.1 109 / L
WBC-D 0.2 109 / L
WBC-N 0.2 109 / L
2-7
RBC 0.02 1012/ L
RBC-O 0.02 1012/ L
HGB 1 g/L
PLT 5 109 / L
PLT-O 5 109 / L
2.9.7 Carryover
Carryover analysis method: analyze 3 high value samples consecutively when the
analyzer is under stable conditions, and then analyze 3 low value samples immediately,
then calculate the carryover rate per the following equation.
First low - level sample resultThird low - level sample result

Carryover(%) = 100
Third high - level sample resultThird low - level sample result
Table 2-11 Carryover requirements
Parameter Unit High value Low value Carryover

sample sample
WBC 109/L > 15.0 < 3.0 1.0%
RBC 1012/L > 6.0 < 2.00 1.0%
HGB g/L > 200 < 40 1.0%
HCT % >54.0 <18.0 1.0%
PLT 109/L > 300 < 100 1.0%
RBC-O 1012/L > 6.0 < 2.00 1.5%
WBC-D 109/L > 15.0 < 3.0 1.0%
WBC-N 109/L > 15.0 < 3.0 1.5%
2.9.8 Reproducibility
Reproducibility analysis method: select a qualified sample and analyze it for 10
consecutive times, and then calculate the CV (%) and absolute deviation D of each
parameter. Calculation method:
n
X i
i =1
Mean( X )= ; n: analysis times
n

Absolute deviation di =xi - X
2-8

Standard deviation (SD)=

(X i
X )2
; i: the parameter result of the ith analysis
n 1
Coefficient variation (CV)%=

Table 2-12 Reproducibility requirements
Whole blood (CV/Absolute

Parameter Range Predilute (CV)
deviation d*)
WBC 4109/L 2.5% 4.0%

12
RBC 3.510 /L 1.5% 2.0%
HGB (110-180)g/L 1.0% 2.0%
MCV (80-100)fL 1.0% 3.0%
HCT (3050)% 1.5% 3.0%
PLT 100109/L 4.0% 8.0%

*Note: absolute deviation d= measured value- mean of measured value.
**Note: Range=maximum measured value- minimum measured value.
2.9.9 Linearity
Prepare samples of different concentrations, analyze the samples, and calculate slope
coefficient and intercept in the linearity regression equation. Then calculate the theoretical
value and the deviation between the theoretical value and the test value.
Table 2-13 Linearity requirements
Parameter Condition Whole blood mode Predilute mode
(0 ~ 100.00)109/L 0.20109/L or 2 0.50109/L or 5%

WBC (100.01 ~ 350.00)109/L 6 6
9
(350.01 ~ 500)10 /L 11% 11%
RBC (0 ~ 8.00)10 /L12 12
0.0310 /L or 2 0.051012/L or 5%
2g/L or 2 2g/L or 3%
HGB (0-250)g/L
4g/L or 4%
HCT (075)% 1.0(HCT value) or 2 2.0(HCT value) or 4%
9
1010 /L or 5% 10109/L or 10%
(0 ~ 1000)109/L
PLT 20109/L or 10%
(1001 ~ 5000)109/L 6 10%
RET% (030)% 0.3(RET value) or 20 /
12 12
RET# (0 ~ 0.8)10 /L 0.01510 /L or 20% /
* Note: PLT linearity may not meet the requirement, it is mainly determined by RBC
concentration.
2-9
2.9.10 Deviation between Different Modes
The way to measure deviation between different modes: perform calibration under each
mode using fresh blood or calibrator, then analyze a normal fresh blood sample for 5 times
under the autoloading mode, open vial whole blood mode and open vial predilute mode
respectively, and calculate the deviations of the parameters between the modes.
Table 2-14 Requirements of deviations under different modes
Autoloading and open vial mode Open vial and predilute mode
Parameter Relative deviation or absolute Relative deviation or absolute
deviation requirement deviation requirement
5% or 0.4109/L
WBC 5% or 0.4109/L
10% or 0.8109/L
2% or 0.11012/L
RBC 2% or 0.11012/L
4% or 0.2109/L
2% or 4g/L
HGB 2% or 4g/L
4% or 6g/L
2% or 0.3HCT%
HCT 2% or 0.3HCT%
4% or 0.6HCT%
9
7% or 20109/L
PLT 7% or 2010 /L
14% or 30109/L
Neu% 5.0% 9.0%
Lym% 4.0% 9.0%
Mon% 3.0% 6.0%
Eos% 2.0% 3.0%
Bas% 1.0% 3.0%
NRBC% 20% or 2.0NRBC% /
RET# 12
20% or 0.0151012/L
20% or 0.01510 /L
30% or 0.021012/L
RET% 20% or 0.3 RET%

20% or 0.3 RET%
30% or 0.45 RET%
20%
RBC-O 20%
30%
20%
PLT-O 20%
30%
LFR 30% or 10 LFR%
MFR 30% or 10 MFR%
HFR 30% or 5 HFR%
IRF 30% or 10 IRF%
2-10
2.9.11 Correlation Requirements of the Analyzer and
Comparator
1. Requirements of Deviation of the Analyzer and Comparator
Analyzer a fresh blood sample or calibrator with traceability for 5 consecutive times on a
comparator of good conditions and calculate the mean of each parameter. Take the means as
targets, and calibrate the analyzer to be tested with the sample or calibrator mentioned above.
When the calibration finishes, test another fresh blood samples for 5 times on the two
analyzers respectively and calculate the deviation rate of the means of each parameter.
Deviation requirements: WBC - 3%, RBC - 2%, HGB- 2%, PLT - 5%, HCT or MCV
- 2%.
2. Correlation Requirements of the Analyzer and Comparator
Test at least 100 fresh anticoagulated venous blood samples (able to cover the reportable
range as much as possible, with at least 50 abnormal samples) for 2 times on the comparator
and the analyzer respectively, calculate the mean and the correlation coefficient R.
Table 2-15 Requirements on the Comparative Index of the Analyzer and Comparator
Comparative Correlation Coefficient of

Parameter
the Analyzer and Comparator
WBC 0.99
RBC 0.99
HGB 0.98
MCV 0.98
PLT 0.95
NRBC 0.90
RET#/RET% 0.90
2.9.12 Correlation and Accuracy Requirements of WBC

Differential and Manual Differential
1. Correlation
Prepare 100 normal samples and 100 abnormal samples, test the samples with the analyzer
and the reference method (manual differential) respectively. Test each sample on the analyzer
twice. Manual differential shall be conducted per the requirement of CLSI H20, 400 cells from
each sample are analyzed, and the mean is calculated. Conduct correlation analysis for
Neu%, Lym%, Mon%, Eos%, Bas% and IG.
2-11
Table 2-16 Correlation Requirements of Differential Parameters
Parameter Correlation Coefficient of WBC Differential of

the Analyzer and Manual Differential
Neu% 0.90
Lym% 0.90
Mon% 0.75
Eos% 0.80
Bas% 0.50
IG% 0.80
2. Accuracy
Run calculation over results of the 200 samples tested for correlation analysis.
pq
Equation: SEp n
In the equation, n=200; p= mean obtained with the reference method; q=100-p; when freedom
is 199, the t distribution factor of 99 credibility limit =2.57.
Calculating credibility range
The 99 credibility range of a parameter rate: p2.57SEp.
Requirement: The Lym%, Neu%, Mon%, Eos% and Bas% results tested by the analyzer
must be within the 99 credibility range of the results tested by the reference method.
2.9.13 Sample Stability

Prepare 5 normal anticoagulated fresh venous blood samples, separate each sample into 17
shares. Test 1 share for twice after it has been prepared for 0.5 hour. Group the other 16
shares into 2 groups, store 1 group in room temperature and the other in the environment of 4
. Test 1 share from each group at hour 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 48 and 72 after they have been
prepared (the samples stored in the environment of 4 must be warmed to room temperature
and then mixed). Record the parameter results of each sample and observe the change of
parameter results, histogram and scattergram over time. Calculate the change of parameter
results of each sample over time against the results of the test done at hour 0.5, and
representing the change in absolute or relative deviation.
Table 2-17 Sample Stability Requirements
Relative deviation or Long Term Stability in Long Term Stability in

Parameter absolute deviation
Room Temperature Refrigerated
Acceptance Range (18-26) Temperature (2-8)
2-12
WBC 5% 24 hours 48 hours
RBC 3% 24 hours 48 hours
HGB 3% 24 hours 48 hours
MCV 6% 24 hours 48 hours
HCT% 7% 24 hours 48 hours
MCH 5% 24 hours 48 hours
MCHC 7% 24 hours 48 hours
RDW-CV 10% 24 hours 48 hours
RDW-SD 15% 24 hours 48 hours
PLT 10% 24 hours 48 hours
MPV 15% 24 hours 48 hours
Neu% 5%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
Lym% 4%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
Mon% 3%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
Eos% 2%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
Bas% 1%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
NRBC% 0.5%(absolute deviation) 24 hours 48 hours
RET% 20% or 0.3RET% 24 hours 48 hours
2.10 Conditions of Use

2.10.1 Environment Requirements
Table 2-18 Environment Requirements of the Analyzer
Operating Storage Running

Environment Environment Environment
Requirements Requirements Requirements
Ambient
1532 -1040 540
Temperature
Relative
30%85% 10%90% 10%90%
Humidity
Atmospheric
70kPa106kPa 50kPa106kPa 70kPa106kPa
pressure
Note: the environment requirements of reagents are the same as those of the analyzer.
2-13
2.10.2 Reagent Storage and Validity Term
Table 2-19 Reagent Storage Conditions and Validity Term
Reagent Name Validity Term Storage Storage Relative

After Being Validity Temperatur Humidity
Opened Term e
M-68DS DILUENT 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68DR DILUENT 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68LD LYSE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%

M-68LN LYSE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68LB LYSE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68LH LYSE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
Probe cleanser 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68FN DYE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68FR DYE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%
M-68FD DYE 60 days 12 months 2-30 90%

Other requirements: the environment must be well ventilated and without corrosive gas; the
fluorescent dyes must be protected from sunlight.
2.10.3 PC Configuration
Recommended PC configuration: CPU Intel 1.6GHz and above, memory 1G and above,
hard disk 160GB and above, with DVD-ROM configured. The recommended display
resolution: 1280*1024 (ordinary display) and 1440*900 (wide-screen display).
Operation system: the terminal software can be operated properly in the Microsoft Windows 7
operation system; the multi-language software can be operated in the operation systems of the
corresponding languages. (32 bit or 64 bit?)
2.11 Sound
Standby mode: 60db
Running mode: 65db
2.12 Functions of the Analyzer

2.12.1 Data Storage
2-14
Table 2-20 Data Storage Function
Storage Information of at least 40000 samples

capacity
Data storage of The information stored in the PC include: analysis results
the PC Information and graphs (histogram and scattergram), sample
stored information, patient information, flag information and special
information.
2.12.2 Sleep Function

1) After being idle for certain period of time, the analyzer will enter sleep mode to
ensure the stable performance of the analyzer when being used again.
2) The settable range of the waiting time before entering sleep mode of the analyzer is
[1,30].
3) See the following table for the time needed for exiting sleep mode.
Table 2-21 Time Needed for Exiting Sleep Mode
After entering sleep mode, the fluidics Time needed for exiting Diluent
system is idle for (T) sleep mode consumption
T 30 minutes No more than 15s /
30 minutes<T3 hours No more than 30s 1ml
3 hours<T No more than 200s 150ml
2.12.3 STAT Function

STAT function is provided by the analyzer during the autoloading analysis process.
2.12.4 Bilateral LIS/HIS Function

1) The analyzer provides bilateral LIS/HIS communication function.
2) And it at least supports the HL7 communication protocol.
2-15
3 Software System
3.1 Overview
Software includes analyzer software and PC operating software DMU. Analyzer software runs
on the internal CF card of the analyzer, while operating software DMU runs in the WIN 7,
Ultimate, Flagship and corresponding 64 bit operating system. The analyzer software is
responsible for sequences resolution, data collection and identification, while DMU is
responsible to store the results into the database, display, print the results and display the data
of the counts and quality controls; interactions such as data management, parameters setting
and communications.
3.2 Introduction of Startup and Shutdown
3.2.1 Startup
y Ensure that the electricity and reagents are connected properly when starting up.
First power on the pneumatic unit and then the main unit. Inversion is not
allowed.
y There is no restriction of the startup order of the analyzer and PC Software
y During the startup process, prompts of words and progress indicator will pop up.
y Service engineer or levels above could skip the initialization. When the progress
bar prompts at the startup screen when starting up, press the upper left for
several seconds with the finger until the message box of access level pops up,
enter the service password to skip the initialization. Note: Initialization cannot be
skipped in the initial startup. Performing fluidics initialization of the analyzer is
required.
3.2.2 Shutdown
y Use the "Shutdown" button on the software main menu to shut down the analyzer.
y During the shutdown process, prompts of words and progress indicator will
display.
3.3 Menu Structure

Main menu structure of the analyzer software:
3-1
Mode Search Setup Setup Probe Cleanser
Maintenance
Start Count Graph Start Count Replace Aperture
Export Restart
STAT
Delete
RUO Para.
Stability
Trend
Previous
Trend
Next
Graph
Table
RTable
Review
Send RUO Para.
Shortcut menu structure of the analyzer software:
Manual
CBC Gain
Optical Gain
Calibrator
Fresh blood
Transfer Factor Date
History
Background Auxiliary Setup
Touch Screen
Reagent Sequence
Reproducibility
Maintenance Debug
Carryover
Autoloader Cleaning
Maintenance Replace Reagent
Barcode
Communication Reagent Reagent Priming
Gain Setup Fluidics

Drain/Prime Statistics
Advanced
Debug Temp.&Pressure
Log Voltage&Current
Float Sensor
Version Info.
Function Config.
3-2
Calibration
OV-WB Restore Default
Manual OV-PD Export
CBC Gain AL-WB Import
Optical Gain
Calibrator Save
Restore Default
Fresh Blood Export
Transfer Factor
History Read File
Touch Screen
Calculate
OV-WB
OV-PD
AL-WB
Send Cal. History

Resend Single
Perfomance
Background Clear All Trend
Reproducibility Mode Clear All
Carryover Start Count Mode
Export Start Count
Transmit Sample Info.
Special Info. Statistics
Stability Trend Export
Trend Graph Send
Clear All
Mode
Start Count
Export
Send
3-3
Predilute Mode Prompt Flow Cell Bubble Removal
Pop-up Keyboard Open Whole Device
Blood Sensor Open Flow Cell Flushing
Waste Sensor Open Optical Reaction Bath
Disable RET RBC Bath
Date Setup Disable NRBC RBC Premix Bath
Sequence Debug
Auxiliary Setup HGB Bath
Cleaning
Reagent Setup SRV
Setup Maintenance
Maintenance Setup Open-Vial Sampling Unit
Replace Reagent
Autoloader Autoloading Sampling Unit
To open reagent Overall
Built-in Barcode
Maintenance
Communication
Standby Drain&Prime
Setup Whole Device
Probe Cleanser Maintenance Debug
Gain Setup Flow Cell
Log
Advanced Setup Autoloader Stop Condition SRV
Blood/Analysis Mode Inquiry Failed Aperture
When there is tube vacancy, sample HGB Bath
ID BASO Channel
NRBC Channel
Optical gain FS, SS, SF, PMT
MCV gain Unclog
HGB gain Flush
Zap
Basic Function (SN,
language)
Analyzer configuration items M-68DS diluent
(built-in barcode scanner M-68DR diluent
configured) Replace M-68LD lyse
Special Function (upload Reagent M-68LB lyse
WAVE file) Reagent M-68LN lyse
Priming M-68LH lyse
M-68FN dye
M-68FR dye
M-68FD dye
All Logs Pack-up

Detail Setup Adjustment Reset Fluidics
Go to Other Logs
Export Error Info.
Sequence Drain
WC1 WC2
DIL Cistern FCM Cistern
SCI Cistern ISU Cistern
RBC Bath RBC Premix Bath
dp debug HGB Bath
syring debug WBC Reaction Bath DIFF Bath
Valve Confirmation BASO Bath RET Bath
Probe wipe and SRV NRBC Bath Drain Fluidics
Prime
Debug-Mixing Assembly DIL Cistern FCM Cistern
Autoloader SCI Cistern ISU Cistern
Tube Detection RBC Bath
RBC Premix Bath HGB Bath
DA value and level WBC Bath DIFF Bath
BASO Bath RET Bath
Stirring motor NRBC Bath Prime Fluidics
Menu structure of DMU software
3-4
System Menu Report
Validate Batch
Report Print Validation
Review Print Preview
Worklist Batch Print
Edit Result
QC Restore Result
Statistics Patient Info.
Delete
Setup Parameter
Result
Log Microscopic Exam.
Compare
RUO Parameters
Communication
Table
View
Intraday repeated
results
Review Graphics
Review Restore default layout
History Unlock Layout
Delect
Validate Batch
Print Validation
Print Preview Batch Print
Communication Print Result
Research Summary
Restore Result Summary
Data Export Preview
Archive Print Result List
Lock Record Result List Preview
View
Table
General
Worklis WBC
t RBC
New Result Compare
Delete Microscopic Exam.
Search RUO Parameters
Copy Intraday repeated
Import results
Export Patient Info.
Print Restore default layout
Print Preview Unlock Layout
Save
Statistics
Workload Summary
Summary of Positive
Samples Auxiliary
General Summary Print
Print Communication
Print Preview Lab Info.
Setup RUO Parameter Setup

General Setup Microscopic Parameter
Parameter Setup
Setup Custom Parameter
Access Setup Setup
Data Dictionary
Reference Access Setup
Range Authorize
Parameter Unit
Screen Display
Reexam Rules
Style
Screen Display
Language of
Save
Screen Display
Log
All Logs
Other Logs
Setup
Adjustment
Error Info.
Sequence
3-5
System Menu L-J QC Read File
Settings Save
Report Graph Set Limits
Review Table Get Preset
Worklist Parameter QC Values
QC Graph Delete
Statistics Monthly QC Graph New Vial
Setup Data Compare
QC
Log Sequence
L-J QC X-B QC Save Calculate
X-B QC Set Limits Preset Values
X mean QC Settings
Get Preset Save Preset
X mean-R QC Graph
Values Values
X-M QC Table
Restore Outliers
Defaults Print
Print Preview
Delete
Calculate Preset Delete
Values Print
Save Preset Print Preview
Values Communicatio
Print n
Print Preview Data Export
X mean-R Save
QC Delete Restore
Delete
Settings New Vial
Print
Graph Data Compare New Vial
Print Preview
Table Sequence Rule of Outliers
Communicatio
Outliers Save
n
Print Print
Data Export
Print Preview Print Preview
Delete Print
Print Print Preview
Print Preview
Communicatio
n
Data Export
Save X mean QC
Read File
Restore Settings Save
Graph Set limits
Table Get Preset
Values
X-M QC Save Delete
Set limits New Vial
Settings
Get Preset Values Data Compare
Graph
Restore Defaults Sequence
Table
Calculate Preset
Delete Values
Calculate Preset Save Preset
Values Values
Save Preset Outliers
Values Print
Print Print Preview
Print Preview Delete
Print
Delete
Print Preview
Print
Communication
Print Preview
Data Export
Communication
Save
Data Export
Restore
3.4 Password
Password access levels include levels for operator, administrator and service engineer;
administrator level includes all the levels of operator, while service engineer level includes all
the levels of administrator, functions for different levels are shown in the following table in
3-6
detail.
The user name and password are the same for the analyzer and DMU.
Access level User name Password
administrator admin admin
Service engineer service Se s700
Level 3
Level 1 Level 2 Level 4 Function under
Module
Function Operation Access
Functions Functions Functions level the Access
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Level 1 Menu (Buttons) access DMU Analyzer Operator Admin Service
Menu Menu
Analyzer
Sample
Analysis
Sample

Analysis
Mode
Diluent
RUO
Background /
Review Table Review Browse
Select
Search/

Return
Switch to
"Graph
Review"
Delete /
The same
as the
Export access /
under
DMU
3-7
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Special
/
Info.
Graph
Browse
Review
RUO

Para.
Special
Info. / /
[TBD]
Select the
QC
controls file
QC
Setup
Date
(analyzer)
Predilute
Auxiliary
Mode
Setup
Prompt
Pop-up
Keyboar
d Open
Blood
Sensor
Open
Waste
Sensor
Open
Mode
Shieldin / /
g
Reagent
Maintenance /
3-8
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Autoloader /
Barcode /
Gain Setup /
Communicatio
/
n
Analyzer
Advanced / /
SN
Languag
/ /
e
To
Closed-R / /
eagent
Debug / /
User
Calibrati View
Calibration Manual View only
on only
Factor
Factory
Calibrati
/ /
on
Factor
Edit
Transfer
function / /
Factor
allowed
Initial
Value
/ /
Restorati
on
Export / /
Import / /
3-9
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Initializat
ion of the / / /
system
User
Calibrato
r /
Calibrati
on
Calibrator
Factory
Calibrato
r / / /
Calibrati
on
User
Fresh
Blood /
Calibrati
on
Fresh blood
Factory
Fresh
Blood / / /
Calibrati
on
User Edit
Transfer
transfer function / /
factor
factor allowed
History Browse /
Resend
/ /
Single
Send
Cal. / /
History
Reproducibility Run the
3-10
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
samples
Delete
Mode
Statistics
View the
detailed
records
Set the
judgmen / /
t index
View the
judgmen
t index
Restore
/
Default
Setup
and the
judgmen /
t of
accuracy
Export
Run the
Carryover
samples
Mode
View the
detailed
records
Set the
judgmen / /
t index
3-11
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Export
Aging / / /
CBC Gain / /
Function
Optical Gain s of level / /
1 allowed
Function
Sequences
Maintenance s of level / /
debug
2 allowed
Reagent
/
Priming
Cleaning /
Maintenance /
Fluidics /
Drain/ Prime / /
Log / /
Debug /
Touch
/
Screen
Possibilit
y to allow
Status /
the
functions
Position / / /
Logout
Shutdown
Data
/ /
transmissi
3-12
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
on to the
DMU
DMU
Browse
Report the
results
Delete
(include Function
the s of level /
repeat 3 allowed
results)
Commun

ication
Edit
patient

informati
on
Function
Edit
s of level /
Result
3 allowed
Function
Restore
s of level /
Result
3 allowed
Function
Validate/
s of level /
Cancel
3 allowed
Preview
Function
s of level
Print
3
upgraded
Microsco
3-13
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
pic exam
Applicati
on of

Reexam
Rules
RUO
Paramet
ers
Result

Compare
Revise
Function
the
s of level /
sample
3 allowed
No.
Restore Function
to Initial s of level /
Layout 3 allowed
Unlock
Function
the
s of level /
locked
3 allowed
screen
Review History /
Browse
RUO
Paramet
ers
Delete
(include Function
the s of level /
repeat 3 allowed
results)
Validate/ Function /
3-14
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Cancel s of level
3 allowed
Function
Export s of level /
3 allowed
Preview
Function
s of level
Print
3
upgraded
Commun

ication
Search
Lockoff
The
latest

2000
results
Function
Archive
s of level /
file
3 allowed
Main

window
Patient

Info.
WBC
RBC
Result

Compare
Microsco
3-15
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
pic Exam
RUO

Para.
Function
Q-Flag s of level
3 allowed
Function
"Special
s of level /
info."
3 allowed
Restore Function
Default s of level /
Layout 3 allowed
Unlock
Function
the
s of level /
locked
3 allowed
screen
Worklist Store
Add
Function
s of level
Delete
3
upgraded
Search
Copy

Records
Function
s of level
Import
3
upgraded
Function
Export s of level
3
3-16
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
upgraded
Function
Print s of level
3 allowed
Preview
Function
QC Setup s of level /
3 allowed
Graph
Table
Function
Edit
s of level /
Result
3 allowed
Paramet
er QC
Graph
Monthly
QC
Graph
Function
Delete s of level /
3 allowed
New vial
Cancel

New vial
Data

Compare
Function
Display
s of level /
Order
3 allowed
3-17
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Calculate Function
Preset s of level /
Values 3 allowed
Save Function
Preset s of level /
Values 3 allowed
Function
Outliers s of level /
3 allowed
Function
Print s of level
3 allowed
Preview
Workload
Statistics
Summary
Summary of
Positive
Samples
General

Summary
Function
Print s of level
3 allowed
Preview
Auxiliary
Setup
Setup
Para. Unit /
Ref. Group
and
/
Reference
Range
3-18
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Print
Communicatio

n
Flag /
RUO
Parameter /
Setup
Microscopic
Parameter /
Setup
Custom
Parameter /
Setup
Function
Reexam
s of level /
Rules
2 allowed
Data
Browse
Dictionary
Setup
(Add,
/
Edit and
Delete)
Lab Info. Browse
Setup
(Enter, /
edit)
Screen Menu

Display Display
Backgro
und
Color
3-19
Level 3
Module
s
under the
Level 2 Level 3
Menu Menu
Languag
/ /
e
Different
contents
are
Log Browse displaye
d under
different
access
Search
Function
Export s of level /
3 allowed
Help Contents
About
Close/
Logout
Close
Logout
Exit
3.5 Analyzer Software Update

3.5.1 Update Preparation
Copy the update kit "update.tar.gz" in the analyzer installation kit under the root directory of the
USB flash drive.
Note: 1. It is not necessary to unzip the update.tar.gz, just copy it to the root directory of the
USB flash drive directly.
3-20
2. USB flash drive: It is recommended to use USB flash drive of standardized brand such as
Netac, Kingston, Aigo and so on.
3.5.2 Step 1: Update process

1. Plug the USB flash drive containing the installation kit to the USB port on the right side of
the BC-6800 analyzer, then log on with the service engineer access; press the menu
button on the upper left, after the sub menu pops up, click "Status""Version Info.", the
Version Info. screen is shown as follows.
Figure 3-1 Version Info. Screen
2. Click the "Start Update" button at the bottom, the following note will pop up.
Figure 3-2 Confirm whether to enter the update screen
3-21
3. After you click "Yes", the update screen is shown as Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-4 Update screen
4. Click" Update" and start the update process. The update preparation note will pop up as
follows:
Figure 3-5 Note of update preparation
5. The update process in generally within 10 second and 1 minute at most, "......" will display
circularly on the screen, wait patiently. Then the following update preparation note will pop
up after the preparation is finished:
Figure 3-6 Note of Project info. and CD info
3-22
6. Click "Yes" to start the update process. The update progress bar will display on the screen
as follows:
Figure 3-7 Update process note
7. After Step 1 is finished, the following note will pop up:
Figure 3-8 Note of the unfinished update
8. Click "OK", the following note will pop up, and then shut down the analyzer.
Figure 3-9 Restart note
3.5.3 Step 2: Update process

1. Start up the analyzer, plug the USB flash drive which is used in Step 1 to the USB port at
the right side of the analyzer, enter the screen as shown below:
3-23
Note: After starting up the analyzer, do not power off and restart the analyzer before
update successfully.
Figure 3-10 Update screen
2. Click" Update" and start the update process. A note of update preparation will pop up
shown as follows:
Figure 3-11 Note of update preparation
3. The update process is generally within 10 second and 1 minute at most, "......" will display
circularly on the screen, wait patiently. A note of update preparation shown as follows will
pop up after the preparation is finished:
Figure 3-12 Note of Project info. and CD info.
3-24
4. Click "Yes" and start the update process. The file verification screen is shown as follows:
Figure 3-13 File verification note
5. After the files are verified, enter the file update screen; update the software and then the
hardware drive after the files are updated. The update software screen is shown as
follows:
Figure 3-14 Update software note
Note: If the software is changed, the software will be updated; if the hardware drive is changed,
a note of "Updating the driver board" will pop up. If no item is changed, then the update note
will not display.
6. The data update screen is shown as follows:
Figure 3-15 Data update note
7. After the data is updated, a note of "Update succeeded!" will pop up as follows:
3-25
Figure 3-16 Note of update succeeded
8. Click "OK", a note to shut down the analyzer will pop up, start up the analyzer, the screen
is shown as follows:
Figure 3-17 Restart analyzer note
9. Shut down the analyzer, plug out the USB flash drive and wait for a while, such as 20
seconds, then start up the analyzer and begin the startup process.
10. Press the menu button on the upper left, after the sub menu pops up, click
"Status""Version Info.", the version info. Screen is shown as follows.
3.6 DMU Software Installation

3.6.1 PC recommended configuration
Hardware configuration Software configuration
Memory: 2GB Operating system
Hard disk space: 320GB Windows 7
CD-ROM: DVD-RW
Network port: two network ports (one is Database: SQL Server 2005 Express SP3
integrating while another is separated)
It is recommended to divide the hard disk as follows:
Disk C: 40G system disk for installing operating system and DMU software
Disk D: 200G data disk for DMU data files and backup files
3-26
Disk E: 80G file disk for other files
3.6.2 DMU installation procedure

1.Open the installation disk, right click setup.exe and run under the administrator access and
start installing.
Figure 3-18 Run the installation procedure
2.Then the "User account control" will pop up, click "Yes" and start installing.
3.The installation program will check the operating condition, such as the version of the
operating system, whether there are .Net Framework 2.0 items and whether the SQL Server is
installed, the following note will pop up.
Figure 3-19 Item checking
3-27
4.If all the items needed for the "Auto hematology analyzer software" are installed, click next to
choose language in the dialog box, the language chosen will be used after the Auto
hematology analyzer software is installed.
Figure 3-20 Language selecting dialog box
5.Click "OK" and prepare to install, the next screen is shown:
Figure 3-21 Next step of the installation
6.Click "Next", enter the software customization screen as shown:
Auto start of the DMU after startup: the DMU will start automatically after the PC starts;
Activate the safety management: this function ensure the DMU running environment is
not damaged and guarantee the safety, reliability and endurance of the DMU data and
make the operating system under control; if the safety management is activated,
administrators other than the default administrator cannot access Windows 7 system
which is limited by DMU, only the administrator, service engineer and common user could
log on Windows 7 and use DMU, administrator is generally disabled while installing the
Windows 7, if the account needs to be seen, cancel the disabled administrator account on
the Computer Management-User account;
3-28
Figure 3-22 Software customize screen
7.Click Next, enter the dialog box for selecting the data directory in the database and
installation directory, the screen is shown as follows:
Figure 3-23 Database path and backup path selection
3-29
8.Click "Next", enter the item selection and installation directory dialog box, the program is
generally installed under the C:\Program Files and write-protect the file after the installation to
protect from damage, to ensure the "Auto hematology analyzer software" to run normally, it is
recommended that there is 130M left in the installation disk.
Figure 3-24 Program installation directory selection
9.Click "Next", and the installation confirmation dialog box will pop up.
Figure 3-25 Installation confirmation dialog box
3-30
10.Click "Install" and start the "Auto hematology analyzer" installation.
Figure 3-26 Software installation process
11.The printing template will be configured during the installation process, when the status
displays "Configuring printing template... the following dialog box will pop up and click "No".
Figure 3-27 Printing template update dialog box
12.The installation finished after this step is finished, the finished confirmation note will pop up.
Click "Finished" and exit the installation program, shortcuts on the desktop and program menu
will be created.
3-31
Figure 3-28 Installation finished note
Figure 3-29 Desktop shortcut
13.After the DMU is started, click the up right button on the following screen to confirm the
version.
Click this icon to check

the version information
Figure 3-30 Version button
3-32
Figure 3-31 Version info.
3.7 DMU Software Update

3.7.1 DMU Software Update
Step 1: Update preparation
1. If the DMU software is opened on the PC, the DMU software shall be closed first.
2. Open the DMU CD with the CD-ROM, such as Release_V01.03.00.12080.iso.
Step 2: Update process
1.Open the installation CD, right click the setup.exe and run under the administrator
access and start installing.
Figure 3-32 Run the installation procedure

3-33
2.Then the "User account control" dialog box will pop up, click "Yes" and start installing.
3.After starting the setup program, the screen indicates that it is preparing, after the
preparation finished and the following screen appears, the "Next" button is activated, the
screen is shown as follows:
Figure 3-33 Installation guide
4.Click "Install" on the following screen;
Figure 3-34 Installation screen

3-34
5.Install when the installation guide appears, "Configuring printing template..." prompts
and the following dialog box appears, click "No" in this step;
Figure 3-35 Printing template selection screen
6.After finish updating, click "Finished" on the following screen and finish updating.
Figure 3-36 Update finished screen
7.Double click the DMU shortcut icon on the desktop after the update is finished;
8.After the DMU software is opened, click the version information icon on the upper right
to confirm that the analyzer version is updated successfully;
3-35
Click this icon to check
the version information
Figure 3-37 Version info. button
Note:
1. The "Auto hematology analyzer" software cannot be updated from higher version to lower
version.
2. The previous setup, sample results, patient information, print template and so on will be
saved after the DMU is updated, the previous counts, patient information, setup before update,
print template and so on can be viewed on the updated DMU.
3.7.2 DMU Software Repair

When the auto hematology is running, if some files are damaged which cause the software
cannot be used normally, double click the setup.exe in the CD of the same version, then the
"Change, repair or delete" dialog box will pop up, "Repair" or "Delete" the DMU software.
Figure 3-38 Change, repair or delete
Note: This screen is contained in the Windows Installer tool, meanwhile the "Change" button is
not used in the installation of the 3201DMU and will be canceled; "Repair" will be used when
some files are damaged and cannot be used, the damaged or lost files can be repaired, just
operate based on the note of the screen; "Delete" means to delete the DMU software but keep
the DMU software configuration file, database files, printing template and so on, click the
"Delete" button and click "Next" based on the note.
3-36
3.8 Backup and Restoration
The hard disk or board maybe damaged and needs to be replaced at the user end. To ensure
that the important parameters will not be lost by replacing, the important data of the analyzer
needs to be backed up or restored.
There are 2 ways to backup: Auto backup and manual backup; the restoration can only be
done manually.
3.8.1 Auto backup

Auto backup: When the analyzer is in the auto sleep mode or shut down, the analyzer will
backup the important data such as calibration factors to the DMU of a safer computer.
Precondition of the auto backup:
a)If the analyzer and the DMU are connected normally, the status light of the DMU is
"Ready status".
b)Log on the analyzer with the service engineer account;
c)Enter the auto sleep mode or shut down the analyzer.
Note: The auto backup maybe fail if the network is disconnected or power off, there will be no
note on the screen.
3.8.2 Manual backup and restoration

1) The manual backup are mainly used in the following situation:
1. After it is backed up automatically, the service engineer will replace a new CF

card; after log on with the service engineer account, the restoration needs to be
done manually, which is to copy the backed up data to the new CF card, so that
the new CF card can use the important parameters before being replaced, such
as the setup, statistics and so on.
2. The customer engineer will install the DMU software on a new computer; the CF
card of the analyzer is not new. Log on with the service engineer access and
backup manually, which is to backup the important data of the analyzer to the
DMU of the PC for restoration.
2) Manual backup procedure:
1. Precondition: If the analyzer and the DMU are connected normally, the status light of the
DMU is "Ready status".
2. Click the analyzer menuLogout, then the login box will pop up; enter the password of the
service engineer and click "OK";
3-37
Figure 3-39 Logon screen
Click "OK", wait for 10s and enter the next screen;
3. Then a dialog box indicating device inconsistency will pop up as follows:
Figure 3-40 Backup restoration dialog box
4. Click the "OK" button and the following screen will pop up, wait for 10s, do not power off in
this process;
Figure 3-41 Waiting screen

3-38
5. After about 10s, enter the backup restoration screen as follows:
Figure 3-42 Backup restoration screen
6. Click the Backup" button, the system will perform backup automatically and prompt will
be given when backup finishes successfully.
Figure 3-43 Backup restoration note
3. Click "OK" and the following note will pop up, power off and then restart the analyzer.
Figure 3-44 Backup succeeded screen
3-39
3) Manual backup procedure
The procedure for manual restoration is almost the same as that of the manual backup,
however, the "Backup" button is inactive in step 5 of the manual backup procedure, click
the "Restore" button and do based on the note.
3.8.3 Explanation of the abnormal backup and restoration

Q: In what case will the "Backup" and "Restoration" both be activated on the backup and
restoration screen?
A: Case 1: If the user log on with the service engineer account and the auto backup fails, a
note of device inconsistency will pop up, enter the backup and restoration screen, the
"Backup" and "Restore" buttons will be both activated, the user can backup and restore
manually;
Case 2: If the user log on with the service engineer account, the CF card replaced by the
analyzer is not a new one but a backed up one, a note of device inconsistency will pop up,
enter the backup and restoration screen, the "Backup" and "Restore" buttons will be both
activated, the user can backup and restore manually.
3.9 Connection device between the DMU and analyzer

3.9.1 Direct connection between DMU and analyzer
Direct connection means the PC with the DMU installed is connected to the analyzer with a
network cable, after the communication is setup properly, the DMU can communicate with the
analyzer.
1. Analyzer setup
Figure 3-45 Analyzer connection setup
2. DMU Setup
Open the DMU and double click the on the upper left, the analyzer connection dialog
box will pop up:
3-40
Figure 3-46 DMU connection setup dialog box
Set the IP address of the analyzer as 10.0.0.12, enter the analyzer name and save it.
Figure 3-47 Direct-connected address setup
Note: Click the area other than the dialog box to close the dialog box.
3. Connection status
Click the "Save" button. The connection status changes as

"Disconnected->Connecting->Connected", the relevant "Analyzer status" then changes to
green dot, meanwhile the SN of the connected analyzer is shown as follows:
Figure 3-48 Connection status
3-41
If something is wrong with the analyzer, the "analyzer status" field will be marked as a red
dot.
3.9.2 DMU connected to the analyzer in LAN

Connect the PC with the DMU and the analyzer to the LAN with the network cable, after it is
setup properly, the DMU can communicate with the analyzer.
1. Analyzer setup
For user of the administrator lever or above, click "Setup"- "Communication in the menu,
enter the communication setup screen, enter the following information:
Figure 3-49 Analyzer communication setup
1Enter the IP address of the analyzer, such as 192.168.5.12
2Then enter "255.255.255.0" in the "Subnet Mask" field.
3Enter the Gateway for the LAN, such as 192.168.5.233
Enter the other screen after entering the gateway, click "Yes" to save the gateway.
2. DMU Setup
Open the DMU and double click the on the upper left, the analyzer connection dialog
box will pop up:
Figure 3-50 DMU connection setup dialog box

3-42
Click the "New" button and enter the information in the following fields:
1) Analyzer name: Enter as needed, for example: HOST1
2) IP address: enter the IP address which is the name as the analyzer, such as
192.168.5.12
3) Click the "Save" button, click area other than the dialog box to close the dialog box.
Figure 3-51 DMU connection setup
3.9.3 Common Q & A

Q: What is the meaning of the color of the DMU status light?
A: The statuses of the lights are as follows.
Figure 3-1 Status description of the DMU light
Analyzer
Definition Description
status
No matter what status the system is before,

"Ready", samples can be when return to the ready status, make sure
Ready
analyzed directly that the results of the sample analysis of this
status is correct and reliable
Include but not limited to the following

situations:
1. Sample analysis
Active, the system is active for 2. Mode switch

some certain purpose
3. System maintenance (Startup, shutdown,
reagent replacing, cleaning, priming, pack up
and so on)
4. System self-test
3-43
Attention, the system is at
All the status which may bring in risks to the
risk, however the user can
sample analysis (such as the diluent is used
restore this status back to
up or the background is not satisfied)
normal
Include but not limited to the following

Standby, if the system is not
situations:
used for a long time or at
certain status for a long time, it 1. Standby
can enter the Ready status
2. Soaking
Error, the system is at the The system fails to return to the Ready status
error status, it can only enter because of the damaged or abnormal parts, it
the Ready status until after it is can only return to the Ready status until
repaired repaired by the user or professionals
Q: How many connection statuses are there between the analyzer and the DMU?
A: The connection status is "Disconnected"->"Connecting"->"Connected", the relevant

"Analyzer status" then changes to a green dot, meanwhile the SN of the connected analyzer is
shown.
Q: Can the connection of the analyzer and DMU be revised? How to revise?
A: Yes. It can be revised as follows:
1) On the DMU screen, double click the on the upper left and open the
connection setup dialog box.
2) Select the analyzer name which is highlighted
3) Click "Revise" and edit relevant connection information
4) Click the "Save" button.
Q: Can certain connection be deleted?
A: Yes. It can be deleted as follows:
1) On the DMU screen, double click the on the upper left and open the
connection setup dialog.
2) Select the analyzer and highlight the line
3) Click "Delete"
4) Click the "Save" button.
3-44
Q: Why is the connection status "connecting" when the IP address is setup both on the
analyzer and the DMU?
A:
1) Check if the IP address of the analyzer is correct.

2) Check if the IP address of the analyzer is the same as that in the DMU connection dialog
box.
3.10 LIS Communication Setup

The communication system mainly supports the system to communicate the analyzer data by
uni-directional LIS or Bi-directional LIS, setup the communication at the DMU.
Note: For user of the administrator lever or above, click "Setup"- "Communication" in the menu.
There are two communication methods:
1) Serial port communication: The DMU uses the serial port to communicate.
2) Network port: The DMU communicates by TCP.
3.10.1 Serial port communication

1) After the serial port communication is selected and connected, select relevant serial device
in the following serial port setup.
Figure 3-52 Serial port communication setup
2) After setting, click "Save" and the setting will be effective. Note: The baud rate shall be fixed
as 115200.
3.10.2 Network port communication

1) After the Network interface is selected and the network cables are connected, set
up the relevant network.
3-45
Figure 3-53 Network communication
2) IP Address:
1 If DMU communicates as user end, enter the IP Address of the LIS server;
2 If DMU communicates as the server, the IP Address will be ignored.
3) Port
1 If the DMU communicates as user end, enter the port for the LIS server;
2 If DMU communicates as the server, enter the port name of the analyzer
monitor.
4) Software of the PC works as the server: Effective under the network

communication condition.
(1) Selected: DMU communicates as the TCP server
(2) Unselected: DMU communicates as the TCP
3.10.3 Protocol Setup
Figure 3-54 Protocol setup screen

3-46
1. Protocol Type (the follow 3 protocols for both serial port and network interface)
1) HL7+UTF8:
2) 15ID+GBK:
3) 15ID+UTF8:
4) ASTM
2. ACK Synchronous communication
1) It can only be selected when the HL7 Protocol is selected;
2) Selected: After the DMU transmit a sample result or QC count, wait for the ACK, after
the ACK has received or timeout, transmit the next result;
3) Unselected: The DMU will transmit a sample result or QC count after the last sample
result or QC count is transmitted, all the ACK message from the transmitted from the
LIS will be ignored;
4) ACK Timeout: It is effective with the ACK Synchronous communication, the time
refers to the maximum time that DMU waits for the ACK after the results are
transmitted.
3. Transmission Mode
1) 2-Way LIS/HIS Communication: If it is selected, the sample information maybe

searched from LIS when running the samples.
2) Auto Communication: If it is selected, the sample results including LJ QC results with

special sample ID will try auto Communication when reached the DMU;
3) Transmit as Print Bitmap Data
i) Selected: histogram/scattergram transmitted as Bitmap data are consistent with the

printout, the background is white, the histogram is not filled up but outlined;
ii) Unselected: histogram/scattergram transmitted as Bitmap data are consistent with

the screen.
4. Histogram Transmitted as
1) Not transmitted, the sample results data does not include the histogram data;
2) Bitmap, the sample results data included the histogram bitmap data;
3) Data, the sample results include histogram binary original data.
5. Scattergram Transmitted as
1) Not transmitted, the sample results data does not include the scattergram data;
2) Bitmap, the sample results data included the scattergram bitmap data;
3) Data, the sample results include scattergram binary original data.
3-47
3.11 Uni-directional LIS Communication
3.11.1 Function overview
1. Auto communication of the normal samples
Before the auto communication, check if the auto communication is selected and the LIS
communication is normal (if the LIS is connected properly, the dark blue cursor at the
bottom right will be highlighted, when the mouse move to the cursor, it will prompt
Connected as shown below.
Figure 3-55 Auto communication
After the counts, the analyzer will transmit the sample results to the DMU (Data Managing Unit)
at the PC, if the auto communication setup is correct and connected properly, the results will
be transmitted to the LIS automatically and the communication is normal. The samples on the
Review and Report screen will marked with a tick at the communication column which is
shown as follows, if the communication fails, it will prompt the note at the screen as follows.
3-48
Figure 3-56 Successful communication mark 1
Figure 3-57 Successful communication mark 2
3-49
Figure 3-58 Communication failure mark
2.Auto communication of the QC results
a. Only the LJ results whose QC sample ID is set can communicate automatically when
reaches the DMU, other QC data can be communicates manually.
b. After the QC counts finish, the analyzer will transmit the QC results to the DMU, if the
auto communication setup is correct and the LIS is connected properly, the results
will be communicated to the LIS automatically.
c. The LJ QC samples with special sample ID will be transmitted as encode of normal

samples in the auto communication.
3.Sample batch communication
Before the batch communication, ensure that the LIS is connected properly.
Figure 3-59 LIS connected
For the normal sample results, batch communication can be done on the Review and Report
screen. After the communication is successful, relevant sample results will be marked with
communicated.
1Sample batch communication
Enter the report screen, select several samples and right click, click the communication
3-50
button; or just click the Communication button on the tool bar and the selected samples
will be communicated to the LIS.
Figure 3-60 LIS communication button
During the communication, the communication progress bar will be shown at the bottom of the
DMU. Move the mouse to the progress bar, a note will prompt, click Cancel and cancel the
batch communication.
Figure 3-61 Communication progress bar
If there is network disconnection error (such as disconnected network), the batch

communication will stop, a note will prompt to inform the user, the prompt can be seen when
the mouse is moved to the progress bar, which is shown as below.
Click the OK on the following screen, the communication mission will stop, after the
communication error is removed, start the communication again.
3-51
Figure 3-62 Unfinished transmission
2Communication on the Review screen
Click the "Communication" button; select All data or Specified data, and then click the
Start button to transmit data as follows:
Figure 3-63 Data communication at the review screen
3Batch communication of the QC results
The batch communication of the QC sample results can be done at the QC screen, click the
Communication button at the QC Table screen, then click Start on the note to transmit the
data.
3-52
Figure 3-64 Batch communication of the QC data
If there is network disconnection error (such as disconnected network), the batch

communication will stop, a prompt will pop up to inform the user at the DMU. (The same as the
Review screen)
3.11.2 Common Q & A

1. If the server fails to work, a prompt Monitor failure, restart the DMU or try the
communication after changing the communication Port. will pop up on the screen, which
is shown as below. In this case, check if the communication setup at the DMU is correct.
For example, check if the Terminal Software as Server and the LIS are both set as the
server; or if the communication port is set improperly. For how to set the port, see the
setup of the LIS.
Figure 3-65 Monitor failure
2. If the communication fails, the following tips will prompt. The reasons for the failure may
be as follows:
1)Communication setup at the DMU is not correct, set the communication based on the
communication setup guide.
3-53
2)DMU and LIS are not connected successfully. Check the cables and lines to see if the
LIS can be used.
Note: there are over 10 cases for the failure judgment by the program, such as network
connection error, serial port is engaged, data not transmitted, failed to receive the LIS,
response format error of the LIS.
Figure 3-66 Communication failed
3. Communication timeout
Reason: DMU fails to receive the response because of timeout or the respond message does
not meet the requirements of the protocol. In this case, check if items of the communication
setup at the DMU are correct, check if network is connected properly and whether the respond
from the LIS meets the protocol. If the communication is timeout caused by the busy network,
cancel the ACK Synchronous communication on the communication setup screen. Note:
After the data is transmitted, ACK refers to the response that transmits to the DMU by the LIS.
3.12 Bi-Directional LIS Communication

3.12.1 Working with Worklist in Bi-Directional LIS/HIS
Before performing any operation in bi-directional LIS/HIS, make sure the "2-Way LIS/HIS
Communication" option is selected, and the LIS connection is in normal status (the LIS status
icon is colored in blue, and there is a prompt of "Connected" when you put the mouse on it, as
shown in the figure below).
3-54
Figure 3-67 Bi-Directional LIS/HIS Communication
When bi-directional LIS/HIS is enabled, you can only enter the "Sample ID", "Mode", "Rack
No." and "Tube No." in the "Worklist" screen.
For any item in "Ready" status in the worklist, you can edit the mode whenever needed.
Creating a new worklist item:
Click the "New" button; Enter the sample ID, click any other text box or click the "Save" button.
DMU sends a worklist request to LIS/HIS. If there is a valid result, it will be displayed on the
screen, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-68 Creating a new worklist

3-55
If there are invalid data in the searching result, DMU will not display the data and will give a
prompt shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-69 Prompt of invalid data
3.12.2 Entering the Patient Information at the "Report" screen

in Bi-Directional LIS/HIS
The bi-directional LIS/HIS function has no effect to the entering of patient information at the
"Report" screen. The user can enter patient information before sample analysis. But the DMU
will request and save patient information after the sample analysis results are attained, and if
there is any inconsistency between the responded information and entered information, the
responded one will be adopted.
3.12.3 Sample Analysis Request in Bi-Directional LIS/HIS

1. When bi-directional LIS/HIS is enabled, the sample ID can not increase automatically;
2. In open-vial/autoloading analysis as per worklist: the worklist information will be acquired

from the LIS/HIS end (see 3.12.1Working with Worklist in Bi-Directional LIS/HIS for
details). When the analysis if finished, the analysis results, graphics, and sample
information will be send to LIS/HIS;
3. In open-vial analysis (not as per worklist): if bi-directional LIS/HIS is enabled, after you
enter or scan the sample ID and save it, the DMU will request information of this sample,
and then perform analysis based on the responded information. When the analysis if
finished, the analysis results, graphics, and sample information will be send to LIS/HIS;
4. In autoloading analysis with built-in barcode scanner: if bi-directional LIS/HIS is enabled,

when the sample ID is attained from scanning, it will be sent to DMU, and then DMU
sends a request to LIS/HIS. When the DMU get the valid analysis mode information, it will
send the information to the analyzer. When the analysis is finished, the analysis results,
graphics and sample information will be sent to LIS/HIS.
3.12.4 FAQ
1. If the server fails to start up, the DMU will prompt "Fail to start up monitoring. Please
restart the terminal software or change the communication port, and then try again." In
this case, check for incorrect communication setup of DMU. E.g. set LIS/HIS to be the server
3-56
when "Terminal Software as Server" in communication setup is selected; or select the wrong
port. See 3.10 LIS Communication Setup for how to set communication port.
Figure 3-70 Failing to monitor
2. If LIS/HIS is disabled, "No LIS/HIS Connection Available" will be prompted and the saving
fails. In this case, check whether the DMU and LIS/HIS is properly connected, and whether the
DMU communication setup is correct. To check the connection between DMU and LIS/HIS: if
the connection is proper, the LIS icon will be in dark blue, and if you place the mouse on it,
there will be a prompt of "Connected", as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-71 Checking the Connection
3. In the process of request, if
1 There is communication error or overtime, there will be a prompt of

"Communication overtime". This is because the DMU does not receive response
in defined time or the response does not meet the requirement of the communication
protocol. In this case, check the DMU communication setup, network connection and
3-57
the response from LIS/HIS. If the communication overtime is caused by busy
network, deselect "ACK Synchronous Communication" in DMU communication
setup.
2 If the analysis mode is not attained or the responded mode is not valid, there will be
a prompt "Analysis mode ineffective". In this case, check whether the analysis
mode acquired from LIS is valid.
3 If the patient information inconsistent with the "Data Dictionary" of DMU, there will
be a prompt of "Information acquisition ineffective". In this case, check whether
the patient information acquired from LIS is valid.
4. LIS/HIS request failure caused by abnormal data which include:
1)Invalid data, which include the following cases:
A.Coded character can not be identified
B.Length of string out of limit
C.Undefined type. E.g. the presentation mode is neither "OV" nor "AL".
D.Invalid data in one field of patient information. E.g. date of birth later than system date.
2)Field missing. E.g. no valid analysis mode is acquired by the DMU.
3)Acquired mode inconsistent with the current mode. E.g. in autoloading analysis, the
acquired presentation mode is open-vial.
Open-Vial:
Field Status Perform analysis? Prompt
Missing
Presentation
Invalid Yes, in open-vial None
mode
Inconsistent
Blood Missing
Yes, in current mode None
Mode Invalid
Analysis Missing DMU: Ineffective Analysis

Yes, in current mode
mode Invalid Mode
Missing
Patient DMU: Invalid *** (e.g. Invalid
Invalid Yes. Ignore the invalid part
information gender)
Overlength
3-58
Autoloading:
Field Status Perform analysis? Prompt
Missing
Presentation
Invalid Yes, in autoloading None
mode
Inconsistent
Missing
Blood Mode Yes, in whole blood None
Invalid
Analysis Missing Yes, in the mode of the

DMU: Ineffective Analysis Mode
mode Invalid previous sample
Missing
Patient
Invalid Yes. Ignore the invalid part DMU: Invalid *** (e.g. Invalid gender)
information
Overlength
3-59
4 Operation Principles
4.1 Measurement of the Optical Channel
4.1.1Laser Flow Cytometry
Figure 4-1 WBC measurement
The blood sample reacted with certain amount of lyse and fluorescent dye is injected into the
conical flow cell filled with diluent by the sample probe. Surrounded with sheath fluid (diluent),
the blood cells pass through the center of the flow cell in a single column. When the blood cells
suspended in the diluent pass through the flow cell, they are exposed to a laser beam. The
intensity of the light scatter reflects the blood cell size and intracellular granularity. The
low-angle forward scatter reflects cell size, the high-angle side scatter reflects intracellular
granularity, and the intensity of fluorescent signal reflects the contents of RNA and DNA in the
cells. The light signals are collected and converted into electrical pulses. Each blood cell will
generate electrical pulse in the directions of low-angle, high-angle and fluorescent light scatter.
Pulse data collected can be used to draw a 3-dimensional distribution (scattergram), with the
low-angle FS, high angle SS and fluorescence FL as the axes. The scattergram reflects cell
size, intracellular granularity and contents of RNA/DNA. The blood cells are differentiated
according to their different clinical characteristics.
The BC-6800 Auto Hematology Analyzer can obtain scattergrams of 4 channels, which are
DIFF, BASO, NRBC and RET channels. The DIFF channel differentiates lymphocytes,
monocytes, neutrophils and eosinophils; the BASO channel differentiates basophils; the NRBC
channel differentiates nucleated red blood cells; and the RET channel differentiates
reticulocytes.
4-1
Fluorescence RNA/DNA content
Beam Side scatter

splitter
Structure inside cells
Laser beam
Forward scatter
Cell size
Figure 4-2 Optical measurement principle
4.1.2Nucleated Red Blood Cell
The NRBC scattergram includes WBC region and NRBC region. The ratio of particle number in
the NRBC region (NRBC#_N) to the particle number in the non-ghost region of the NRBC
channel (WBC_N) is NRBC%_N, which is the NRBC% in the analysis report. The number of
NRBCs can be calculated by multiplying the WBC# and the NRBC%.
NRBC#_N
NRBC%=NRBC%_N= 100%
WBC_N
NRBC#= WBC NRBC%
4.1.3WBC-Related Parameters
The spots in the Bas region of the BASO scattergram reflects number of basophils (Baso#_B),
and all spots in the scattergram reflects number of WBCs (WBC_B). The basophil percentage
(Baso%) can be obtained through calculation. As the NRBCs are also recognized as
lymphocytes, the NRBC# shall be deducted from WBC#.
WBC= WBC _ B
100% NRBC%
Baso#= Baso#_B
Baso #
Baso%= 100%
WBC
The DIFF scattergram contains the lymphocyte (Lym#_D), neutrophil (Neu#_D), monocyte
(Mon#_D) and eosinophil (Eos#_D) cell populations; the ratio of particle number in each region
to the total number of WBC particles is the percentage of each cell population, namely
Lym%_D, Mon%_D, Eos%_D and Neu%_D. In the DIFF channel, NRBCs are recognized as
lymphocytes, and basophils are recognized as neutrophils, so NRBC# must be deducted from
4-2
WBC# to get the true percentage of each cell population.
The calculation equations of WBC-related parameters:
Lym#_D-WBC_D NRBC%
Lym%= 100%
WBC_D (100% NRBC%)
Lym#= WBC Lym%
Neu#_D
Neu%= 100% Baso%
WBC_D (100% NRBC%)
Neu#= WBC Neu%
Mon#_D
Mon%= 100%
WBC_D (100% NRBC%)
Mon#= WBC Mon%
Eos#_D
Eos%= 100%
WBC_D (100% NRBC%)
Eos#= WBC Eos%
4.1.4RET-Related Parameters
The ratio of particle number in the RET region to the sum of particles in the mature RBC region
and the RET region is the RET percentage. RET# can be calculated by multiplying RET% and
RBC#.
In the RET extension scattergram, the ratio of particle number in the high fluorescent region to
the particle number in the RET region is the high fluorescent RET ratio (HFR); the middle
fluorescent RET ratio (MFR) can be calculated likewise; the low fluorescent RET ratio can be
obtained by deducting HFR and MFR from 100. The immature RET ratio is the sum of MFR
and HFR.
RET#_R
RET%= 100%
RBC _ O + RET#_R
RET#= RBC RET%
HFR=
MFR=
LFR= 100 MFR HFR
IRF= MFR + HFR
4-3
4.2 HGB Measurement
4.2.1 Colorimetric Method
HGB is determined by the colorimetric method. The diluted sample is delivered to the HGB
bath where it is mixed with a certain amount of lyse, which converts hemoglobin to a
hemoglobin complex. An LED is mounted on one side of the bath and emits a beam of
monochromatic light. The light passes through the sample and is then measured by an optical
sensor that is mounted on the opposite side. The signal is then amplified and the voltage is
measured and compared to the blank reference reading (readings taken when there is only
diluent in the bath), and the HGB is measured and calculated in the analyzer automatically.
4.2.2 HGB
The HGB is calculated per the following equation and expressed in g/L.
HGB=
4.3 RBC/PLT Measurement

4.3.1 Electrical Impedance Method
RBCs/PLTs are counted and sized by electrical impedance method. This method is based on
the measurement of changes in electrical resistance produced by a particle, which in this case
is a blood cell, suspended in a conductive diluent as it passes through an aperture of known
dimensions. An electrode is submerged in the liquid on both sides of the aperture to create an
electrical pathway. As each particle passes through the aperture, a transitory change in the
resistance between the electrodes is produced. This change produces a measurable electrical
pulse. The number of pulses generated signals the number of particles that passed through
the aperture. The amplitude of each pulse is proportional to the volume of each particle.
Figure 4-3 Electrical impedance method
4-4
Each pulse is amplified and compared to the voltage thresholds of the RBC/PLT channel, and
then the number of pulses in the RBC/PLT channel is calculated. That is to say, the pulses
collected are sorted per the voltage thresholds of different channels, the number of pulses
falling in the range of the RBC/PLT channel is the number of RBCs/PLTs. The number of cells
in each channel defines the volume distribution of cells. The analyzer presents the RBC/PLT
histogram, whose x-coordinate represents the cell volume and y-coordinate represents the
number of the cells.
4.3.2 Sheath Fluid Impedance Method
Figure 4-4 Sheath fluid impedance method
Back flow may be produced when cells pass through the aperture under the effect of vacuum,
or the overlapping of cells increases the probability of occurrence of M wave in the pulse
signals, which may affect the accuracy of analysis results. To solve the problem, sheath fluid
function is added to the RBC/PLT channel of BC-6800. Blood cells injected by the sample
probe pass through the aperture one by one in a queue under the "focusing" effect of sheath
fluid in the front and back baths, so that regular pulse signals can be produced to generate
more accurate results. The sheath fluid impedance method also relaxes the requirement on
sample dilution; second dilution of the RBC channel is not needed anymore, and the accuracy
of results can be ensured.
4.3.3 RBC-Related Parameters

The number of RBCs can be obtained by measuring the number of pulses of the RBC channel.
The Mean Corpuscular Volume (MCV) can be obtained by measuring the cell volume reflected
by the amplitude of pulses. Likewise, the number of PLTs and Mean Platelet Volume (MPV)
can be obtained by measuring the pulses and cell volume of PLTs. The other parameters can
be calculated per the following equation:
n
RBC _ V
i =1
i
MCV(fL)=
n
4-5
n
PLT _ V
i =1
i
MPV(fL)=
n
RBC(1012 / L) MCV ( fL )
HCT(%)=
10
PLT(109 / L) MPV(fL)
PCT(%)=
10000
HGB(g/L)
MCH(pg)=
RBC(1012 / L)
HGB(g/L)
MCHC(g/L)= 100
HCT(%)
4-6
5 Fluidics
Figure 5-1 Flow Chart of the Fluidics System
5-1
5.1 Parameter Measurement
Measurement Modules RBC/PLT HGB
Operation Principles Sheath fluid Colorimetric Method
Measurement Channel RBC/PLT channel HGB channel
Information PLT histogram RBC histogram /
HCT RBC HGB

Parameter PLT
MCV, MCH, MCHC
Calculated Parameters MPV, PDW, P-LCR RDW-CV/SD
Reagent Diluent LH lyse
Measurement
WBC/RET
Modules
Operation
sheath fluid + laser scatter method
Principles
Measurement
WBC/BASO 4DIFF NRBC RET
Channel
NRBC
Information BASO scattergram 4DIFF scattergram RET scattergram
scattergram
BASO% Lym% Mon% Neu% Eos% NRBC% RET% RET#

Parameter WBC#
BASO# Lym# Mon# Neu# Eos# NRBC# PLT-O
Calculated
L/M/HFR, IRF
Parameter
LD lyse LN lyse DR diluent

Reagent LB lyse
FD dye FN dye FR dye
5-2
5.2 Reagent System
Table 5-1 Reagent system
Reaction Reagent Function
bath
The M-68LD LYSE is formulated to lyse red blood cells and

process white blood cells in the blood cell measurement,
amplify the differences among WBC sub-populations and
facilitate the dyeing effect of white blood cells by M-68FD
M-68LD LYSE DYE. It participates in the measurement of WBC-related
parameters which is accomplished by using flow cytometry
combining with laser scatter method and fluorescent staining
method.
DIFF
The M-68LD LYSE is formulated to lyse red blood cells and
process white blood cells in the blood cell measurement,
amplify the differences among WBC sub-populations and
facilitate the dyeing effect of white blood cells by M-68FD
M-68FD DYE DYE. It participates in the measurement of WBC-related
parameters which is accomplished by using flow cytometry
combining with laser scatter method and fluorescent staining
method.
The M-68LB LYSE is formulated for lysing of red blood cells

and differential processing of white blood cells in blood cell
measurement; it amplifies the differences between the
BASO M-68LB LYSE basophils and other WBC sub-populations. It participates in
basophil-related parameter analysis which is accomplished
by using flow cytometry combining with laser scatter method
and fluorescent staining method.
The M-68DR DILUENT is formulated to lyse red blood cells

in blood cell measurement, facilitate the dyeing effect of
M-68DR reticulocytes by M-68FR DYE. It participates in the
DILUENT measurement of RET-related parameters which is
accomplished by using flow cytometry combining with laser
scatter method and fluorescent staining method.
RET
The M-68FR DYE is formulated to dye reticulocytes with the
assist of M-68DR DILUENT. It participates in the
M-68FR DYE measurement of RET-related parameters which is
accomplished by using flow cytometry combining with laser
scatter method and fluorescent staining method.
The M-68LN LYSE is formulated to lyse red blood cells in

blood cell measurement, facilitate the dying effect of NRBCs
NRBC by M-68FN DYE It participates in the measurement of
M-68LN LYSE
NRBC-related parameters which is accomplished by using
flow cytometry combining with laser scatter method and
5-3
fluorescent staining method.
The M-68FN DYE is formulated to dye the NRBCs with the

assist of M-68LN LYSE It participates in the measurement of
M-68FN DYE NRBC-related parameters which is accomplished by using
flow cytometry combining with laser scatter method and
fluorescent staining method.
The M-68LH LYSE is formulated to lyse red blood cells,

release hemoglobin in red blood cells and transform it into
HGB M-68LH LYSE methemoglobin, which enables the measurement of
hemoglobin-related parameters by using the colorimetric
method.
The M-68DS DILUENT is an electric conducting solution

formulated to dilute samples and form sheath fluid in the
process of blood cell measurement. It participates in cell
M-68DS differentiation, counting and HGB measurement which are
RBC/HGB
DILUENT accomplished by using the impedance method, colorimetric
method, flow cytometry combining with laser scatter method
and fluorescent staining method.
PROBE Clean the fluidic system of the analyzer for the purpose of
/ maintenance.
CLEANSER
5-4
5.3 Measurement Flow
Figure 5-2 Measurement Flow Chart
5-5
5.4 Sample Volume
NRBC channel: 20uL
BASO channel: 20uL
DIFF channel: 20uL
RET channel: 4uL
HGB channel: 4uL
RBC channel: 4uL
5.5 Time of Preparation and Measurement

Table 5-2 Time of Preparation and Measurement
NRBC BASO DIFF RET HGB RBC

Channel
channel channel channel channel channel channel
Time of
3s 12.5s 23.2s 34.4s 11s 4.5s
Preparation
Time of
Measure- 4s 5s 5s 4s / 10s
ment
5.6 Temperature of Fluidics

Table 5-3 Temperature of Fluidics
Reagent
Sheath fluid Optical Reaction
Module preheating Flow cell Diluent
heating bath system bath
bath
Target
42~55 35~40 32 32 42 25
temperature()
Alarming
3 3 +4/-3 +4/-2 3 /
temperature()
5-6
5.7 Reagent Consumption Volume
Table 5-4 Reagent Consumption Volume
Diluent/ 4Diff 4Diff lyse Baso HGB RET RET NRBC NRBC Probe
Test panel sheath dye (ml) lyse lyse dye diluent dye lyse cleanse
fluid (ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) r (ml)
Reagent consumption for one analysis in a consecutive batch analysis (whole-blood)
CBC 25 / / 2 0.52 / / / / /
CBC+DIFF 32 0.02 2 2 0.52 / / / / /
CBC+DIFF+RET 38 0.02 2 2 0.52 0.02 2 / / /
CBC+RET 40 / / 2 0.52 0.02 2 / / /
CBC+NRBC 32 / / 2 0.52 / / 0.02 2 /
CBC+DIFF+NRBC 38 0.02 2 2 0.52 / / 0.02 2 /
CBC+DIFF+
44 0.02 2 2 0.52 0.02 2 0.02 2 /
RET+NRBC
RET 26 / / 1 / 0.02 2 / / /
Reagent consumption for a single analysis (whole-blood)
CBC 34 / / 2 0.52 / / / / /
CBC+DIFF 40 0.02 2 2 0.52 / / / / /
CBC+DIFF+RET 46 0.02 2 2 0.52 0.02 2 / / /
CBC+RET 48 / / 2 0.52 0.02 2 / / /
CBC+NRBC 40 / / 2 0.52 / / 0.02 2 /
CBC+DIFF+NRBC 46 0.02 2 2 0.52 / / 0.02 2 /
CBC+DIFF+
52 0.02 2 2 0.52 0.02 2 0.02 2 /
RET+NRBC
RET 34 / / 1 / 0.02 2 / / /
5-7
5.8 Sample Dilution Flow
5.8.1 Dilution Flow Chart of Whole-Blood Analyses
Figure 5-3 Dilution flow chart of whole-blood analyses
5.8.2 Dilution Flow Chart of Predilute Analyses
Figure 5-4 Dilution flow chart of predilute analyses

5-8
5.9 Introduction to Fluidic Parts
Mindray valves
Symbol:
2-way valve 3-way valve
Appearance:
2-way valve 3-way valve
Spring
pole
Function:
2-way valve: to build up or cut off a passage. When power off, the passage from the inlet of the
valve to outlet is cut off; when power on, the passage is built up.
3-way valve: to switch among passages. When power off, the public end and the NO (normally
open) end are connected; when power on, the public end and the N.C.(normally close) end are
connected.
Note: the operating voltage of Mindray valves is 12V, and maximal bearable pressure is
200KPa. The internal movement of the valves is driven by electromagnet and the restoration is
driven by the spring, so it is recommended not put the valves power-on for too long. When the
electromagnet valve is working, the spring pole will lower down, and it will rise to the initial
position when power off. You can touch the spring pole and feel the descending or ascending,
in order to determine whether it is in action.
5-9
2-way pressure resistant Mindray valve
Symbol
Same as the 2-way Mindray valve.
Appearance 2-way pressure

resistant valve
2-way Mindray
valve
Function: the 2-way pressure resistant Mindray valve has the same operating principle as
that of the general Mindray valve; only its reverse pressure resistant capability is higher.
Note: Pay attention to the difference between the two types of valves when you are
replacing them.
Draining valve (steel)
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: to drain the liquid condensed in the process of air filtration. There is only one
steel valve (SV53) used in the analyzer, located under the air filter.
5-10
SV53
2-way

Mindray
valve
Note: the draining valve can provide passage for large particles (up to 150um). The
maximal bearable pressure 400KPa, and the operating voltage is 12V. The end marked as "1"
is the inlet of the valve, and the other end is the outlet. There is an arrow on bottom of the valve,
indicating the direction of connecting the valve.
LVM fluidic valve
Symbol
Appearance
Function: work with the 20ul Diaphragm pump, dispensing the fluorescent dyes into the
WBC bath.
Note: the maximal bearable pressure of the LVM fluidic valve is 200KPa, and the CV of
the flow is about 0.03.
5-11
Burkert valve
Symbol:
There are 2-way and 3-way Burkert valves, which using the same Symbols as the Mindray
valves.
Appearance:
Function: Same as that of the 2-way valve and 3-way valve.
Note: The Burkert valves can bear higher pressure (up to 250KPa), and the CV of flow is
greater: about 0.2, which is 5 times to that of Mindray valves (0.04).
NC: normally closed end.
OUT: outlet.
NO: normally open end.
IN/OUT: operating end/outlet.
SMC valve
Symbol
Appearance
Function: same as that of the two-way Mindray valve, but can adapt to temperature
change over a wider range.
Note: The SMC valve is only used in SV08 and SV09, pay attention when you are
replacing the valves.
5-12
1-way valve
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: only allow 1-way flow of gas or liquid. Only allow gas or liquid flow from A to
B (B to A is not allowed).
Note: be aware of the direction of flow for the 1-way valve (as indicated by the arrow
in the figures above).
No. Name Function
1 CV1 1-way air flow to dry the air release opening of the piercing probe
2 CV2 1-way liquid flow in the NRBC lyse dispensing channel
3 CV3 1-way liquid flow in the DIFF lyse dispensing channel
4 CV4 1-way liquid flow in the RET diluent dispensing channel
Sheath fluid filter
Symbol
Appearance
5-13
Function: filter one portion of the diluent in FCM bath and transport it to the optical
flow cell as sheath fluid, another portion is transported to the sample preparation
tubing for cleaning of the tubing without being filtered. A is the filter inlet, B is the
outlet of filtered diluent, and C is the outlet of unfiltered diluent.
Note: The sheath fluid filter has limited service life, thus must be replaced
periodically.
Liquid filter
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: Filters the impurities in the diluent.
Note: make sure the filter is in the right direction as indicated by the arrow on the
filter.
Diaphragm pump
Symbol:
Liquid chamber
Gas chamber
Appearance:
5-14
Liquid chamber
connector
Gas chamber
connector
Function: used for accurate aspiration or dispensation. When vacuum is brought to the
gas chamber, the Diaphragm pump will aspirate a fixed volume of liquid accurately and
store in the liquid chamber; when pressure is brought to the gas chamber, the fixed
volume of liquid will be pushed out by the membrane in the diaphragm pump.
Note: make sure the connectors are connected to the gas chamber and liquid chamber
correctly.
No. ID Specification Material Color Function
1 DP1 0.52ml EPDM Black LH lyse dispensing
2 DP2 1.0ml EPDM Black HGB sample and diluent dispensing
3 DP3 1.5ml EPDM Black RBC sample and diluent dispensing
4 DP4 1ml EPDM Black LN lyse dispensing
5 DP5 1ml EPDM Black LB lyse dispensing
6 DP6 1ml EPDM Black LR lyse dispensing
7 DP7 1ml EPDM Black LD lyse dispensing
Sample dosing for flow cell sample

8 DP8 1ml EPDM Black
preparation
9 DP9 20uL EPDM Black FD fluorescent dye dispensing
10 DP10 20uL EPDM Black FR fluorescent dye dispensing
11 DP11 20uL EPDM Black FN fluorescent dye dispensing
12 DP12 8ml EPDM Black FCM bath filling
5-15
Syringe
Symbol:
Function: the 2.5ml syringe is mainly used in sample aspiration, cleaning, etc. The 250ul
syringe is mainly used to generate the flow in the optical bath, clean, etc. The 100ul syringe is
mainly used to generate the RBC sample flow, clean, etc.
Note: The 100uL and 250uL syringes use the 43F4K motor, and the 2.5mL syringe uses
the 43F4J motor.
Probe wipes
Symbol:
Open-vial probe wipe Piercing probe wipe
Appearance:
5-16
Function: provide a cavity where the open-vial probe or piercing probe can be cleaned by
liquid flow.
Note:
A: Diluent
B: Waste
C: Waste
D: Cleaning opening
E: Air releasing opening
F: Sample probe opening
Probes
Symbol:
See the symbol of probe wipe.
Appearance:
Sample aspiring opening

Air releasing opening
5-17
Function: the open-vial probe is used to aspirate the sample from the tube in the open-vial
mode. The piercing probe is used to pierce through the tube cap, releasing the air in the tube
to balance the pressure inside and outside of the tube, and aspirating sample at the same
time.
Note: since the piercing probe is vulnerable, it needs to be replaced periodically by the
service engineer or your local distributor.
Baths
Symbol
See the fluidic diagram.
Appearance
HGB bath RBC bath
WBC reaction bath RBC sheath fluid impedance bath
Function: HGB bath is the site for measurement of samples reacted with LH lyse; RBC
bath is the site for sample dilution; WBC reaction bath is the site for reaction of samples,
lyse and fluorescent reagents; RBC sheath fluid impedance bath is the site for sheath fluid
counting of RBC channel.
5-18
Cistern:
Symbol
/ (see the fluidic diagram)
Appearance
DIL\FCM cistern SCI cistern ISU\ISW cistern
Function: DIL cistern is the reservoir of diluent, it provides diluent to the SCI cistern and
cleans the fluidics; SCI cistern provides sheath fluid to the impedance bath; ISU cistern
provides back fluid to the impedance bath; and ISW cistern gathers the waste of the
impedance bath.
Note: The connection of tubes must be fixed by plastic cable ties.
Waste cistern
Symbol
/ (see the fluidic diagram)
Appearance
WC1\WC2
Function: WC2 gathers the waste produced by optical measurement, WC1 gathers
waste from all the other sources.
Note: The connection of tubes must be fixed by plastic cable ties.
5-19
5.10 Pneumatic System
5.10.1 Pneumatic System
The pneumatic unit provides pressure and vacuum for the daily operation of the BC-6800 main
unit. The compressor and the relief valve provide the pressure (about 250KPa) and vacuum
(about -85KPa) respectively. The pressure drives the air to go through the air filter to remove
the impurities in the air (dust, water drop, etc.), and then dried by the drier. The air will then be
regulated by 3 valves to generate the pressures (160KPa, 70KPa, and 40KPa). The vacuum
drives the air to go through the relief valve and throttle pipe, and get the -40KPa and -70KPa
vacuum.
Relief Valve
(Vacuum)
RGV5 PS
5
Vacuum
-40KPa
Air Filter Drier PS

6
Pressure
-70KPa
70KPa pressure PS
regulator 4
RGV3 70KPa
40KPa pressure
regulator PS
Relief Valve
RGV6 3
RGV1
40KPa
GP1
160KPa pressure PS
regulator 2
Compressor
RGV2
160KPa
PS
1
250KPa
Figure 5-5 Functions of Pressure and Vacuum
Table 5-5 Function of Pressure

Type Value Function
y Provide pressure for the operation of the pinch valve;
Pressure 250KPa y Provide pressure for the operation of the cylinder;
y Provide pressure for the operation of the 8ml diaphragm pump;
y Provide pressure to form the sheath flow in the optical channel

160KPa
(also referred to as pressure in FCM cistern), resident;
y Provide pressure to Diaphragm pumps (except the 8ml diaphragm
70KPa pump) for liquid dispensation;
5-20
y Provide pressure to the air release opening of the piercing probe
while cleaning the probe wipe;
y Provide pressure for the mixing (by generating bubbles) in the HGB
bath;
y Provide pressure for dispensing diluent from the DIL cistern;
y Provide pressure for discharging waste from the WC1 cistern;
y Provide pressure to form sheath flow in the RBC measurement with

40KPa
sheath flow and impedance method, resident;
y Provide vacuum to diaphragm pumps for liquid aspiration;

-70KPa
y Provide vacuum for diluent priming of the DIL cistern;
y Provide vacuum to the WC1 cistern for aspirating the waste from
the piping;
Vacuum
y Cleaning the adjacencies of the SRV;
-40KPa
y Preparing the sample of the impedance channel and flushing the
primary sheath fluid bath;
y Withdrawing waste of the probe wipe
5.10.2 Introduction to Pneumatic Parts
Pneumatic regulator
Symbol:
Pressure regulator Vacuum regulator (Relief valve)
Appearance:
5-21
Retaining
nut
Function:
The regulators are used to regulate the pressure or vacuum to a required range (usually to
reduce the pressure).
Note: when you adjust the pressure regulator, pull the blue knob upwards until you hear a
"tuck" or feel the knob is in position, and then tweak the knob to regulate pressure. Push the
knob downwards to the initial position after you finish. Before you adjust the relief valve, loosen
the retaining nut, and then tweak the adjusting pole to regulate. Secure the retaining nut after
you finish.
Gas valve
Symbol:
Same as 3-way electromagnet valves.
Appearance:
The one ending with "-11" is different from the other one. Do not misuse.
5-22
Function: similar to 3-way electromagnet valves, but mainly used in the pneumatic
system.
Note: read the label of the gas valves carefully to know the specification and model. When
the gas valves are powered on, the indicator of the valves will be red. While servicing the
analyzer, you may press the pink button on the gas valve to manually make the valve work.
Make sure you are not pressing too hard or using sharp tools which may damage the button.
The operation voltage for gas valves is also 12V AC.
Pinch valve
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: the pinch valve is driven by pressure. When the 250KPa pressure is brought to
the pinch valve, the pressure lever in the valve will be propped up to cut off the passage of the
liquid flow.
Note: since the pinch valve is pinching the tubing while working, so it is not working when
the analyzer is in the standby status, in order not to protect the tubing. Pinch valves are
categorized into 2 types according to the size of the through hole, one of which is 8mm, the
other is 5mm.
5-23
Table 5-6 List of Pinch Valves
No. ID Specification Control gas valve Function
1 PV01 5mm GV79 Sample preparation of DIFF bath
2 PV02 5mm GV80 Sample preparation of BASO bath
3 PV03 5mm GV81 Sample preparation of NRBC bath
4 PV04 5mm GV82 Sample preparation tubing of RET bath
5 PV05 5mm GV83 Sample dosing for flow cell sample preparation
6 PV06 5mm GV84 Sample preparation of NRBC bath
7 PV07 8mm GV85 Discharging waste from WC2 to WC1
8 PV11 8mm GV87 Cleaning the interior and exterior of the

piercing probe and discharge waste
9 PV12 8mm GV88 Cleaning the interior and exterior of the

open-vial sample probe and discharge waste
10 PV13 8mm GV89 Discharging waste from WC1
11 PV14 5mm GV97 8ml Diaphragm pump aspirating
12 PV15 5mm GV98 Cleaning and liquid discharging of flow cell

sample preparation tubing
13 PV16 5mm GV99 Liquid discharging from the impedance bath
Air filter
Symbol:
Appearance:
5-24
Function: to remove the liquid drops and dust in air.
Note: make sure the direction of the air flow is the same as indicated by the arrow on top
of the air filter.
Air Drier
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: dry the air, removing the gaseous water.
Note: make sure the direction of the air flow is the same as indicated by the red arrow on
top of the air drier.
Decelerating tube
Symbol: none
Appearance:
Function: the decelerating tube has a passage of very small diameter in the middle, which
decelerates the air flow passing through the passage.
5-25
Note: do not use any tool with sharp tip or edge to put the decelerating tube in the air tube,
in order not to damage or block the passage. Make sure you install the decelerating tube into
the air tube in the right direction. Currently, the decelerating tube is mainly used in lifting
cylinder and telescoping cylinder, where the decelerating tube in the lifting cylinder is longer.
See the figure below for the direction of decelerating tube in installation.
Table 5-7 List of Decelerating Tubes
No. ID Material ID Name Location
1 TP1 3100-20-41117 Telescoping decelerating tube Telescoping cylinder
2 TP2 3100-20-41116 Lifting decelerating tube Downstream tubing of lifting cylinder
3 TP3 3100-20-41116 Lifting decelerating tube Lifting cylinder for pre-scanning rotation
4 TP6 3100-20-41116 Lifting decelerating tube Pneumatic back plate cylinder
5.11 Detailed Introduction to Fluidic Channels
5.11.1 NRBC Channel

SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
RET
DIFF
NRBC dye
VAC
70
VAC
70
NRBC lyse
PV03/GV81
WC2-1
70KPa
VAC
WC1-O
S_SYRINGE
250L
WC1-N
Figure 5-6 NRBC Channel
Reagents involved: M-68LN LYSE and M-68FN DYE
Measurement principle: flow cytometry+laser scatter+fluorescent staining
Graphics: NRBC scattergram
Measurement parameters: NRBC% and NRBC#
5-26
Dilution ratio: 1:51
Way of mixing: stirring
Duration of measurement: 4s
Consumption volume of sample after diluted: 34.1ul
Process description: the M-68LN LYSE is aspirated from its container and dispensed
into the NRBC preheating bath by DP04 (1mL). The preheated lyse will be pushed out and get
to the SRV, bringing the blood sample (20uL) in the SRV into the NRBC bath. The lyse first
lyses the normal red blood cells, and then breaks down other cells by osmotic pressure. The
M-68FN DYE is then dispensed into the NRBC bath by DP11 (20uL), and combine with the
nucleic acid in white blood cells or nucleated red blood cells. The mixture is stirred during the
whole process (referred to as incubation process) to facilitate the reaction. After incubation, the
sample is pushed by DP08 (1mL) to go through pinch valves PV03 and PV05, and then
aspirated into the sample preparation tubing. The syringe (250uL) then pushes the sample to
go to the flow cell. Wrapped by the sheath fluid, the sample flow goes through the flow cell
while the optical system starts to identify the cells passing through the flow cell. These signals
will then be analyzed and processed to get the NRBC scattergram. After the measurement, the
analyzer will clean the flow cell and downstream tubing with diluent, and the syringe will
restore to the initial status, getting ready for the measurement of next channel (BASO).
5.11.2 DIFF Channel

SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
RET
DIFF
DIFF Dye
VAC
70
VAC
70
DIFF Lyse
PV01/GV79
WC2-1
70KPa
VAC
WC1-O
S_SYRINGE
250L
WC1-D
Figure 5-7 DIFF Channel
Reagents involved: M-68LD LYSE and M-68FD DYE
5-27
Graphics: DIFF scattergram
Measurement parameters: Neu%, Neu#, Lym%, Lym#, Mon%, Mon#, Eos% and
Eos#
Process description: the M-68LD LYSE is aspirated from its container and dispensed
into the DIFF preheating bath by DP07 (1mL). The preheated lyse will be pushed out and get
to the SRV, bringing the blood sample (20uL) in the SRV into the DIFF bath. The lyse first
conglobates the normal red blood cells, and then breaks down the white blood cells by osmotic
pressure. The M-68FD DYE is then dispensed into the Diff bath by DP09 (20uL), and combine
with the nucleic acid in the white blood cells. The mixture is stirred during the whole process
(referred to as incubation process) to facilitate the reaction. After incubation, the sample is
pushed by DP08 (1mL) to go through pinch valves PV01 and PV05, and then aspirated into
the sample preparation tubing. The syringe then pushes the sample to go to the flow cell.
Wrapped by the sheath fluid, the sample flow goes through the flow cell while the optical
system starts to identify the cells passing through the flow cell. These signals will then be
analyzed and processed to get the DIFF scattergram. After the measurement, the analyzer will
clean the flow cell and downstream tubing with diluent, and the syringe will restore to the initial
status, getting ready for the measurement of next channel (BASO).
5.11.3 BASO Channel

SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
RET
DIFF
VAC
70
BASO Lyse
PV02/GV80
WC2-1
70KPa
VAC
WC1-O
S_SYRINGE
250L
WC1-B
Figure 5-8 BASO Channel
5-28
Reagent involved: M-68LB LYSE
Measurement principle: flow cytometry+laser scatter
Graphics: BASO scattergram
Measurement parameters: WBC, BASO% and BASO#
Process description: the M-68LB LYSE is aspirated from its container and dispensed
into the BASO preheating bath by DP05 (1mL). The preheated lyse will be pushed out and get
to the SRV, bringing the blood sample (20uL) in the SRV into the BASO bath. The mixture is
stirred during the whole process (referred to as incubation process) to facilitate the reaction.
After incubation, the sample is pushed by DP08 (1mL) to go through pinch valves PV01 and
PV05, and then aspirated into the sample preparation tubing. The syringe then pushes the
sample to go to the flow cell. Wrapped by the sheath fluid, the sample flow goes through the
flow cell while the optical system starts to identify the cells passing through the flow cell. These
signals will then be analyzed and processed to get the BASO scattergram. After the
measurement, the analyzer will clean the flow cell and downstream tubing with diluent, and the
syringe will restore to the initial status, getting ready for the measurement of next channel
(RET).
5.11.4 RET Channel

SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
RET
DIFF
RET Dye
VAC
70
VAC
70
RET Lyse
PV04/GV82
WC2-1
70KPa
VAC
WC1-O
S_SYRINGE
250L
WC1-R
Figure 5-9 RET Channel
Reagents involved: M-68DR DILUENT and M-68FR DYE

5-29
Graphics: RET scattergram
Measurement parameters: RET% and RET#
Process description: the M-68DR DILUENT is aspirated from its container and
dispensed into the RET preheating bath by DP06 (1mL). The preheated lyse will be pushed
out and get to the SRV, bringing the blood sample (4uL) in the SRV into the RET bath. The lyse
first lyses the normal red blood cells, and then perforates the white blood cells. The M-68FR
DYE is then dispensed into the RET bath by DP10 (20uL), and combine with the nucleic acid in
the white blood cells. The mixture is stirred during the whole process (referred to as incubation
process) to facilitate the reaction. After incubation, the sample is pushed by DP08 (1mL) to go
through pinch valves PV01 and PV05, and then aspirated into the sample preparation tubing.
The syringe then pushes the sample to go to the flow cell. Wrapped by the sheath fluid, the
sample flow goes through the flow cell while the optical system starts to identify the cells
passing through the flow cell. These signals will then be analyzed and processed to get the
DIFF scattergram. After the measurement, the analyzer will clean the flow cell and
downstream tubing with diluent, and the syringe will restore to the initial status.
5.11.5 RBC/PLT Channel
Figure 5-10 RBC/PLT Channel
5-30
Reagents involved: M-68DS DILUENT
Measurement principle: flow cytometry+impedance method
Graphics: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Measurement parameters: RBC, MCV, PLT and MPV
Way of mixing: jet stream
Consumption volume of sample: 7.8ul
Process description: the diluent in the DIL cistern is pushed by the DP03 (1.5mL) into
the RBC hole of the SRV and bring the sample (4uL) into the RBC pre-mix bath, where it is
mixed by rotative jet stream. Driven by the vacuum in the WC1, the well-mixed sample is
aspirated by PV06 into the sample preparation tubing, and then it is pushed into the sample
probe by the syringe (100uL). The primary sheath fluid of the impedance bath is from the SCI
cistern, and the secondary sheath fluid from the ISU cistern. The red blood cells in the sample
stream wrapped by the sheath fluid go through the aperture one by one and produce pulses.
The measured sample goes into the ISW cistern, and finally comes into WC1.
5.11.6 HGB channel

Reagent
Liquid Level
Connector
Detection
s
SRV
DIL
SV35
VAC
70
DIFF
Open
BASO
NRBC
RET GV57
HGB
LH Lyse
RBC
DP01
0.52mL
SV37
HGB
VAC
70KPa SV31
WC1-H
GV58
GV71
70KP
DP02 a
1.0m
L
Figure 5-11 HGB Channel
Reagents involved: M-68DS DILUENT and M-68LH LYSE
Measurement principle: colorimetric method
Graphics: RET scattergram
5-31
Measurement parameters: RET% and RET#
Way of mixing: bubbling
Process description: the M-68LH LYSE is dispensed into the HGB bath by DP01
(0.52mL). At the same time, the diluent in the DIL cistern is pushed into the HGB hole of the
SRV by DP02 (1.0mL), and bring the sample (4uL) in to the HGB bath. The sample is mixed by
small bubbles generated by the 70KPa pressure. Place the well-mixed in still for a while and
then measure the voltage. Since the blank voltage of the sample is attained before the
measurement, the HGB can be calculated based on the colorimetric equation.
5.11.7 Liquid collecting and discharging channel
The liquid collecting and discharging channel is composed of the DIL cistern, FCM cistern, SCI
cistern, WC1 (waste cistern 1) and WC2. See the Figure 1-12 for the connection of the fluidic
parts.
The DIL cistern assembly consists of a cistern, a 3-way gas valve (GV44) and a 2-way fluidic
valve (SV54). GV44 is to switch the pressure and vacuum of the cistern. When switch to
pressure, the cistern send liquid to the fluidics; when switch to vacuum, the SV54 open the
cistern, and then the cistern is primed with diluent from the diluent container.
The FCM cistern assembly consists of a pinch valve (PV14), 8ml Diaphragm pump (DP12) and
fluidic valve (SV55) and the gas valve GV56. The inside of the FCM cistern is at 0.16Mpa in
normal status, and it can be primed with diluent from the diluent container when DP12, PV14
SV55 and GV56 are open.
The SCI cistern assembly consists of a 2-way gas valve (GV73), a 2-way fluidic valve (SV47)
and a buffer cistern (TC3). When SV47 is open, the SCI cistern will be primed driven by the
pressure in DIL cistern; when GV73 is open, the pressure in the SCI cistern is initialized (to
0.04Mpa).
WC2 is an open cistern driven by atmospheric pressure. Its outlet is connected to WC1 by the
pneumatic pinch valve PV07. When PV07 is opened, the waste in WC2 is discharged into
WC1.
WC1 consists of a 3-way gas valve (GV48) and a pneumatic pinch valve (PV13). The air-fluid
separation of WC1 and GV48 is done by the buffer bath TC1.The switch of on and off status of
the gas valve makes WC1 switch between pressure (0.07Mpa) and vacuum (-0.04Mpa). The
vacuum drives it to collect the waste from the fluidics, while the pressure together with the
PV13 facilitates the discharge of the waste.
5-32
C
A 0
V 7
40 SV54
0
6
1
GV44 PV14/GV97
GV73
SV55 SV46
DIL
TC3 FCM
SCI
DP12
8mL
GV56 SRV adjacency
SV47 cleaning 2
C 1
0
5 A T Diluent
2 V
Sampling syringe
container
Probe wipe cleaning RBCPrimary,
Secondary sheath fluid Optical sheath fluid
DP02, DP03 aspiration
RBC bath cleaning Downstream optical system cleaning
DIFF,BASO, RBC Sample syringe Auxiliary sample driving of optical system
NRBC,RET Bath cleaning
Open-vial probe wipe waste

Piercing probe wipe waste
RBC Premix bath waste
HGB bath waste
NRBC bath waste
Downstream optical tubing
DIFF bath waste
BASO bath waste
RET bath waste
Outlet of flow cell
ISW bath waste
Fluid discharge of maintenance channel
Flow cell flush outlet
SRV adjacency cleaning
a
P a
K P
K
0 0 RBC Sample
preparation, downstream
WC2 4 7
-
Pressure filter
5
8
V
G GV48 discharge
/ WC1
7
0
V
P
SV53
TC1 9
8 Waste
V
G
/
3 Container
1
V
P
Waste connector
Figure 5-12 Connections of the liquid collecting and discharging channel
5.11.8 Probe cleanser maintenance channel

Aspirating the probe cleanser: under the corporate efforts of DP08 and the control valves of
the maintenance channel, the probe cleanser is aspirated to the liquid storing tubing along the
path indicated in red in the figure;
Dispensing the probe cleanser: under the corporate efforts of the sampling syringe and the
control valves of different channels, the probe cleanser is dispensed to different places
5-33
(including RBC channel, HGB channel, optical reaction bath, flow cell, SRV, etc.). The SV13 is
opened, and the dispensed probe cleanser is diluted and then used to soak the parts or tubing.
Cleaning the probe cleanser: put pressure on the FCM cistern, DIL cistern and SCI cistern,
and the sampling syringe then dispenses diluent to related parts and modules to clean the
residual probe cleanser. The fluidic parts will restore to the initial status after the cleaning.
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30

C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
RET NRBC BASO DIFF SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
T237 T235 J17-T233-J16 T231 T226 T221 T216 T211 T161 J48-T160-J49-P9 T159
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C

SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T312 GV74 SV42 GV62 GV63 GV61 GV60 WC1-D
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
Open T130 Ta-P7 DP06 DP07 DP05 WC1-B
DP04
T253
1mL 1mL 1mL 1mL WC1-R
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155

Open
C128 WC1-G
T169
T119 J30-T118-J31 J46-T117-J47 BASO R D B N

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
T323
RBC
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108
CV1 J68-T140-J69 HGB GV48

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53

J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1

J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31

T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70

C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC

T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21

T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183

SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41

70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-13 Maintenance Channel
5.12 Introduction to Sequences

Taking the CBC+DIFF+NRBC+RET analysis in the open-vial whole-blood mode as an
example:
5.12.1 Open-Vial Whole-Blood Analysis Sequences

0-11s, as shown below.
SRV at the lower operation position, which means the metal knob of the SRV is at the lower
position;
0-5s: SV21 and SV23 open; the whole-blood syringe drives the open-vial probe to aspirate
sample into the SRV;
After the buzzer beeps, the open-vial probe cleanser cleans the exterior of the open-vial
sample probe;
Drain the HGB bath, RBC pre-mix bath, NRBC bath, BASO bath, DIFF bath and RET bath;
Dispense 1ml diluent into the HGB bath through DP02 and SV37, measure the blank voltage
5-34
after 1s, and drain the HGB bath after the measurement;
Dispense 1.5ml diluent to the RBC pre-mix bath through DP03 and SV39, and then wash the
bath with the diluent;
Open SV08, SV09 and SV84 and clean the RBC sample preparation tubing; open SV01, SV03
and SV04 and wash the primary sheath fluid bath and secondary sheath fluid bath; drain the
RBC pre-mix bath and get ready after cleaning;
Dispense 1ml lyse to the NRBC bath through DP04 and SV49, clean the involved tubing and
the bath, drain the bath and get ready for the subsequent procedure;
Dispense 1ml lyse to the BASO bath through DP05 and SV50, clean the involved tubing and
the bath, drain the bath and get ready for the subsequent procedure;
Dispense 1ml RET diluent to the RET bath through DP06 and SV51, clean the involved tubing
and the bath, drain the bath and get ready for the subsequent procedure;
Dispense 1ml lyse to the DIFF bath through DP07 and SV52, clean the involved tubing and the
bath, drain the bath and get ready for the subsequent procedure;
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30

C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66 RET NRBC BASO
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
DIFF T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158

J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31

C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29

T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32

C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19

T80
T225 T230 T220 T215

J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440

1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F

T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C

SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N

T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31

DP04
T253

T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155

Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73

C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I

J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84

T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139

T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53

J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1

J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190

T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31

T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70

C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H

T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC

T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21

T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183

SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41

70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-14 Fluidics diagram of sample aspiration open-vial whole-blood

analysis
11-15s: as shown below.
SRV switched to the upper position, which means the metal knob of the SRV is at the upper
position; at this time, the 6 holes is filled with the sample for measurement;
The sample for HGB analysis and diluent is brought to the HGB bath through DP02 and SV37;
at the same time, dispense LH lyse is into the HGB bath by DP01 and SV35; open GV71 to
5-35
bubble, and then the sample analysis starts;
Dispense the sample for RBC analysis into the RBC pre-mix bath through DP03 and SV3;
drain the ISW cistern;
Dispense the sample for HGB analysis and M-68LN lyse into the NRBC bath through DP04
and SV49; at the same time, dispense the fluorescent dye M-68FN into the NRBC bath
through DP11 and SV12; the stirring bar rotates, and the sample analysis starts;
Dispense the sample for HGB analysis and M-68LB lyse into the BASO bath through DP05
and SV50; the stirring bar rotates, and the sample analysis starts;
Dispense the sample for HGB analysis and M-68DR diluent into the RET bath through DP06
and SV51; at the same time, dispense the fluorescent dye M-68FR into the RET bath through
DP10 and SV11; the stirring bar rotates, and the sample analysis starts;
Dispense the sample for HGB analysis and M-68LD lyse into the DIFF bath through DP07 and
SV52; at the same time, dispense the fluorescent dye M-68FD into the DIFF bath through
DP09 and SV10; the stirring bar rotates, and the sample analysis starts;
Other auxiliary actions: prime the SCI cistern with liquid from DIL cistern through SV47; the
RBC sample syringe is initialized and pushes the sample to get ready for analysis;
WBC sample syringe aspirates sample and pushes the sample to get ready for NRBC
analysis.
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30

C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51

T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL

NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
DIFF T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
DIL P18-T1-P19
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158

J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31

C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29

T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32

C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19

T80
T225 T230 T220 T215

J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440

1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F

T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C

SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N

T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31

DP04
T253

T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155

Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73

C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I

J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 ISW C34 PV06/GV84

T116-J35
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139

T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53

J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1

J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190

T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31

T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70

C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H

T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC

T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21

T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183

SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41

70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-15 Fluidics diagram of sample dispensation in open-vial whole-blood

analysis
5-36
SRV back to the lower operation position, which means the metal knob of the SRV is at the
lower position;
The sampling syringe pushes the diluent out of the sample probe cleaning channel, and clean
the exterior of the probe; the open-vial sample probe goes back to the upper position after
cleaning and stands by;
HGB sample incubation and analysis;
Open SV09 and PV06 to enable the sample to get to the inlet of the RBC bath from the RBC
pre-mix bath; generate RBC primary and secondary sheath fluid; the RBC sample syringe
pushes the sample rapidly;
With the corporate efforts of DP08, SV26, PV03, PV05 and PV15, the sample in the NRBC
bath gets to the inlet of the 3-way connector of the flow cell; open SV19 to form slow sheath
flow; open SV18 to form rapid sheath flow;
With the help of SV27, the WBC sample syringe pushes the sample for NRBC analysis into the
optical analysis area of the flow cell for measurement;
Drain the NRBC bath; open SV13 and PV03 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the NRBC
bath and get ready for analysis;
Open SV26, SV28, PV05 and PV15 to clean the optical analysis sample preparation channel;
Other auxiliary actions:
Prime the FCM cistern with the diluent form the diluent container through DP12, PV14 and
SV55;
Prime the DIL cistern through DIL vacuum and SV54;
Discharge waste from WC2 to WC1;
WBC sample syringe aspirates sample and gets ready for analysis.
5-37
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
RET NRBC BASO DIFF DIL SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
FCM
Open
T44-P6
TC3
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2
C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-16 Fluidics diagram of RBC sample preparation and NRBC analysis in
open-vial whole-blood analysis
Drain the HGB bath, add 2ml liquid and get ready;
RBC sample syringe push the sample for RBC analysis slowly to the aperture for analysis;
With the corporate efforts of DP08, SV26, PV02, PV05 and PV15, the sample in the BASO
With the help of SV27, the WBC sample syringe pushes the sample for BASO analysis into the
Drain the BASO bath; open SV13 and PV02 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the BASO
bath and get ready for analysis;
Other auxiliary actions:
Prime the FCM cistern;
Discharge waste from WC1 to the waste container;
Discharge waste from WC2;
Open SV53 to discharge liquid in the pressure filter;
WBC sample syringe aspirates sample and gets ready for analysis.
5-38
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-17 Fluidics diagram of RBC and BASO analysis in open-vial whole-blood
analysis
Measurement in RBC channel finished;
With the corporate efforts of DP08, SV26, PV01, PV05 and PV15, the sample in the DIFF
With the help of SV27, the WBC sample syringe pushes the sample for DIFF analysis into the
Drain the DIFF bath; open SV13 and PV01 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the DIFF bath
and get ready for analysis;
Other auxiliary actions: prime the FCM cistern; discharge waste from WC2; WBC sample
syringe aspirates liquid and gets ready;
5-39
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-18 Fluidics diagram of DIFF analysis in open-vial whole-blood analysis
With the corporate efforts of DP08, SV26, PV04, PV05 and PV15, the sample in the RET
With the help of SV27, the WBC sample syringe push the sample for RET analysis into the
Drain the RET bath; open SV13 and PV04 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the RET bath
and get ready for analysis;
Other auxiliary actions: prime the FCM cistern; discharge waste from WC2;
5-40
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-19 Fluidics diagram of RET analysis in open-vial whole-blood analysis

54-59.5s: as shown below.
Drain the RBC pre-mix bath, NRBC bath, BASO bath, DIFF bath and RET bath;
Dispense 1.5ml diluent to the RBC pre-mix bath through DP03 and SV39, and then wash the
bath with the diluent;
Open SV08, SV09 and SV84 to clean the sample preparation tubing; open SV02 and SV09 to
clean the sample probe, and then stands by;
Open SV13 and PV03 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the NRBC bath for soaking and get
ready for analysis;
Open SV13 and PV04 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the RET bath for soaking and get
ready for analysis;
Open SV13 and PV01 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the DIFF bath for soaking and get
ready for analysis;
Open SV13 and PV02 to dispense about 1.2ml diluent into the BASO bath for soaking and get
ready for analysis;
Open SV19, SV20 and SV45 to clean the flow cell and the outlet passage;
Other auxiliary actions: prime the FCM cistern; prime the SCI cistern;
5-41
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
GV65 GV66
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
RET NRBC BASO DIFF
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
SV02 C34 PV06/GV84
T116-J35
ISW
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-20 Fluidics diagram of completing measurement and restoration in

open-vial whole-blood analysis
For other test panels in open-vial whole-blood mode, CBC for example, the major difference
from CBC+DIFF+NRBC+RET is that after the sample in the DIFF, NRBC and RET holes of the
SRV is dispensed to the related baths, the sample is brought of the bath by diluent (dispensed
to the baths by opening SV14, SV15 and SV16) directly without analysis (please note that
BASO analysis has no diluent dispensation channel); other procedures are almost the same;
See figure 4-9 for the sample dispensation process.
5-42
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
DIFF T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
T116-J35
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-21 Fluidics diagram of sample dispensation in open-vial whole-blood CBC

analysis
5.12.2 Open-Vial Predilute Analysis Sequences

Analysis process
The process of the open-vial predilute analysis is almost the same as that of the whole-blood
analysis;
Differences between the two modes: the predilute sample is diluted before being analyzed by
the analyzer ; 2. in the predilute mode, the sample volume for optical counting and RBC
counting is 3 times to that in the whole-blood mode, so the time for analysis is longer;
5.12.3 Autoloading Whole-Blood Analysis Sequences

Presentation mode
You can achieve automatic batch analyses of blood samples by using the autoloading
presentation mode, which includes transporting and feeding of tube racks, tube grabbing,
automatic aspiration of sample, etc.;
5-43
T241-J1-P11
P35 P36 T244-J2-P12

P37
J84-T243-P33
J83-T240-P32
T247-J3-P13
J85-T246-P34
C26 C28 C30
C29
VAC
SV12
70
SV10 SV11 T56 T55 T50 T47
T45
T448
DP11
FCM
DP09 DP10 40 SV54 T51
T450
T449
160
20uL 20uL 20uL
NRBC
C132
DIFF
T48 C138
RET
T262
C139
T46C133
P30-J15
P29-J7
PV14/GV97
P28-J6
C140
GV44 GV73 T49C134
T261
P26-T5-P27
GV64 T453 T53 T54
DIFF T18C135 C141
P24-T4-P25
T11
C27
T13C136 C142
T260
T52
P22-T3-P23
VAC
VAC
DIFF
VAC
RET NRBC
70
SV55
70
C143
70
P20-T2-P21
SV46 T14 C137
T259
T151-J86
P18-T1-P19
DIL
Open
T44-P6
TC3 FCM
SCI
J89-T452-J90
J87-T451-J88
J93-T77-J94
DP12
J4-T75-J5
T24-P3
T15
C6 C7 C8 8mL
T248
T78 T74 T70 C9 C158
J8-T64-J9 WBC T123 T61 C163 C162 C161 C160 C159
T19
T72
CL-A
T76 DH T114
SV20 LF1 T57 C169 C168 C167 C166 C165 C164
GV56
T30-P4
SV45
T26
DIFF
T65
NRBC
T265 T266 T264 T263

BASO
RET
HGB
T85
PV04/GV82
PV03/GV81
PV02/GV80
PV01/GV79
SV18 SH T124
T12
T10
J10-T71-J11
T9
C25 LF2
T7
T8
T6
SV19 SV47
T32
WC2-1
J24-T223-J25
J22-T228-J23
J26-T218-J27
J28-T213-J29
T59
VAC
FC
250
C14 T58
T37-P5
T66
T39
C32 T60
SCI
C10 SV17 T63 C31
C11 T222 T227 T217 T212
PV15/GV98 J12-T73-J13
J18-T234-J19
T69 T67 T68 WC1-S T62

SV13 T125 DIL
C12
FCM
C2 C3 C4 C5 C20 C21
T239
C13 C1
T164 C24
T238
J44-T162-J45
T232-J14
PV05/GV83
C148
C22 C23
70KPa
SV26 J40-T158-J41
VAC
T163
T166
T224 SV34 T229SV29
T165
T219 SV33 T214 SV32
C149
T236
WC1-O
C151
C16 C17 C18 C19
T80
T225 T230 T220 T215
J57-T22-J58
RH
J71-T29-J56
J54-T35-J55
J52-T42-J53
SV14
C153
SHEATH
NRBC
BASO
S_SYRINGE
SV15
RET
DIFF
WC1-D
WC1-R
WC1-N
WC1-B
SV16
T210
J50-T23-J60
250L
C155
J51-T36-J61
GV68
J59-T43-J97
T442
DP08 T446 T440
1mL C15 T21 T34 T28 T41 T444
T82-J21 T81
T441
SV28 C150
T443
SV27 T83 J20-T84-J33 C152 WC1-F
T445
T447 C154
C156 WC1-K
T439
T157
WC2 C74 WC1-C
SV51 SV52 SV50 SV49
C171 WC1-RC
VAC
VAC
VAC
VAC
CL-A
70
T136
70
70
70
WC1-H
T20
T33
T40
T27
T311 T152-J37 WC1-N
T257 GV75 C89
PV07/GV85
WC1-O
CV3
CV4
CV2
SV25
T25
C33
T38
T153
T31
DP04
T253
T168
WC1-A
WC1-F
SV09 NRBC T155
Open
C128 WC1-G
T169

DIFF T154
T315
C129 C72 C73
C127 C43 RET T156-J100 WC1-S
T100 T101 HGB C130 T199-J78-P2 T250
J79-T17-J82-P10 WC1-A
Open
T187
T186-P8 RBC
T251
T120
T103

-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
TS C71
T209
C47 C36

T102 T144 T79 WC1-C T143 SV35 WC1-I
J74-T170
RBC
T323
70KPa
J66-T142
VAC
T104
T200
PV11/GV87
T99
T249 PV16/GV99 ISU

T115
T105
T121 C44
J67-T141
GF1
J42-T98-J43
J75-T171
GV70
T252
C62
T16
T116-J35
WC1-I
T108

T188 GV57 WC1
GV101
GV102
SV03 T137 T139
T96
J34-T126
T88-J36
SV04 T150 J62-T167-J63

T94
SV01 C61 C60 SV53
J64-T198
SV30 C48 SV36 TC1
J72-T172-J73
T109
PV13/GV89
T255
SV05 DP01
DIL
C39 T107 T190
T256
0.52mL
T149
T91
T97 T92
T189 T193 T194 T129
C46 C51 C59 T197
T95 SV38 C54 C57 SV23
T258
T254

T195
T90 T106 T201 SV31
T191 T148 C53 C64
T128
C40 C56 C70
C49 T175 T176 T133 C69
T93
PV12/GV88
C41 SV07 T202 T204 T205 WC1-H
T131
WC1-RC
R_SYRINGE
T173
SV37 T196 VAC
T192
100L
T111 T110 70KPa

C37
WC1-K
C66 GV71
T89 DP02 C67 C68
T147
SV40 1.0mL GV58 J80-T206-P1 T207 T208 70KPa

C42 T112
J76-T127-J77
T86 J39-T87-P31 SV24 SV21
T174
T132
C38 C52 T203 T179 T180 T183
SV08 J65-T184
C170 C55 C58
T178
C65
T181
T113
SCI
T185
T146
WC1-G
C50 C45
P_SYRINGE
T138
WC2-1
T182
VAC
2.5mL
SV22 SV39 SV41
70KPa
DP03 GV59 T135

1.5mL
T177
C63 T134
T145
Figure 5-22 Fluidics diagram of sample aspiration in autoloading analysis

Analysis process
After the sample is dispensed into the SRV by the whole-blood syringe, the rest procedures
are the same as those in open-vial;
SRV position
The SRV is at the upper position while aspirating sample;
Time of Measurement
The autoloading analysis is an automatic process including automatic loading and unloading of
tube racks. The throughput is 90 analysis/h (RET analysis included) or 125 analysis/h (RET
analysis not included).
5-44
6 Optical System
6.1 Introduction of Optical Theories
The Laser beams of the optical system of BC-6800 irradiate on the blood cells processed by
reagents, which are passing through the flow cell, and the forward scatter, side scatter and
side fluorescence of each cell are collected. The forward scatter reflects cell size, the side
scatter reflects the nucleus and granule information inside the cell, and the side fluorescence
reflects the nucleic acid information inside the cell. By analyzing and processing the three
optical signals, we can analyze the blood cells of the blood samples tested.
The following figure is the platform of the optical path of BC-6800
Figure 6-1 Planform of Optical Path
1. Semiconductor laser (635nm) 11.Forward PD
2. Laser collimationt lens 12.Side scatter collecting lens
3. Cylindrical lens A 13.Dichroscope
4. Cylindrical lens B 14.Side scatter
5. Flow cell 15.Side parasitic light dispelling diaphragm
6. Sample flow 16.Side PD
7. Direct beam stop 17.Fluorescence
8. Back light lens 18.Fluorescence parasitic light dispelling diaphragm
9. Forward scatter 19.Long pass filter
10. Forward parasitic light 20.PMT

dispelling diaphragm
6-1
The optical system of BC-6800 uses the semiconductor laser (1) as optical source. The 635nm
red laser beam irradiated by the optical source is aligned by the laser alignment lens (2), and
then shaped by the cylindrical lens A (3) and B (4), thus forming elliptic laser beam irradiating
on the sample flow (6) in the flow cell (5).
Laser
Flow cell
Sample flow
Sheath fluid
Figure 6-2 Laser Facula by the Flow Cell
The blood cells processed by lyse and fluorescent dye are wrapped by sheath fluid, producing
hydrodynamic focusing effect by the flow cell. The blood cells go through the flow cell in
sequence as shown in Figure 6-2. The blood cells irradiated by the laser beam disperse
scatter light and fluorescence, while the direct light not being dispersed is blocked by the direct
light blocking diaphragm (7).
The forward scatter (9) with scattering angle 1~10 passes through the direct light blocking
diaphragm (7), and is collected by the back light lens (8), and then passes through the forward
parasitic light dispelling diaphragm (10), finally is converged to the forward PD (11) to form the
forward scatter signal.
The side scatter (14) and side fluorescence (17) are collected by the side scatter collecting
lens (12), the dichroscope reflects the side scatter of which the wavelength stays the same,
and transmits the side fluorescence of which the wavelength gets longer, thus separating the
side scatter and side fluorescence. The side scatter passes through the parasitic light
dispelling diaphragm (15) and is converged to the side PD (16) to form side scatter signal;
the side fluorescence passes through the parasitic light dispelling diaphragm (18) and the long
pass filter (19) to filter side scatter, and then is converged to PMT (20) to form fluorescence
signal.
The three optical signals go into the signal processing board to be amplified and processed,
thus forming the scattergram.
6-2
6.2 Optical System Structure
Disassemble the top cover of the incubator of BC-6800 optical system, the components are
shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-3 Components of the Optical System
No. Name No. Name
1 Front light assembly 7 Side PD assembly
2 Inspection assembly 8 PMT assembly
3 Back light assembly 9 Base plate assembly
4 Forward PD assembly 10 Bottom plate of the incubator
5 Three-dimensional adjusting frame 11 Back plate of the incubator
6 Inner light shield (with the dichroscope assembly 12 Laser drive board
in it)
The semiconductor laser (635nm), laser alignment lens, cylindrical lens A and B are within the
front light assembly. The laser drive board (12) provides stable power input for the front light
assembly, which irradiates shaped laser beam to the flow cell. The inspection assembly (2)
includes flow cell assembly and rectifier assembly; the rectifier assembly can form stable flow
6-3
of sheath fluid in the flow cell. After being irradiated by laser, the cells in the flow cell transmit
scatter and fluorescence. The back light assembly (3) includes direct light blocking diaphragm
and back light lens, which collect and converge the 1~10 forward scatter transmitted by the
cells to the sensitive surface of the forward PD assembly (4). The side scatter collecting lens is
installed on the front of the three-dimensional adjusting frame (5). The lens can be fine-tuned
from three dimensions to ensure the collection and convergence of side scatter and
fluorescence. The dichroscope under the inner light shield (6) reflects side scatter and
transmits fluorescence. The side scatter is converged to the sensitive surface of the side PD
assembly (7), while the fluorescence passes through the long pass filter in the PMT assembly
(8) and is converged to the PMT sensitive surface.
The optical components are all installed on the base plate assembly (9). There is heating
diaphragm under the base plate assembly, which controls the temperature of the optical
system. The optical system is inside the incubator so as to shield the system from outside light,
heat, shock, electromagnetic field and dust.
6.3 Troubleshooting of the Optical System
6.3.1 Abnormal Scattergram

Tools
NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver
Consumables
4k-07 standard particle (7um), 1.5mL centrifugal tube, fine-fibrous dust-free cloth, absolute
alcohol
Procedure
Abnormal scattergram may appear for many reasons. Analysis must be done to find out the
real reason.
First, check if the analyzer reports error messages, if yes, remove the errors. If abnormal
scattergrams are found without error messages reported, check if the scattergrams of the 4
channels (DIFF, BASO, RET and NRBC) are all abnormal. If only one of them is abnormal,
failure of the entire optical system can be excluded, and then the fluidics, reagent or
temperature control system shall be checked.
Log on the system with the password of service engineer, click the menu "CalibrationOptical
Gain Calibration" to enter the Optical Gain Calibration screen and select mode as "Standard
Particle (debug)".
Mix the 4k-07 standard particle bottle, put 1 drop of the standard particle into 5mL of de-ionized
water to form a standard particle sample.
6-4
Present the sample to the open vial sample probe, press the aspirate key to run standard
particle (debug) mode analysis. The scattergrams of standard particle will be displayed
automatically when the analysis finishes. Note that the total number of particle 1 shall be
greater than 2000, or else the amount of particles is sufficient. You should add more standard
particles added into the centrifugal tube and re-run analysis.
The analysis results of 4k-07 standard particle, the FS and SS CG position must be within the
range of Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 CV Range of 4k-07 Standard Particle
Module Standard Measured value Result (Pass/Fail)

Position of FS gravity center 34.00~46.00
FS CV 2.3%
Position of SS gravity center 51.00~71.00
SS CV 17.2%
Total number of particles 2000~6000
If the CV and CG position all meet the requirements in Table 5-1, but the scattergrams of blood
samples are still not in optimal status, failure of the optical system can be excluded, and the
fluidics, reagent or temperature control system shall be checked.
If the CV meets requirements in Table 5-1, but the CG position does not meet the requirements,
re-calibrate the analyzer as instructed in the optical system gain calibration section.
If the CV is outside the range of Table 5-1, do as follows.
Click "Maintenance" in the menu to enter the maintenance screen, and click the "Flow Cell"
button in the "Probe Cleanser Maintenance" region, then perform probe cleanser maintenance
of the flow cell as instructed by the screen prompts.
After finishing probe cleanser maintenance, click "Maintenance""Cleaning" in the menu to

enter the cleaning screen, and click "Rinse Flow Cell" to rinse the flow cell, then run analysis
of the 4k-07 standard particle again to see if the problem is solved. If not, repeat step 9)~10); if
the problem persists, do as follows:
Disassemble the top panel and right panel of the analyzer with the cross-headed screwdriver,
and then remove the top cover of the optical system incubator.
Wipe the surface of the flow cell with clean dust-free cloth dipped with absolute alcohol. While
you are wiping the flow cell, check if the tubes are damaged, if so, replace the tubes. After
finishing the operations above, cap the top cover of the incubator, and re-run 4k-07 standard
particle and fresh blood to see if the problem is solved.
If not, replace the optical system.
Note:
Laser radiation
Static protection
Do not run analysis when the top cover of the incubator is not firmly capped, or else, the PMT
may be damaged easily.
6-5
6.3.2 Abnormal Current of Laser Tube
Device
Multimeter
Tools
Procedure
Make sure the analyzer is powered off, and unplug the power cord.
Wear clean disposable gloves and take proper antistatic measures.
Disassemble the top panel and right panel of the analyzer with the cross-headed screwdriver,
and then remove the top cover of the optical system incubator.
Check if the laser connection is secure.
Take of the connection line of the laser, test if open circuit occurs to the line with a multimeter.
If yes, replace the connection line and install the top cover of the optical system incubator.
Start up the analyzer to see if the laser tube current is still abnormal, if so, replace the optical
system.
Note
Laser radiation
Static protection
Do not run analysis when the top cover of the incubator is not firmly capped, or else, the PMT
may be damaged easily.
6-6
7 Hardware System
7.1 Overview
The hardware logic system reflects the functions and interfaces of the hardware system, and is
divided into several parts, including data stream, user interaction, control flow, power source
system, and structure and interlinkage.
Hardware System
Product
Optical application Network cable
detection and
Aperture Serial port cable
principle interlinkage
Laser tube Signal sorting Parellel port
Impedance cable
Photomultiplie Signal collection Direct user
detection
r Digital input
principle Key switch
LED tube processing
Phototube Colorimetric Main control Direct user Touch screen
detection embedded output
principle system Display
Data stream design platform Peripheral
interfaces Barcode scanner
Mouse
Keyboard
Mass storage
Motor
Structure Replaceable
storage
Electromagne and
t Moving mechnism User interaction design
Hall sensor Driving and
interlinkage
detection
Fluidic components
design
Valve
Pump Driving and
Pneumatic detection
Thermodynamic
unit components Auxiliary
Float switch Driving and control
detection embedded
Heater system Power
System status
Fan platform monitoring
monitoring
Power switch
Temp. sensor
Sample Power cord
Pressure
inspection
sensor Power Commercial
Fluid conversion power input
Barcode detection
scanner Control flow design Power system design
Photocouplers
Figure 7-1 Hardware logical diagram
7.2 Data and COME Carrier Board
7.2.1 Overview
The data and COME carrier board in BC-6800 five-differential hematology analyzer drives the
sensors, amplifies, filters and sorts the primitive signals output by each sensor to form signals
that meet A/D input requirement, then A/D conversion is performed. The FPGA completes
pulse identification and storage of the converted digital signals, and the COME module
extracts and processes data stream so as to display the data on the man-machine interface.
The carrier board also controls external components or functional modules.
7-1
Figure 7-2 The Functional Diagram of Data and COME Carrier Board
7.2.2 Functions
The data and COME carrier board can be divided into the following 4 modules base on the
characteristics of the circuit and signal: analog circuit module, digital circuit module, A/D
module and power module.
The functions of analog circuit module:
Amplifying and sorting the scatter signal (FS/SS) and fluorescence signal (SF) input
from the pre-amplification board;
Driving the RBC/PLT sensor, amplifying and sorting RBC/PLT impedance signal, and
providing counting bath zapping function;
Driving HGB sensor, amplifying and sorting HGB signal;
System monitoring function: monitoring the key signals in the board and the safety
actions of the analyzer, including voltage of the analog +/-12V power, laser drive
current, internal PD current of laser, drive voltage of RBC constant-current source,
PMT voltage, etc.
Collecting system status: collecting important status during the sample analysis
process, including background signal of FS, HGB voltage, aperture voltage, etc.
7-2
The functions of digital circuit module:
COME module interface: connecting COME module. COME module is the key
processing unit of the entire digital system which processes data, displays results
and controls the hardware system.
FPGA module: controlling components like AD and digital potentiometer,

pre-processing primitive data and sending the data to processor.
IO module: the coupled zone to external boards or functional module, performing

buffer processing for cross-board level.
A/D module:
Completing the A/D conversion of the amplified and sorted impedance signal, optical
signal, HGB signal and other status monitoring signal.
Power module:
Analog power: produce the 56V, 5V and 2.5V power required by the analog circuit
through power conversion.
Digital power: convert digital 5V to 3.3V, 2.5V, 1.25V and 1.2V through the DC-DC
and LDO components to meet the supply requirement of CPU, FPGA, DDR and
other digital components.
Figure 7-1 The Functional Diagram of the Analog Circuit Module of Data and COME
Carrier
Board
7-3
Figure 7-2 The Functional Diagram of the Digital Circuit Module of Data and COME
Carrier Board
7-4
7.2.3 Structure
PCBA structure of data and COME carrier board:
P6
P8
P7
P4
P1
P5
P3
P2
P1
4
P1
0 P9
P1
6
P1
1
P1
7
P1
5
P1
2
P1
3
Figure 7-3 The PCBA structure of Data and COME Carrier Board (top)
7-5
Table 7-1 Description of modules of Data and COME Carrier Board
Module No. Description
P1 RBC/PLT sensor drive and pre-amplification board

(shielding box region)
P2 RBC/PLT signal sorting and amplifying circuit
P3 HGB signal sorting and amplifying circuit
P4 Optical signal (FS/SS/SF) sorting and amplifying

circuit
P5 System monitoring signal sorting circuit
P6 56V power conversion circuit
P7 Analog +/-5V power conversion circuit
P8 Zapping power
P9 AD (A/D conversion) circuit
P10 LCD and touchscreen interface
P11 COME module socket
P12 digital power circuit
P13 USB interface
P14 LED indicator circuit of the digital system
P15 Network circuit
P16 FPGA
P17 IO circuit
7.2.4 Interfaces
Interface Layout
7-6
Figure 7-4 Socket Layout of Data and COME Carrier Board
There are 25 sockets in the data and COME carrier board, see Figure 7-4 for the location of
the sockets.
7.2.5 Indicators and Test Points

See the following table for the functions of the indicators.
Table 7-2 Description of Indicator Functions of Data and COME Carrier Board
Indicator Function
D29 Analog +12V indicator, in the P6 region (56V power converting circuit), normal status:
on
D30 Analog -5V indicator, in the P7 region (analog +/-5V power converting circuit), normal
status: on
D31 Analog +5V indicator, in the P7 region (analog +/-5V power converting circuit), normal
status: on
D32 Analog -12V indicator, in the P6 region (56V power converting circuit), normal status:
on
D80 USB power indicator, normal status: on
7-7
D69 COME status indicator, normal status: off
D66 100M network status indicator, on when connected to 100M Ethernet
D39 1000M network status indicator, on when connected to 1000M Ethernet
D56 Network connection indicator, on when successfully connected to network
D67 Network transmission status indicator, flickering when data are being transmitted
D34 5V power indicator, normal status: on
D33 12V power indicator, normal status: on
D40 FPGA status indicator, normal status: on
D73 CF card working status indicator, flickering when data are being read or written to the
CF card
D72 FPGA byteblaster working status indicator, flickering when upgrading FPGA. Normal
status: on.
The functions of test points on the board are listed in the following table.
Table 7-3 Description of Test Points of Data and COME Carrier Board
Test Printed Function Description Remarks

point markings
TP1 TP1 1.8V power test point 1.8V
TP8 0.5V RBC channel direct current +0.5V

offset voltage
TP20 TP20 3.3V test point 3.3V
TP26 TP26 5V test point 5V
TP29 +5V Analog +5V power 4.755.25V
TP31 VREF_O Optical signal direct current 57mV

offset reference voltage
TP32 -12V Analog +12V power -11.4-12.6V
TP33 -5V Analog -5V power -4.75-5.25V
7-8
TP40 FSBASE_IN FS blank voltage input The voltage is about several mV
during normal analysis
TP51 VREF_SSAD SS channel AD reference 2.0V

voltage
TP52 VREF_FSAD FS channel AD reference 2.0V

voltage
TP54 VREF_WBCAD SF channel AD reference 2.0V

voltage
TP55 VREF_MONAD System monitoring signal ADC 2.5V

reference voltage
TP56 VREF_HGBAD HGB channel AD reference 2.5V

voltage
TP59 AGND Analog ground
TP62 12VM Analog +12V power monitoring 1.88V~2.12V

voltage
TP63 LASER Laser drive current monitoring The normal voltage is about 1.5V
voltage when the laser is on
TP64 N12VM Analog -12V power monitoring 2.25V~2.55V

voltage
TP65 PD Monitoring voltage of the PD The normal voltage is about 1.5V

current inside the laser when the laser is on
TP66 VCONSTM +56V constant current source 1.37V~1.48V

monitoring voltage
TP68 PMT PMT high voltage control <3V

voltage
TP69 VCONST_HGB HGB constant current source 2.5V constant current source voltage
TP70 HGB1 HGB voltage after first-level Normally the voltage is negative
amplification
TP71 HGB HGB voltage Normal blank voltage 3.24.8V
TP72 HGBLED_N HGB luminotron switch control Low level (0V) luminotron is on, high
signal level (3.3V) luminotron is off
TP75 FS Amplified FS signal with 175mV direct current offset
TP77 FS_BASE Amplified FS blank voltage The voltage is from several mV to

several hundred mV during sample
analysis
TP78 FS_IN FS signal input It is pulse signal during normal

analysis, the pulse width is about 1us,
the amplitude is smaller than 1V
7-9
TP88 SF_WBC Amplified SF signal with 175mV direct current offset
TP89 SF_IN SF signal input It is pulse signal during normal

TP93 SS_IN SS signal input It is pulse signal during normal

TP95 SS Amplified SS signal with 175mV direct current offset
TP100 RBC_BASE RBC baseline signal With 1V direct current offset
TP103 VHOLE RBC aperture voltage about 1.43 1.65V during normal
(monitoring voltage) analysis
TP104 SLT_CON RBC constant current Switch to zapping source when the
source/zapping switch control electrical level is low (0V), and switch
signal to constant current source when the
level is high (3.3V); the default setup
is high level.
TP105 +56V 56V RBC constant current +56V

source voltage
TP106 NVCONST RBC constant current source Low level (0V) switches on constant
switch control signal current source, high level (3.3V)
switches off constant current source,
the default setup is high level.
TP107 RBC Amplified RBC signal With 0.5V direct current offset
TP110 NBURN Zapping power switch control Switch on zapping source when the
signal electrical level is low (0V), switch off
zapping source when the level is high
(3.3V); the default setup is high level.
TP112 +12V Analog +12V power 11.412.6V
TP113 +2.5V Analog +2.5V voltage +2.5V
TP114 AGND Analog ground
7.2.6 Troubleshooting
Table 7-4 lists the frequent errors and troubleshooting methods of the data and COME carrier
board. When error occurs, follow the table to see if the problem lies with the board. The table
only lists hardware errors, the same error caused by fluidic, optical, reagent or software
problems are not included (go to other related chapters in this manual to find the
7-10
troubleshooting methods).
Before troubleshooting the data and COME carrier board, be sure to check:
1. if the power board output is normal (if the error is related to the power source);
2. if the wires connected to data board get loose; if the wire No. and socket No. on
the data board matches; if the connection is reliable; and if the wires are
damaged.
3. if the power input is normal; check if the indicators of the data board are OK
according to Table 7-2.
4. Restart the analyzer to see if the error is removed.
After problems of the connection, input power and indicators are all excluded, and restarting
the analyzer also fails to solve the error, go on to analyze it as per the following table.
WARNING
1. Be sure to wear antistatic gloves when assembling and disassembling the

board, and always hold on the edge of board.
2. When using multimeter or other equipments to test a component, make sure
not to touch other components or wires to avoid board damage caused by
short circuit.
Table 7-4 Errors and Troubleshooting List of Data and COME Carrier Board
No.- Error Cause Error Diagnosis

Representation
The following situations can all be diagnosed as data board

error:
D29 indicator turns off
"+12V analog The voltage of test point TP112 (+12V) is outside 11.4
voltage 12.6V
1 Circuit error
abnormal" is The voltage of test point TP62 (12VM) is outside
reported 2.25V~2.55V
D31 (+5V) indicator is off
The voltage of test point TP55 (VREF_MONAD) is

outside 2.42.6V

"-12V analog error:
voltage
2 Circuit error D32 indicator turns off
abnormal" is
reported The voltage of test point TP32 (-12V) is outside -11.4
-12.6V
7-11
The voltage of test point TP64 (N12VM) is outside
1.88V~2.12V
The voltage of test point TP55 (VREF_MONAD) is

outside 2.42.6V
The following situations can all be diagnosed as luminotron:
The luminotron is off, the level of TP72(HGBLED_N)

is low (about 0V)
HGB luminotron The luminotron is on, the HGB voltage can be

3 error adjustable along with the gain, but when the gain is
adjusted to its upper limit, the HGB voltage is still
lower than 3.2V. The situation suggests the aging of
the luminotron (when fluidic problems are excluded)
The error is removed after replacing the HGB assembly

drive circuit error:
The luminotron is off, and the TP72(HGBLED_N) is of

HGB luminotron high level (3.3V) when running analysis sequence
4 drive circuit error After replacing the HGB assembly, the luminotron is still
off
"HGB Blank The HGB luminotron is off even after it has been
Voltage replaced
abnormal" is HGB
reported photoelectric cell
error (usually the HGB voltage is 0, the voltage of test point TP70(HGB1) is
5 anode and positive and greater than 0.6V. The error is removed after
cathode are replacing HGB assembly.
incorrectly
connected)
The following situations can all be diagnosed as circuit error:
HGB voltage is higher than 4.8V when the gain is

at its minimum
The voltage of test point TP71 (HGB) is 3.2~4.8V,

but the HGB voltage displayed on the screen is
6 HGB circuit error not within the range
HGB voltage is lower than 3.2V when the gain is at

its maximum, and replacing the HGB bath fails
to solve the problem
The voltage of test point TP56 (VREF_HGBAD) is
7-12
outside 2.42.6V
Error of the
HGB gain digital The gain changes from 50 to 200, but the HGB tested is
7 calibration fails potentiometer on unchanged
the board
The following situations can all be diagnosed as board error:
The voltage of 56V constant current source is outside

54 58V, or the voltage of TP66(VCONSTM) is
outside 1.371.48V.
The voltage difference between pin 2 and

pin 3 of J13 is 0V when running RBC
analysis, or the voltage of test point
TP103(VHOLE) is 0V, which suggests
RBC constant current source error or
relay error.
The voltage of test point TP103(VHOLE)

is above 1.65V when analysis is not
Constant current running
"Aperture source
The voltage difference between pin 2 and
voltage error/monitoring
8 pin 3 of J13 is 12~18V when running
abnormal" is circuit error/AD
RBC analysis, but error is reported by
reported error/power
the analyzer. This situation suggests
source error
monitoring circuit error.
The voltage of test point TP103(VHOLE)

is 1.44~1.65V, but error is reported by
the analyzer. This situation suggests
AD error.
The voltage of test point TP56

(VREF_HGBAD) is outside 2.42.6V
Replace the counting bath with 20K resistor, if

the voltage tested by the two ends of the
resistor is outside 11.413.2V, that means
error occurs to the constant current source.
The voltage of TP107(RBC) is outside 0.450.55V when

RBC/PLT RBC sorting analysis is not running (on the shielding box cover)
9 result is 0, or circuit error/AD D30(-5V) or D31 (+5V) indicator is off

no RBC signal error
The voltage of test point TP60 (VREF_RBCAD) is
outside 2.42.6V
No alarm for abnormal aperture voltage, but the no pulse
7-13
signal is found when testing TP107(RBC) with
oscilloscope (normal pulse width is around 20us)
Error of the
MCV gain digital The gain changes from 50 to 200, but the MCV tested is
10 calibration fails potentiometer on unchanged
the board
The voltage of TP65(PD) stays the same no matter the

optical system is connected or disconnected to the
Monitoring circuit motherboard, but the voltage is not 2.5V.
11 error/AD error
"Laser PD
The voltage of test point TP55
current
(VREF_MONAD) is outside 2.42.6V
abnormal" is
reported The following situations can be diagnosed as loose contact of
optical connection wire
Loose contact of
The voltage of TP65(PD) stays at 2.5V no matter the
12 optical
optical system is connected or disconnected to the
connection wire
motherboard.

"Forward The scattergram is normal while "Forward scatter blank
scatter blank voltage abnormal" is reported
13 voltage Circuit error
abnormal" is
reported The voltage of test point TP55 (VREF_MONAD) is
outside 2.42.6V
The voltage of test point TP75(FS), or TP95(SS), or

TP88(SF_WBC) is not 155190mV when analysis is not
running
No D30(-5V) or D31 (+5V) indicator is off

scattergram, or
Sorting circuit The voltage of TP52(VREF_FSAD), or
14 the FS, SS or
error/AD error TP51(VREF_SSDA), or TP51(VREF_WBCAD is outside
SF are in the
1.92.1V
same line
Pulse signal of TP78(FS_IN), TP89(SF_IN) and
TP93(SS_IN) can be detected by oscilloscope when
analysis is running, but no pulse signal of TP75(FS), or
TP95(SS), or TP88(SF_WBC) is detected (normal
pulse width is around 1us)
Gain Error of the

15 The gain changes from 50 to 200, but the location of
calibration of digital
7-14
optical channel potentiometer on scattergram stays the same
(FS/SS/SF) the board
fails
Confirm as per the following procedure:
1) Disconnect all wires connected to the data board and start

16 up the analyzer, if the error is removed, then short circuit of
data board power source can be excluded; check other wires
Auto power-off Short circuit of
and components connected to the data board.
at startup power source
2) Disconnect all wires connected to the data board and start
up the analyzer, if the error persists, then short circuit of data
17 board power source can be concluded, and the data board
should be replaced.
The following situations indicate board error:
18 Failing to zap Board error The voltage deviation of pin 2 and pin 3 of J13 tested by
multimeter is 0V when zapping is going on
1) Check if the D33 LED on the board is illuminated, if yes,

LCD display 2) Test the voltage between pin 3 and pin 2 of J1, which shall
19 Blank screen 1
assembly error be around 4.7V
3) Disconnect LCD signal wire (J23), the LCD back light does
not turn on
1) Check if the D33 LED on the board is illuminated, if yes,

COME module 2) Test the voltage between pin 3 and pin 2 of J1, which shall
20 Blank screen 2
error be around 4.7V
3) Disconnect LCD signal wire (J23), the LCD back light turns
on

Touchscreen SuperIO chip
21 error error 1) Check if communication error with drive control board (error
code: 0x32016025) occurs in parallel with touchscreen error.
1System time is reset when starting up the

Low battery
System clock analyzer; after synchronization setup of
(replace the
error (error software is performed, and the analyzer is
22 button cell to
code: restarted at 1 minute following a power-off, the
solve the
0x32016024) system time is again reset.
problem)
2Test TP2 with a multimeter, and the voltage is
lower than 2.6V.
7-15
7.3 Drive Control Board
7.3.1 Overview
The drive control board is a critical board in the analyzer, abnormal functioning of the
board may result in abnormal functioning of pressure detection, heating control and valve
control.
Pneumatic
Heating
pressure
control
detection
board
board
Fluoro-
Data and COME Drive control chrome
Motherboard
carrier board board detection
sensor3
Fluid
Valve drive
detection
board2
board
Figure 7-5 Connection Diagram of Drive Control Board
7.3.2 Structure
Figure 7-6 Layout of Drive Control Board

7-16
The location of indicators is marked out in the figure above.

Table 7-5 Definition of Power Indicators in the Drive Control Board
Indicator Definition Function Description Flag

The LED is on generally, if it is off, that
Indicator of digital 5V means the 5V power is abnormal,
D6 power which will result in key component VCC
error of the drive control board.

means the 3.3V power is abnormal. If
Indicator of digital 3.3V
D5 D6 is on while D5 is off, that means VDD
power
the power chip in the drive control
board is damaged.

D4 Indicator of 12V power means the 12V power is abnormal, \
which will result in error of the valves.

D3 Indicator of 24V power means the 24V power is abnormal, P24V
which will result in error of the motors.

Indicator of analog means the 12V power is abnormal,
D105 12V power which will result in analog circuit error \
of the drive control board.

Indicator of analog means the -12V power is abnormal,
D103 -12V power which will result in analog circuit error \
of the drive control board.

Indicator of analog 5V means the 5V power is abnormal; if
D104 power D105 is off, that means the power chip \
in the drive control board is damaged.

means the -5V power is abnormal; if
Indicator of analog -5V
D1 D103 is on while D1 is off, that means \
power
the power chip in the drive control
board is damaged.
7-17
Table7-6 Definition of Working Indicators in the Drive Control Board

This indicator is a blue LED which
flickers every 1s; if it does not flicker,
D100 MCU working indicator MCU
that means the MCU is not working
properly.
This indicator is a blue LED which

flickers every 1s; if it does not flicker,
D7 FPGA working indicator FPGA
that means the FPGA is not working
properly.
Table 7-7 Definition of Heating Status Indicators in the Drive Control Board

The indicator is on or flickering when
heating goes on; if it is on, but the
temperature of reaction bath is low,
Heating indicator of
D102 that means the heating function is ACT
reaction bath assembly
abnormal, you should resolve the
problem per the instructions in the
chapter of heating control board.

temperature of flow cell is low, that
Heating indicator of flow
D101 means the heating function is CELL
cell assembly

temperature of sheath fluid is low, that
Heating indicator of sheath
D90 means the heating function is FCM
fluid bath assembly

temperature of optical system is low,
Heating indicator of the
D88 that means the heating function is LAS
optical system
Heating indicator of The indicator is on or flickering when

D87 preheating bath assembly heating goes on; if it is on, but the PRE
7-18
temperature of preheating bath is low,
that means the heating function is
Figure 7-7 Layout of Heating Status Indicators
Table 7-8 Definition of Photocoupler Status Indicators in the Drive Control Board
Indicator Definition Function Description

The indicator is off when the
Photocoupler indicator of start
photocoupler is disconnected or
D68 position of vertical sample feeding
blocked, and it is on when the
unit of the autoloader assembly
photocoupler is not blocked.

Photocoupler indicator of stop
D67 position of vertical sample feeding

D92 position of horizontal sample feeding

Photocoupler indicator of stop
D91 position of horizontal sample feeding

D93 position of unloading unit of the
autoloader assembly
Photocoupler indicator of full status of The indicator is on when the

D78
unloading unit of the autoloader photocoupler is disconnected or
7-19
assembly blocked, and it is off when the
Photocoupler indicator of start The indicator is off when the

position counter of horizontal sample photocoupler is disconnected or
D66 feeding unit of the autoloader blocked, and it is on when the
assembly photocoupler is not blocked.
Photocoupler indicator of stop The indicator is off when the

position counter of horizontal sample photocoupler is disconnected or
D65 feeding unit of the autoloader blocked, and it is on when the
assembly photocoupler is not blocked.

Photocoupler indicator of probe wipe photocoupler is disconnected or
D95 assembly blocked, and it is on when the

Photocoupler indicator of stirring photocoupler is disconnected or
D94 module blocked, and it is on when the

Photocoupler indicator of the piercing
D62 cylinder of mixing and piercing
assembly

Photocoupler indicator of the pincher
D61 extension start position of mixing and
piercing assembly

D60 extension stop position of mixing and
piercing assembly

D59 lifting start position of mixing and
piercing assembly

D99 lifting stop position of mixing and
piercing assembly

D98 rotation start position of mixing and
piercing assembly
D97 Photocoupler indicator of the pincher The indicator is off when the
7-20
rotation stop position of mixing and photocoupler is disconnected or
piercing assembly blocked, and it is on when the
The indicator is on when the

Photocoupler indicator for tube
D79 position detection of mixing and
blocked, and it is off when the
piercing assembly

Photocoupler indicator of WBC photocoupler is disconnected or
D10 syringe assembly blocked, and it is on when the

Photocoupler indicator of whole photocoupler is disconnected or
D86 blood intaking assembly blocked, and it is on when the

Photocoupler indicator of RBC photocoupler is disconnected or
D85 syringe assembly blocked, and it is on when the
D96 Reserved Off
D11 Reserved Off
D63 Reserved Off
D64 Reserved Off
Figure 7-8 Layout of Photocoupler Status Indicators
Table 7-9 Definition of Status Indicators of Drive Control Board Floater and Micro-switch

The indicator is on when the floater is
D58 WC1 bath floater indicator at the upper position, and it is off when
the floater is at the lower position
DIL bath floater indicator The indicator is on when the floater is

D57
at the upper position, and it is off when
7-21

D56 FCM bath floater indicator at the upper position, and it is off when

D54 WC2 bath floater indicator at the upper position, and it is off when

D51 SCI bath floater indicator at the upper position, and it is off when
The indicator is off when the floater is

D42 Waste container floater indicator at the upper position, and it is on when
D37 Reserved Off
D16 Reserved Off
Micro-switch indicator for the fully The indicator is on when the switch is
D15 loaded status of tube rack of the pressed down, and it is off when the
autoloader assembly switch bounces back
D14 Reserved Off
Figure 7-9 Layout of Status Indicators of Floater and Micro-switch
Table 7-10 Definition of Connection Status Indicators of the Fluid Detection Board and
Pressure Detection Board
Indicator Definition Function Description Remarks

The indicator is a red LED, when it is
To conclude that the
on, it means the fluid detection board
analyzer is working
Connection status indicator of is not correctly connected, you need to
D12 normally, the red
the fluid detection board check if the wire connecting the
indicators on the drive
motherboard and the fluid connection
control board must all
board is firmly plugged.
be off .
D13 Connection status indicator of The indicator is a red LED, when it is
7-22
the pressure detection board on, it means the pressure detection
board is not correctly connected, you
need to check if the wire connecting
the motherboard and the pressure
connection board is firmly plugged.
Table 711 Troubleshooting Method of the Drive Control Board
No.- Error Troubleshooting Method

consequence
A First check if the pneumatic unit is on and if the power
supply of the pneumatic unit is normal.
B Check if the connection status indicator of pressure

detection board on the drive control board is on, if so, that
means the pressure detection board is not correctly
connected, you should check if the wire between the
mother board and pressure detection board is firmly
plugged.
C Check if the drive control board MCU indicator and the

FPGA working status indicator are flickering, if not, upgrade
the programs of drive control board MCU and FPGA; if the
Abnormal problem persists, replace the drive control board.
pressure of the D Check if the analog 12V indicator and the analog 5V
1 analyzer is indicator of the drive control board are on; if the analog
reported 12V indicator is off, that means power supply is abnormal,
you need to check if the power board output is normal; if the
analog 12V indicator in on while the analog 5V indicator
is off, that suggests error of the drive control board, which
shall be replaced.
E If the pressure is lower than required, check whether there

is crystal in the tube connected to the pressure sensor, if so,
replace the pressure detection board.
F If the pressure is lower than required, check if leakage

occurs to the pneumatic tubes; if the pressure is higher than
required, it is highly possible that the pneumatic unit is
damaged.
A If error is reported for each channel, check if the analog

Temperature error 12V indicator and the analog 5V indicator of the drive
2 of the analyzer is control board are on; if the analog 12V indicator is off, that
reported means power supply is abnormal, you need to check if the
power board output is normal; if the analog 12V indicator
7-23
in on while the analog 5V indicator is off, that suggests
error of the drive control board, which shall be replaced.
B Check if the drive control board MCU indicator and the

FPGA working status indicator are flickering, if not, upgrade
the programs of drive control board MCU and FPGA; if the
problem persists, replace the drive control board.
C If the temperature is close to 70, check if the connection

wire of the temperature sensor is firmly connected.
D If the temperature is close to room temperature, check if the

heating indicator is on the drive control board is on, if not,
that suggests error of the drive control board, you need to
upgrade the MCU and FPGA programs of the drive control
board. If the upgrade fails to solve the problem, replace the
drive control board. If the heating indicator is on, but the
temperature does not change, check the heating channel of
the analyzer (see the troubleshooting method in the chapter
of heating control board).
A Block and unblock the photocoupler with your hand or

something opaque, observe if the on/off status of a LED in
the photocoupler status indicator region is switching, if yes,
that means the photocoupler and its connection wire are
normal; if not, there may be foreign matters on the
photocoupler, or the photocoupler or its connection wire
may be damaged. Wipe the photocoupler with clean paper
Error of motion cloth, check if the indicator status is changing when the
components (e.g. photocoupler is blocked, if not, replace the photocoupler; if
3 motor, the problem persists, replace the all the connection wires.
photocoupler, etc.)
B If error of the photocoupler can be excluded, check the
motor to see if it is moving. If yes, observe if photocoupler
can be correctly blocked by the baffle when the motor is
moving. If not, check if the connection wire of the motor is
firmly connected; if yes, try to resolve the problem by
upgrading the MCU and FPGA programs of the drive
control board or replacing the drive control board.
A Check if there are bubbles in the alarmed channel.
B Check if any red LED on the drive control board is on, if yes,
it is highly possible that the connection wire between the
Fluid detection fluid detection board and the motherboard is loose, you
4 error should replug or replace the wire.
C If the two causes above can be excluded, replace the fluid

detection board. If it still fails, replace the drive control
board.
Incorrect or no A Check if the floater status indicators work properly (for

5
alarm message is WC1, WC2, FCM, SCI and DIL baths, the indicators are on
7-24
reported for the when the floaters are at the upper position, and they are off
reservoir, waste when the floaters are at the lower position; the situation is
bath and waste just the opposite for the waste container).
container (the
B If the floater status indicators do not work properly, check if
overflow of fluid
the floater sensor connection wire is loose.
suggests that
there is no alarm C Check the soldering status of the BNC connector of the
message) back plate waste container interface (see if the red wire is in
the middle and the black wire is by its side).
D Check if the floater sensor can move up and down

smoothly, or it cannot move due to incorrect installation.
E If the possibilities above are all excluded, upgrade the MCU

and FPGA programs of the drive control board; if the
problem cannot be solved, replace the drive control board.
A Make sure the blood sensor is correctly installed.
B Make sure the analog 12V and 5V are normal.
C Reset the DA value of the blood sensor (see the relevant

chapters).
6 Blood sensor error
D If the DA value is set to be the highest (or lowest), and the
voltage can not be adjusted to be within the reference
range, replace the blood sensor.
E If the error persists, replace the drive control board.
A Make sure fluorochrome sensor is correctly installed.
B Make sure the analog 12V and 5V are normal.
C Reset the DA value of fluorescent reagent sensor.

Fluorochrome
7 sensor error D If the DA value is set to be the highest (or lowest), and the
voltage can not be adjusted to be within the reference
range, replace the sensor.
E If the error persists, replace the drive control board.
7-25
7.4 Motherboard
7.4.1 Overview
In BC-6800 Auto Hematology Analyzer, the motherboard transmits signals in the hardware
system, and provides signal transmission function to the drive control board and data and
COME carrier board; besides, the motherboard is connected to the power board to supply
power to all modules and boards.
Figure 7-10 Function Diagram of the Motherboard
7-26
7.4.2 Functions
Mother board is the connection junction of all boards and components. Generally, all
signals transmitted by the motherboard are related to the data board, drive control board or
power board. So the interfaces can be classified into the following categories:
Data Board and the Related Interfaces
provide interfaces for analog signals, scatter signals (FS) and fluorescent signals (SF)
of the optical system; provide connection path for temperature sensor of the optical
system;
provide signal path for the fluorescence preamplification board; and provide signal
path for the drive control board.
provide signal path for the indicator board.
provide digital signal path for the drive control board (such as the UART interface and
SPI interface).
Drive Control Board and the Related Interfaces
provide transmission interfaces for the monitor and control of the drive components,
including valve control transmission, motor control transmission, position sensor
transmission and temperature&voltage detection transmission; the details are as
follows:
provide power signal interfaces for all motors;
provide transmission interfaces for all motor position sensors;
provide transmission for pressure and temperature detection signals;
provide signal transmission for pneumatic and blood sensors;
provide signal transmission for float sensor;
provide signal transmission for liquid level detection board;
provide transmission for the heating system.
Power Board and the Related Interfaces
The power source of all boards and modules is from the motherboard; the power board
supplies power to the following systems:
provides +5V digital power to the digital system;
provides 12V analog power to the analog system;
provides 24V power to the power system;
provides AC 120V zapping power to the aperture.
7-27
7.4.3 Structure
See Figure 7-11 for the PCBA structure of the motherboard.
Figure 7-11 Top-layer Structure of the Motherboard PCBA
7-28
7.4.4 Interfaces
See Figure 7-11 for the location of the interfaces on the motherboard. The interfaces are
numbered in order. See Table 7-12 for the description of motherboard interfaces.
Table 7-12 Description of Motherboard Interfaces
Socket
Function Description Wire No. Connected to
No.
J1 Float sensor C-009-001209-00 Float sensor of baths and waste
Interface of liquid level detection C-009-001210-00 Liquid level detection board

J2
board
J3 Control signal of heating control board C-009-001213-00 Heating Control Board
J4 Control the indicator board C-009-000948-00 Indicator board
Monitor serial port of drive board and \ \

J5
data communication
J6 Optical system control signal line C-009-001247-00 Optical system
J7 Optical system signal line C-009-001205-00 Optical system
Temperature sensor connecting line C-009-001219-00 temperature sensors and

J8
aspirate key
J9 12V analog power C-009-001238-00 Analog section of the data board
J10 AC120V C-009-001240-00 Power board
Interface of the digital section of the \ \

J20
data board
Interface of the analog section of the \ \

J21
data board
Signal of the reserved switch of the \ \

J22
data board
J23 Drive board debug serial port \ \
Interface of the drive board \ \

J24
socket(Europe)

J25
socket(Europe)

J26
socket(Europe)
Probe wipe, stirring motor and C-009-001221-00 Probe wipe, stirring motor and
J30
photocoupler signal line photocoupler
Motor and photocoupler connecting C-009-001224-00 Motor and photocoupler of the

J31
signal of the mix and pierce module mix and pierce module
J32 Connecting signal of the reserved \ \
7-29
motor and photocoupler
Pneumatic pressure detection board C-009-000949-00 Pneumatic pressure detection

J33
board
Signal of the blood detection sensor Blood sensor

J34
(front)
Signal of the blood detection sensor Blood sensor

J35
(back)
The motor and photocoupler C-009-001223-00 Autoloader module

J40 connecting lines of the autoloader
module
WBC&SWB syringes and C-009-001226-00 WBC&SWB syringes and

J41
photocoupler lines photocouplers
RBC syringe and photocoupler C-009-001227-00 RBC syringe and photocoupler

J42
connecting line
J43 Control signal of valve drive board C-009-001230-00 Valve drive board (A)
J44 Control signal of valve drive board C-009-001231-00 Valve drive board (B)
J50 Power source of 24V and 12V power C-009-001236-00 Power board
J51 Power supply of the valve drive board C-009-001228-00 Valve drive board (A)
J52 Power supply of the valve drive board C-009-001229-00 Valve drive board (B)
J53 Power supply of digital 5V and 12V C-009-001237-00 Power board
J54 Pneumatic unit control interface 3100-20-49034 Pneumatic unit
The motherboard provides signal transmission function; it failure mainly results from loose
contact, which can be diagnosed by testing the network with a multimeter.
7.5 Network Board
7.5.1 Overview
Network patching board divides the channel through which the data board communicates with
the PC into 2 parts physically; it serves as the intermediate transmit point of the analyzer and
its external network cable. The board provides 2 RJ45 connectors and the direct connections.
See the following figure:
7-30
Figure 7-12 Function Diagram of the Network Board
7.5.2 Structure
The front and back view of the network board PCBA:
Figure 7-13 The Front and Back View of the Network Board PCBA
Table 7-13 Troubleshooting of the Network Board
Error Consequence Cause Troubleshooting Method

Step 1: Check if the network cable is firmly connected. If
yes, reconnect the cable and check if the connection is
1. The network
normal; if no, go to Step 2.
cable gets
PC cannot connect to loose; Step 2: Take out the network board, test if connection
the BC-6800 status of J1 and J2 with a multimeter. See the figure
2. Line failure
above for the definition of J1 and J2. If the Pin 1~8 of J1
or loose
are connected to the Pin 1~8 of J2, the network board is
contact.
normal, you should check other parts of the analyzer; if
not, replace the network board.
7-31
See the following flow chart:
Figure 7-14 Troubleshooting of the Network Board
7.6 Power Board
7.6.1 Overview
The power board in BC-6800 Auto Hematology Analyzer provides 7 groups of stable power
supply, including D5V, D12V, A+12V, A-12V, AC120V, P12V and P24V.
7-32
PFC auxiliary
AC EMI filter PFC Standby
input and rectifier circuit circuit
PFC
OVP
FLYBACK protecti PF
D5V output ve
converter signal
circuit OCP
protection
OVP
FORWARD P24V protecti
converter ve
circuit P12V output
OCP
protection
OCP
protection
A-12V
FLYBACK OVP
A+12V
converter protecti
circuit ve
120V
D12V
Figure 7-15 Function Diagram of the Power Board
7.6.2 Functions
The power board works under the 50/60Hz(2Hz) voltage of the 100-240V(10%) AC input.
Once the AC power is on, all circuits start to work, the D5V, D12V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V,
P12V and P24V voltages all have output.
The loading status of each circuit is listed in the following table:
Table 7-14 Characteristics of Output Voltage
Voltage Minimum Specified Peak Output Voltage

Current Current Current Range
D5V 2A 6A / 4.85/5.25V
+A12V 0mA 1A / 11. 5/12. 5V
-A12V 0mA 650mA / -11.5/-12.5V
P12V 0.3A 4A 10A 11.5/12.5V
7-33
P24V 0A 2.5A 5A 22/29V
AC120V 0mA 60mA / 115/145V(RMS)
D12V 0mA 1A 1.5A 11.5/12.5V
+A12V and -A12V share the same ground; P12V and P24V share the same ground; All the
other outputs do not share ground. AC120V is required to be alternating current (there is no
requirement on waveform), its frequency is 50Hz+/-10Hz..
During a 60s cycle, the peak load current of P12V and P24V do not last for more than 1s.
7.6.3 Structure
There are 6 outgoing interfaces in the power board, 4 of them are sockets, of which the
numbers are J1, J2, J3 and J4; the AC input wires L and N extend from edge of the board to
the sockets to connect the board to external components, the PCB numbers are L and N; the
small inverter board is directly plugged to the power board, its PCB No. is PCBA1. See the
following figure for the location of the interfaces on the board.
J101 J2 PGND DGND D12V AGND
DGND
A+12V A-12V
D5V P12V P24V
PGND
Figure 7-16Power Board Mounting Diagram

Table 7-15 Definitions of Debug and Test Points
No.- Pin Test Point Function Reference Value

1 C114.+ PFC output voltage 39020V
2 U101.9 PFC chip reference voltage output 7.5V
3 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V
7-34
4 C204.+ VDD voltage 121V
D5V output voltage, and ripple &

5 C235.+ 4.85/5.25V, 0.1V
noise voltage
6 C332.+ A+12V output 11. 5/12. 5V, 0.1V
7 C338.- A-12V output -11.5/-12.5V, 0.1V
8 C329.+ D12V output 11.5/12.5V, 0.1V
9 C419.+ P24V output voltage and ripples 22/29V, 0.15V
10 C488+ P12V output voltage and ripples 11.5/12.5V, 0.15V
11 J2(1, 3) Fan input 11.5/12.5V, 0.15V
12 TP19, TP20 AC120V output 115/145V(RMS)
Figure 7-17 Troubleshooting the Power Board
7-35
7.7 Power Patching Board
7.7.1 Overview
The power patching board of BC-6800 Auto Hematology Analyzer filters and then splits the
input AC power into two circuits, which supply power to power board and auxiliary heating
power respectively; the voltage supplied to the auxiliary power can be of two values
(115V/230V).
7.7.2 Functions
See the following figure for the function diagram of power patching board.
The power patching board is directly connected to input switch, it works under the
50/60Hz(2Hz) voltage of the 100-240V(10%) AC input power. Once the AC power switch is
on, filtered current will be supplied to the main and auxiliary power.
EMI filter and PFC Voltage Auxiliary

overvoltage/ circuit selectio power
overcurrent i
AC t ti
input
EMI filter Main
circuit power
b d
Figure 7-18 Function Diagram of the Power Patching Board
7.7.3 Structure
The power patching board has 5 outgoing interfaces, 4 of them are sockets, of which the
numbers are J1, J2, J3 and J4; The voltage selection switch and its connection wire is
soldered to the board through 6 pylomes, the numbers on the PCB are TP1TP6. See the
following figure for the location of the interfaces on the board.
7-19Power Patching Board Mounting Diagram
7-36
7.7.4 Interfaces
Table 7-16 Interface Sockets
Socket No. Definition Socket Model

Main power board M32-039001-00
J1 output socket HEADER WTB 6.2mm DIP1*3TOP VL's
M39-000302--
J2 AC input socket
HEADER WTB 6.2mm DIP2*2TOP VLseries
Auxiliary power M32-049004-00

J3 output socket HEADER WTB 6.2mm DIP1*4TOP VL's
M32-032002-00
J4 Reserved socket
HEADER WTB 3.96mm DIP1*3TOP 5273series
Voltage selection 009-001193-00

TP1TP6 switch interface Voltage selection switch and connecting line

The following test points are important during servicing process.
Table 7-17 Definitions of Debug and Test Points
No.- Pin Test Point Function Reference Value

Shall be the same with network
1 J1 (1,3) Main power input voltage
power
PFC chip reference voltage Shall be the same with network

2 J3 (1,4) output power
PFC chip reference voltage Shall be the same with network

3 C2 output power
Power patching board input Shall be the same with network

4 J2 (1, 3) AC voltage power
7-37
Figure 7-20 Troubleshooting Procedure
7.8 Laser Drive Board
7.8.1 Overview
To generate scatter and fluorescence signal, a driving source (illuminating beam) of scatter
and fluorescence is required. The semiconductor laser in BC-6800 fulfills the function, and it is
driven by laser drive board.
The laser drive board is in the optical module of the analyzer, it is connected to the
semiconductor laser and the motherboard. It obtains power supply and control signals from the
motherboard, and sends laser drive current to the motherboard in turn. It also drives the
semiconductor laser to generate constant-power laser.
7-38
Figure 7-21 Connection Between Laser Drive Board and Other Boards
7.8.2 Functions
The laser drive board realizes constant-power control by conducting constant-power control
over the laser (LD)(the photoelectric detector inside the laser conducts real-time monitoring
over the output power of the laser, and forms closed loop feedback control system). See the
following figure for the system diagram.
Figure 7-22 Function Diagram of the Laser Drive Board
7.8.3 Structure
See the following figure for the PCBA structure of the laser drive board.
7-39
Figure 7-23 PCBA Structure of the Laser Drive Board

Adjust the sliding rheostat VR1 clockwise, the resistance of VR1, the voltage of TP10_VREF
(taking voltage of the analog ground as reference) and the intensity of emergent laser all
increases, and vice versa. Generally, the voltage of TP10_VREF is adjusted to be around -5V.
Table 7-18 Test Points of Laser Drive Board
Test Tested signal Function Voltage

point
+12V voltage from the
TP1 AVCC (+12V) 11.4V~12.6V
motherboard
-12V voltage from the

TP2 AVSS (-12V) -12.6V~-11.4V
motherboard
Generally 1~1.5V when the laser is

Laser power monitoring on
TP3 PD_CURT voltage Generally lower than 3.5 ~4V when
the laser is off
Generally 1V~2V when the laser is

Laser drive current monitoring on
TP4 LD_CURT voltage Generally lower than 0.4V when the
laser is off
TP5 N6V (-6.5V) -6V voltage from the laser -7V~-6 V
7-40
drive board
When level of LD_ON is high

Laser on: -1V ~ 0 V; laser off:
TP7 LD_ON (0V), the laser is on; and when
-12.6V~ -11.4V
it is low (-12V), the laser is off.
Generate constant reference

TP10 VREF -5.5V~-4.5V
voltage in the board
Output voltage of comparator,

TP12 CMPOUT which controls the laser drive Laser on: -10.5 V ~ -9 V
current directly
Test points in the data board that are connected to the laser drive board are listed in the
following table.
Table 7-19 Test points Related to the Data Board
Tested signal of Test Corresponding Corresponding test Connection status

laser drive board point signal of data point in data board
board
AVCC TP2 AVCC TP112 Directly connected
AVSS TP1 AVSS TP32 Directly connected
AGND J2.8/J1.3 AGND TP47/TP57 Directly connected
Not directly connected, the

LD_CURT TP4 LASER TP63 two test points are of the
same value
Not directly connected, the

PD_CURT TP3 PD TP65 two test points are of the
same value
The following table lists the frequent errors and troubleshooting methods of the laser drive
board. When error occurs, follow the table to see if the problem lies with the board. The table
only lists hardware errors, the same error consequences caused by fluidic, optical, reagent or
software problems are not included (go to other related chapters in this manual to find the
troubleshooting methods).
Before troubleshooting the laser drive board, be sure to check:
1. If the error is related to power or voltage, check if the power board output is normal first, and
then check the power input of the boards.
2. Check if the wires connected to motherboard get loose; if the wire No. and socket No. on the
7-41
motherboard matches; if the connection is reliable; and if the wires are damaged. After shutting
down the analyzer, test if the test points in the optical board are connected to the
corresponding test points in the data board with a multimeter (of buzzer status), then you can
tell if the connections of wires or sockets are OK.
After problems of the connection and input power are all excluded, and restarting the analyzer
also fails to solve the error, go on to analyze it as per Table 7-20-. The 12V power error listed
in the table refers to power error caused by the laser drive board.
When the optical shielding box is open, the laser is off , and blood cell counting cannot be
performed (default setting of the analyzer). If you want to turn on the laser under such case,
you can short-circuit the two adjacent soldering holes of interface J3 on the board.
NOTE
The correct order of electric testing operation of the laser drive board is:
z Before test: power off -- wear antistatic gloves -- disassemble optical shielding
box -- disassemble wires of fluorescence preamplification board -- power on and
test.
z After test: power off -- wear antistatic gloves -- connect wires of fluorescence
preamplification board -- install optical shielding box.
z Do not connect or disconnect wires when power is on; do not operate without
taking antistatic measures.
z The fluorescence module cannot be exposed to intensive light, or else the PMT
may be damaged. (the intensity of indoor illumination is allowed).
z When disassembling optical board and its shielding cover, be sure not to touch
other optical components or disassemble any components other than the optical
board and its shielding cover.
Table 7-20 Troubleshooting Errors of Laser Drive Board
No.- Error Troubleshooting Cause

Consequence
a. Press down the microswitch of the optical Board error:
No shielding box, the laser is off during analysis photocoupler is
1 scattergram process. Short-circuit interface J3 in the laser drive damaged.
board, the laser turns on.
No a. Short-circuit interface J3 in the laser drive board, Due to board

2 scattergram the laser is still off. error or laser
or abnormal error, the laser
b. During analysis process, the voltage of data
scattergram cannot turn on
board test point TP63 (LASER) is outside the range
or the power of
7-42
1V~2V(taking voltage of the analog ground as output beam is
reference). (the optical shielding box does not need unstable, or the
to be open) facula shape is
abnormal, etc.
c. During analysis process, the voltage of data
(if any error
board test point TP65 (PD) is outside the range
consequence
1V~1.5V (taking voltage of the analog ground as
listed on the left
reference). (the optical shielding box does not need
occurs, board
to be open)
failure can be
d. The voltage of test point TP2 (AVCC) is outside concluded).
the range 11.4V~12.6V (taking voltage of the
analog ground as reference), but the voltage of
interface J2.4 is within the range (taking voltage of
the analog ground as reference).
e. The voltage of test point TP1 (AVSS) is outside

the range -12.6V~-11.4V (taking voltage of the
analog ground as reference), but the voltage of
interface J2.2 is within the range (taking voltage of
Power-failure a. When the error occurs, power off the analyzer, 12V power
occurs to the disassemble the laser drive board and then restart error of the
analyzer the analyzer, the error is removed. board
3 immediately
after it is
electrified.
7.9 Scatter Pre-amplification Boards
7.9.1 Overview
The WBC and RET measuring principle of BC-6800 five-differential auto hematology analyzer
is: differentiating WBC and measuring RET by analyzing cell size, internal graininess, and
absorbance of fluorescent dye.
The forward scatter signal (FS) of a cell represents the cell size;
The side scatter signal (SS) of a cell represents the intracellular density;
The side fluorescence signal (SF) of a cell represents the absorbance degree of
fluorescent dye of the cell.
The scatter signals must be transferred into current signals to be processed by the circuit. The
current signals are then be transferred to voltage and amplified, and then collected by ADC to
be sent to the back-end for logical processing and analysis. The photoelectric conversion,
current-voltage conversion, signal amplification and sorting are done by the analog circuit.
The analog circuit consists of two parts: the front part is scatter preamplification board, which
forms optical sensor (in the optical module of the analyzer) together with other optical
7-43
components and fluidics, its functions include photoelectric conversion, I/V conversion and
amplification of signals; the back part is analog circuit (placing on the data and COME carrier
board), its functions include signal sorting and collection of signals by the ADC. The
preamplification board that processes FS signal is called FS preamplification board, while the
preamplification board that processes SS signal is called SS preamplification board.
The scatter preamplification boards are connected to the data and COME carrier board
through the motherboard. See Figure 7-24 for the connection status. The preamplification
board is connected to the mother board through shielding wire. The board obtains power
supply from the motherboard, and also transfers its output signals to the data and COME
carrier board through the mother board.
Power
Power
signal
FS scatter
signal
signal
Figure 7-24Connection Between Scatter Preamplification Boards and Other Boards
7.9.2 Functions
The scatter preamplification boards conduct photoelectric conversion, I/V conversion and
preamplification of scatter signals. See the following figure for their function diagrams.
Figure 7-25 Function Diagram of Scatter Preamplification Boards
7-44
7.9.3 Structure
The following figures are the PCBA structure diagrams of FS and SS preamplification boards.
Figure 7-26 Forward Scatter (FS) Preamplification Board
Figure 7-27 Side Scatter (SS) Preamplification Board

FS preamplification board:
Table 7-21 Test Point Definition of FS Preamplification Board
Test Tested Functions Voltage

point signal
AVCC +12V analog voltage from the
TP1 +11.4V~+12.6V
(+12V) motherboard
AVSS -12V analog voltage from the

TP2 - 12.6V~ - 11.4V
(-12V) motherboard
TP5 FS Output signal of the preamplification During normal analysis process, the
7-45
boards signal is pulse signal, the pulse
width is about 1us. Generally, it is
below 1V.
SS preamplification board:
Table 7-22 Test Point Definition of SS Preamplification Board
Test Tested Functions Voltage

point signal
AVSS -12V analog voltage from the
TP1 -12.6V ~ -11.4V
(-12V) motherboard
AVCC +12V analog voltage from the

TP2 +11.4V~+12.6V
(+12V) motherboard
6.2V offset voltage from the SS

TP3 6.2V 5.4V~6.4V
preamplification boards
During normal analysis

Output signal of the preamplification process, the signal is pulse
TP4 SS boards signal, the pulse width is about
1us. Generally, it is below 1V.
-5.8V offset voltage from the SS -7.1V~-5V

TP5 -5.8V preamplification boards
Test points related to the data board
Test points in the data board that are connected to the preamplification boards are listed in the
following table. See the section of data and COME carrier board for location of the test points.
Board Tested signal of Test point Corresponding Corresponding Connection

preamplification signal of data test point in data status
boards board board
Directly
FS board FS TP5 FS_IN TP78
connected
Directly
FS board Analog ground J1.3/J1.5/J1.6 FSAGND TP47
connected
Directly
FS board AVCC TP1 AVCC TP112
connected
Directly
FS board AVSS TP2 AVSS TP32
connected
SS Directly
SS TP4 SS_IN TP93
board connected
SS Directly
Analog ground J1.3/J1.5/J1.6 SSAGND TP57
board connected
SS Directly
AVCC TP2 AVCC TP112
board connected
7-46
SS Directly
AVSS TP1 AVSS TP32
board connected
The following tables list the frequent errors and troubleshooting methods of the scatter
preamplification boards. When error occurs, follow the table to see if the problem lies with the
board. The table only lists hardware errors, the same error consequences caused by fluidic,
optical, reagent or software problems are not included (go to other related chapters in this
manual to find the troubleshooting methods).
Before troubleshooting the scatter preamplification boards, be sure to check:
1. If the error is related to power or voltage, check if the power board output is normal first, and
then check the power input of the boards.
corresponding test points in the data board (including output signal of preamplification boards
and analog ground) with a multimeter (of buzzer status), then you can tell if the connections of
wires or sockets are OK.
also fails to solve the error, go on to analyze it as per Table 7-24 and Table 7-25-. The 12V
power error listed in the tables refers to power error caused by the scatter preamplification
boards.
NOTE
The correct order of electric testing operation of the scatter preamplification boards
is:
z Before test: power off -- wear antistatic gloves -- disassemble optical shielding
box -- disassemble wires of fluorescence preamplification board -- disassemble
the preamplification board shielding cover -- power on and test
z After test: power off -- wear antistatic gloves -- connect wires of fluorescence
preamplification board -- connect wires of fluorescence preamplification board --
install optical shielding box
may be damaged. (the intensity of indoor illumination is allowed)
7-47
Table 7-24 Troubleshooting Errors of the FS Board

Consequence
FS channel of a. When analysis is not running, the voltage of test point Board error
the TP78 (FS_IN) of the data board is high (taking voltage (if any error
scattergram is of the analog ground as reference), with its absolute consequence
abnormal or value higher than 1V. (the optical shielding box does not listed on the
without signal need to be open) left occurs,
board failure
b. The voltage of test point TP1 (AVCC) is outside the
can be
range 11.4V~12.6V (taking voltage of the analog
concluded)
1 ground as reference), but the voltage of interface J1.1 is
within the range (taking voltage of the analog ground as
reference).
c. The voltage of test point TP2 (AVSS) is outside the

range -12.6V~-11.4V (taking voltage of the analog
ground as reference), but the voltage of interface J1.2 is
within the range (taking voltage of the analog ground as
reference).
occurs to the disassemble the FS preamplification boards and then error of the
analyzer restart the analyzer, the error is removed. board
2 immediately
after it is
electrified.
Table 7-25 Troubleshooting Errors of the SS Board

Consequence
SS channel of a. When analysis is not running, the voltage of test Board error
the point TP93(SS_IN) of the data board is at least 1V (if any error
1 scattergram higher than that of the analog ground. (the optical consequence
is abnormal shielding box does not need to be open) listed on the
or without left occurs,
b. The voltage of test point TP2 (AVCC) is outside the
signal board failure
can be
ground as reference), but the voltage of interface J1.1
concluded)
is within the range (taking voltage of the analog ground
as reference).
c. The voltage of test point TP1 (AVSS) is outside the

is within the range (taking voltage of the analog ground
as reference).
d. The voltage of test point TP3 is outside the range
7-48
5.4V~ 6.4V (taking voltage of the analog ground as
reference).
d. The voltage of test point TP5 is outside the range

-7.1V~ -5V (taking voltage of the analog ground as
reference).
occurs to the disassemble the SS preamplification boards and then error of the
analyzer restart the analyzer, the error is removed. board
2 immediately
after it is
electrified.
7.10 Fluorescence Pre-amplification Board
7.10.1 Overview
The WBC and RET measuring principle of BC-6800 Auto Hematology Analyzer is:
differentiating WBC and measuring RET by analyzing cell size, internal graininess, and
absorbance of fluorescent dye.
The forward scatter signal (FS) of a cell represents the cell size;
The side scatter signal (SS) of a cell represents the intracellular density;
The side fluorescence signal (SF) of a cell represents the absorbance degree of
fluorescent dye of the cell.
The fluorescence signals must be transferred into current signals to be processed by the
circuit. The current signals are then be transferred to voltage and amplified, and then collected
by ADC to be sent to the back-end for logical processing and analysis. The photoelectric
conversion is conducted by photomultiplier tube, current-voltage conversion, signal
amplification and sorting are done by the analog circuit.
The analog circuit consists of two parts: the front part is fluorescence preamplification board,
which forms optical sensor (in the optical module of the analyzer) together with other optical
components and fluidics, its functions include photoelectric conversion, I/V conversion and
amplification of signals; the back part is analog circuit (placing on the data and COME carrier
board), its functions include signal sorting and collection of signals by the ADC.
The fluorescence preamplification board is connected to the data and COME carrier board
through the motherboard. See Figure 7-24 for the connection status. The preamplification
board is connected to the mother board through shielding wire. The board obtains power
supply from the motherboard, and also transfers its output signals to the data and COME
carrier board through the mother board.
7.10.2 Functions
The fluorescence preamplification board conducts photoelectric conversion, I/V conversion
7-49
and preamplification of fluorescent signals. See Figure 2 for its function diagram.
Figure 7-28 Overall Diagram of Fluorescence Preamplification Board
7.10.3 Structure
See the following figure for the PCBA structure of the fluorescence preamplification board. The
photomultiplier tube (PMT) the component with black quadrate metal cover on the back of the
board.
Figure 3 PCBA Structure Diagram of SF Preamplification Board

Table 7-26 Test Point Definition of SF Preamplification Board
Test Functions Voltage

Tested signal
point
+12V analog voltage from
TP1 AVCC (+12V) 11.4~12.6V
the motherboard
TP2 AVSS (-12V) -12V analog voltage from -12.6~-11.4V
7-50
the motherboard
Reference voltage Around 1V

TP3 PMTVREF outputted by the PMT
The voltage of each channel is

different; during analysis process,
PMT high voltage control CBC channel: lower than 0.1V;
TP7 PMT_HV voltage CBC+DIFF channel: 0.35~0.45V;
CBC+NRBC channel: 0.28~0.38V;
CBC+RET channel: 0.48~0.58V.
3.3V digital power from the 3.135~3.465V

TP8 VDD (3.3V) motherboard
TP10 PMT_PWR PMT power (+12V) 11.4~12.6V
Test points related to the data board
Tested signal of SF Test Corresponding Corresponding Connection status

preamplification point signal of data test point in
board board data board
SF J1.4 SF_IN TP89 Two test points are directly
connected
Analog ground J1.3/J1.5 SFAGND TP58 Two test points are directly
connected
Digital ground J3.4 Digital ground TP19 Two test points are directly
connected
AVCC TP1 AVCC TP112 Two test points are directly

connected
AVSS TP2 AVSS TP32 Two test points are directly

connected
PMT_HV TP7 PMT (monitoring TP68 The two test points are not directly
voltage of PMT connected, the monitoring voltage
(PMT high voltage
high voltage of TP68 in the data board is two
control voltage)
control voltage) times higher than that of the
PMT_HV in the SF preamplification
board.
The following table lists the frequent errors and troubleshooting methods of the fluorescence
preamplification board. When error occurs, follow the table to see if the problem lies with the
board. The table only lists hardware errors, the same error consequences caused by fluidic,
optical, reagent or software problems are not included (go to other related chapters in this
7-51
manual to find the troubleshooting methods).
Before troubleshooting the fluorescence preamplification board, be sure to check:
1. If the error is related to power or voltage, check if the power board output is normal first,
and then check the power input of the boards.
corresponding test points in the data board (including output signal of preamplification boards,
analog ground and digital ground) with a multimeter (of buzzer status), then you can tell if the
connections of wires or sockets are OK.
also fails to solve the error, go on to analyze it as per Table 7-28-. The 12V power error listed
in the tables refers to power error caused by the fluorescence preamplification boards.
NOTE
The correct order of electric testing operation of the fluorescence preamplification
boards is:
z Before test: set PMT gain as 1 -- power off -- wear antistatic gloves --
disassemble optical shielding box -- disassemble shielding cover of
fluorescence preamplification board -- power on and test
z After test: power off -- wear antistatic gloves -- install shielding cover of
fluorescence preamplification board -- install optical shielding box
may be damaged. (the intensity of indoor illumination is allowed)
z Exercise caution when testing the fluorescence preamplification board; be sure
to avoid occurrence of short circuit between the PMT high voltage control
voltage PMT_HV and other parts of the circuit, which may damage the PMT.
z Do not increase the PMT gain unless it is necessary, as increasing PMT gain may
cause irrecoverable damage to the PMT.
Table 7-28 Troubleshooting Errors of the SF Preamplification Board

Consequence
1 SF channel of a. When analysis is not running, the voltage of test Board error
the point TP89(SF output) of the data board is high (taking (if any error
7-52
scattergram voltage of the analog ground as reference), with its consequence
is abnormal absolute value higher than 1V. (the optical shielding listed on the
or without box does not need to be open) left occurs,
signal board failure
b. When analysis is running, the PMT high voltage
can be
control voltage tested from test point TP68 in the data
concluded)
board goes beyond normal range. Normally, the
voltages of TP68 of all counting channels are: CBC
channel: lower than 0.3V; CBC+DIFF channel:
1.05~1.35V; CBC+NRBC channel: 0.84~1.14V;
CBC+RET channel: 1.44~1.74V (the optical shielding
box does not need to be open).
c. The voltage of test point TP10 (PMT_PWR) is

outside the range 11.4V~12.6V (taking voltage of the
analog ground as reference), but the voltage of test
point TP1 (AVCC) is within the range (taking voltage of
d. The voltage of test point TP1 (AVCC) is outside the

is within the range (taking voltage of the analog
ground as reference).
e. The voltage of test point TP2 (AVSS) is outside the

is within the range (taking voltage of the analog
ground as reference).
f. The voltage of test point TP8(VDD) is outside the

range 3.135 ~3.465V (taking voltage of the digital
ground J3.4 as reference), but the voltage of interface
J3.2 is within the range (taking voltage of the digital
ground J3.4 as reference).
g. The voltage of test point TP3(PMTVREF) (taking

voltage of the analog ground as reference) deviates
largely from 1V.
2 Power-failure a. When the error occurs, power off the analyzer, Board error,
occurs to the disassemble the SF preamplification boards and then short circuit
analyzer restart the analyzer, the error is removed. of 12V
immediately power
after it is
electrified.
3 Change PMT a. When analysis is running, change the counting Board error
gain, the channel (BASO, DIFF, NRBC or RET), the PMT high
scattergram voltage control voltage tested from TP68 in the data
location does board does not change. (the optical shielding box
7-53
not change does not need to be open)
accordingly.
7.11 Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board
7.11.1 Overview
Pneumatic pressure detection board detects pressure of 6 gas circuits. The pneumatic
pressure detection board obtains power supply through the drive control board, its output
signals are transferred to the drive control board through the motherboard.
Figure 7-3 Connection Diagram of Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board
In the figure above, is power supply signal of the board; is pressure output signal
transferred from the 6 circuits of pressure; is input channel of the 6 circuits of pressure,
connected to pressure sensor through tubes.
7.11.2 Structure
Figure 7-4 Layout of Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board
7-54
There are 6 pressure sensors on the pneumatic pressure detection board, which are U1~U6.
The measuring range of U1 is 0~1000KPa; U2 ~U4 are of the same model, their measuring
range is 0~200KPa; U5 ~ U6 are of the same model, their measuring range is 0~-100KPa.

Table 7-29 Test Point Definition of Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board
Test point Description

TP1 Sensor output of pressure detection channel 1
TP11 Analog 5V voltage input
TP12 Analog ground
TP13 Digital 3.3V voltage input
TP14 Digital ground
Table 7-30 Indicator Definitions of Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board

Generally this LED is on. If it is off, that means the analog
5V power supply of the pneumatic pressure detection
Indicator of analog 5V board is abnormal, you should check if the connection
D1 power supply wire between the pneumatic pressure detection board
and the motherboard is firmly plugged, or check if the
analog 5V voltage of the drive control board is normal.
Generally this LED is on. If it is off, that means the digital

3.3V power supply of the pneumatic pressure detection
Indicator of digital 3.3V board is abnormal, you should check if the connection
D2 power supply wire between the pneumatic pressure detection board
and the motherboard is firmly plugged, or check if the
digital 3.3V voltage of the drive control board is normal.
When error occurs to the pneumatic pressure detection board, the pressure of the analyzer will
be abnormal and alarm will be triggered. When abnormal pressure is reported, troubleshoot
the error per the following procedure.
7-55
Figure 7-29 Servicing Procedure of Pressure Error
The major cause of pneumatic pressure detection board errors is pressure sensor failure,
which is caused by impurities and fluid inside the sensor. The error cannot be removed by
wiping away the impurities or fluid, you need to replace the sensor. Please note that when
replacing the sensor, temperature of the iron used cannot exceed 350, or else
performance of the sensor will be compromised.
7.12 Heating Control Board
7.12.1 Overview
Heating control board drives heaters of 5 channels, which are the reaction bath, sheath
fluid bath, preheating bath, optical system and flow cell. The heating control board obtains
AC 24V heating power from the transformer, and 5 channels of control signals from the
drive control board.
7-56
Figure 7-30 Connection Diagram of Heating Control Board
In the figure above, is the AC 24V power supplied to the heating control board by the
transformer; is the 5 channels of heating control signal outputted by the drive control
board; is the 5 heating modules connected to the heating control board.
7.12.2 Structure
Figure 7-31 Layout of Heating Control Board
There are 5 relays on the heating control board, among which U1~U3 and U5 are of the
7-57
same model.

The 5 indicators in the heating control board indicate the heating status of a particular
channel, their definitions are listed in the following table:
Table 7-31 Indicator Definitions of Heating Control Board

When the reaction bath module is under
D11 heating status, the indicator is on or flickering;
reaction bath
otherwise, the indicator is off.
When the sheath fluid bath module is under

sheath fluid bath
When the preheating bath module is under

preheating bath
When the flow cell module is under heating

Heating indicator of flow
D14 status, the indicator is on or flickering;
cell
When the optical system module is under

Heating indicator of the
optical system
The heating control board has 5 heating channels, each heating channel loop has two
protective tubes as listed in the following table.
Table 7-32 Description of Heating Channel Protective Tubes
Heating channel Description of protective tubes

Reaction bath F1, F7
Sheath fluid bath F2, F8
Preheating bath F3, F9
Flow cell F4, F10
Optical system F5, F11
Error of the heating control board will result in heating failure of modules in the analyzer.
When temperatures of the modules get lower than the alarming range, alarms will
triggered. Follow the procedure below to troubleshoot error of the heating control board.
7-58
Figure 7-32 Servicing Procedure of Heating Failure
There are several causes of failure of the heating control board, you can service the
analyzer per the following measures.
1 Protective tube burnt out. Protective tube is installed in each heating channel of the
heating control board, burnt-out of protective tube is a major failure mode of the board.
You can test the two ends of the protective tube to see if short circuit occurred (normally,
the two ends of the protective tube form a short circuit). If the protective tube is
open-circuited, replace the tube.
2 Control circuit damage (including component damage, falling, dry joint, etc.) Replacing
the control circuit can solve the problem.
Table7-33 Servicing the Control Circuit of Heating Control Board
No. Heating channel Control circuit servicing measures
1 Reaction bath Replace R1, Q1 and R11
2 Sheath fluid bath Replace R2, Q2 and R12
3 Preheating bath Replace R3, Q3 and R13
4 Flow cell Replace R4, Q4 and R14
5 Optical system Replace R5, Q5 and R6
3 Relay damage. If cause 1 and 2 are excluded, then the failure must be cause by relay
damage, you should replace relay of the corresponding channel.
7-59
7.13 Diluent Heating Board
7.13.1 Overview
Diluent temperature control module heats the diluent of low temperature (5~15) in the diluent
container to the required working temperature (15~30) before the diluent is sent to the
reaction sites, including RBC bath, HGB bath, SRV and all tubing. The temperature sensor in
this module detects the actual diluent temperature, and the heating rod heats diluent to the
target temperature.
7.13.2 Functions
The diluent temperature control module consists of the drive and detection circuit of
heat engineering components and the standby circuit of communication interfaces. See
Figure 7-33. The module diagram shows the major functions of the module and its
connection with other components.
Figure 7-33 Diagram of the Diluent Temperature Control Module
There is a MCU controller in the diluent heating board. The controller controls the temperature
detection of the temperature sensor and the heating drive of the heating rod, and it reports
diluent temperature when necessary. The details are:
Temperature detection: the temperature sensor in the diluent preheating bath;
Heating drive: the heating rod in the diluent preheating bath;
1 temperature protection switch: the temperature protection switch in the diluent preheating
bath;
1 communication serial port: reporting the temperature of the diluent preheating bath, and
assigning the temperature calibrating value of the diluent preheating assembly.
7.13.3 Structure
The PCBA layout of the diluent preheating board:
7-60
Figure 7-34 PCBA layout of the diluent heating board
Figure 7-35 Location of interfaces
7.13.4 Test point

There are 2 high-precision resistors in the temperature detection circuit; so the MCU will
calibrate the temperature automatically after being powered on, no adjustment is needed.
Table 7-34 Function description of the test points
Test point Tested signal Function

TP1 M_RXD1 Receiving UART1 for the MCU
TP9 M_TXD1 Sending UART1 for the MCU
M_4581_SEL_C Channel selecting signal C of the
TP2
analog selector
M_4581_SEL_B Channel selecting signal B of the
TP3
analog selector
M_4581_SEL_A Channel selecting signal A of the
TP4
analog selector
TP5 GND1 GND
TP6 GND3 GND
TP7 RST Reset output point of the reset chip
TP8 HT1_LED Indicator of heating channel 1
7-61
VREF 2.5V reference output point of the
TP12
reference voltage chip
TP13 GND5 GND
COM COM point of the temperature
TP14
detection circuit
TP15 TEMP_AD Meter amplifier output
TP16 GND0 GND
TP17 P24V P24V
TP18 PGND PGND
TP19 VCC VCC
TP20 VDD VDD
TP21 M_RXD0 Receiving UART0 for the MCU
TP34 M_TXD0 Sending UART1 for the MCU
TP22 GND GND
TP25 XTAL1 11.05920M transistor end 1
TP26 XTAL2 11.05920M transistor end 2
TP27 GND4 GND
TP28 HT1 Output heating signal 1 of the MCU
TP31 GND6 GND
TP32 DAOUT0 DAC output 0
TP33 DAOUT1 DAC output 1
ISPEN_PC_TO_DIL ISP download signal ISP enable
TP35
signal
TP36 RESET_PC_TO_DIL ISP download signal reset
UART0_DIL_TO_PC ISP download signal UART0
TP37
sending
UART1_PC_TO_DIL ISP download signal UART0
TP38
receiving
Power supply
The on/off status of the indicator indicates the power supply status.
D5 is the power indicator of P24V
D6 is the power indicator of D5V
D4 is the power indicator of D3.3V
The red frame indicates the power circuit, and the same frame is printed on the board.
7-62
Figure 7-36 Power supply
MCU
D10 is the running indicator of MCU, it flickers when the MCU is working normally.
If you suspect that the MCU is not working properly, check as per the following instruction:
1.check if the running indicator is normal(the blue circle in the figure below);
2.check if the input power is normal;
3.check if the reset chip is normal (the purple circle in the figure below);
4.check if the transistor is normal (the red circle in the figure below).
5.If no problem is found, re-program the MCU.
Figure 7-37 MCU
Temperature detection
Check the circuit in the blue square in the following figure if temperature detection error occurs.
7-63
Figure 7-38 Temperature detection
Heating drive
Check the circuits in the blue square in the following figure if heating drive error occurs.
Figure 7-39 Heating drive
7.14 Valve Drive Board
7.14.1 Overview
Valve drive board controls valves in the analyzer. The 12V power that drives the board is
supplied by the mother board, and the control signal is supplied by the drive control board.
There are two valve control boards in the analyzer, one is under the motherboard (valve
drive board A), the other one is under the pneumatic pressure detection board by the left
door of the analyzer (valve drive board B). The two valve drive boards are the same (only
different in location), so they are interchangeable during servicing process.
7-64
Figure 7-40 Connection Diagram of Valve Drive Board
In the figure above, and are the control signals outputted by the drive control board;
is the 12V power supply of the valve drive board; is the valves connected to the
valve drive board.
7.14.2 Structure
Table 7-41 Layout of Valve Drive Board
The squares in the figure above are indicators of the valve drive board.

There are 68 indicators on the valve drive board, some of which are reserved.
Table 7-35 Indicator Definition of Valve Drive Board (A)

D50 Indicator of digital 5V power Normally this LED is on; if it is off, you need to check
7-65
if the valve control wire is firmly connected, and if the
5V power output is normal.
Normally this LED is on; if it is off, you need to check

Power supply indicator of
D51 if the valve control wire is firmly connected, and if the
12V power
Indicator of valve This LED is green, it is on when wires are correctly

D52 connection status connected.
Indicator of valve This LED is red, it is on when wires are incorrectly



This LED is on when the valve is not electrified, and it

D101 Valve 74 working indicator
is off when the valve is electrified.






D108 Reserved This LED is always off.





D114 Valve 12 working indicator This LED is on when the valve is not electrified, and it
7-66



















7-67
















D154 Valve 52 working indicator This LED is on when the valve is not electrified, and it
7-68






Table 7-36 Indicator Definition of Valve Drive Board (B)

Normally this LED is on; if it is off, you need to check if
D50 Indicator of digital 5V power the valve control wire is firmly connected, and if the
Normally this LED is on; if it is off, you need to check if

Power supply indicator of
D51 the valve control wire is firmly connected, and if the
12V power




7-69











7-70


















7-71







When error occurs to the valve drive board, the valves of the analyzer cannot open and
close as expected. Valve drive board error can be caused by multiple reasons, such as
valve drive circuit damage, valve damage, connection wire breakage or unstable
connection, etc. When the valve fails to operate, do as per the following procedure.
7-72
Nonoperatio
n of valves
Do all valves fail to N

operate?
Y Do all valves
connected to a N
1 Test the voltage of 12V valve drive board
power with a multimeter to fail to operate? 1 Check if the valve
see if it is normal; connection wire is firmly
2 Check if the drive control Y connected, and if any pin
board works normally; of a interface falls off;
3 Check if the 12V power 1 Check of the 12V power 2 Check if error occurs to
supply wire and the control supply wire and the control the valve drive circuit
wire of the drive control wire of the valve drive through the analyzer
board are loose; board are loose; screen;
4 If all the causes above 2 If cause 1 can be 3 If the valve drive circuit is
can be excluded, replace excluded, replace the damaged, replace the
the valve drive board. valve drive board. board; or else replace the
valve.
Record error information

and servicing log, and
return the damaged
component.
End
Figure 7-42 Servicing Procedure of Valve Failure
During the servicing process, you should note:
1. When checking connection status of the valve, be sure to check if the pins if interface
J1~J3 are bent, especially the pins by the sides of the interfaces (this is generally
overlooked).
2. There are two red indicators on the valve drive board, when the wires of the same
board are incorrectly connected, the red indicator will turn on. When you find the red LEDs
are on, check if the connection wires are correctly connected.
3. You can check if there are errors in the valve drive circuit from the analyzer screen.
Click the system menu"Maintenance""Debug""Valve Confirmation", then click on
the valve No. (shut down the pneumatic unit first from the analyzer screen) and check the
status of the corresponding indicator on the valve drive board. Generally, then clicking on
a valve No., the corresponding indicator will turn off for 1s and then turn on. If the indicator
is always off, that means the valve drive circuit is damaged or the connection wires are not
correctly connected; if the indicator is always on, that means the valve drive circuit is
damaged.
7-73
7.15 Indicator Board
7.15.1 Overview
The indicator board shows the working status of the analyzer and controls the starting up of the
analyzer by the soft power switch.
7.15.2 Functions
Showing working status of the analyzer
The indicator board shows the working status of the analyzer with a two-tone indicator
(yellow/green) and a buzzer. The indicator is yellow when the analyzer is in standby status,
and it is green when the analyzer works normally; when error occurs to the analyzer, the
indicator flickers in green with a frequency of 1Hz. The analyzer works normally, the buzzer
does not make any sound; when error occurs to the analyzer, the buzzer beeps.
Startup function of the soft power switch

Startup: when the power cord of the analyzer is connected, and the power switch is on, the
system is in standby status (the indicator is yellow). Press the soft power switch on the
indicator board, the power system turns on, and the analyzer starts to work with the indicator
turns green.
7.15.3 Structure
See the following figure for the indicator board mounting diagram.
Figure 7-43 Mounting diagram of indicator board
Error: when the analyzer is in standby status or working, the indicator is off.
Possible cause: the connection line and socket of the indicator board are not well connected;
the indicator is damaged.
Troubleshooting procedure:
Check if the connection line and socket of the indicator board are not well connected, if not,
reconnect the line.
Power on the analyzer and see if the indicator is on, if not, replace the indicator board.
7-74
7.16 Touchscreen Control Board
7.16.1 Overview
The touchscreen control board receives touch information and transmits the signals to the
main control board through serial ports.
7.16.2 Functions
The touchscreen control board is connected with the touchscreen through J4, it provides
voltage to the electrodes of the touchscreen and receives touch information; the board is also
connected with the main control board through J5, and it sends touch information to the main
control board through the serial port RS232.
7.16.3 Structure
See Figure 7-44 for the mounting diagram of the touchscreen control board
Figure 7-44 Mounting diagram of the touchscreen control board
7-75
Table 7-37 Debug and test points of the touchscreen control board
Test point Tested signal Functions
TP1 GND Digital ground
TOUCH_DIN Sample aspiration input data of

TP2
touchscreen controller
TP3 TOUCH_NPENIRQ Touch detection interrupt signal
TP4 LR X+ electrode
WIPER Contact voltage of 5-line

TP5
touchscreen
Table 7-38 Troubleshooting the touchscreen control board
Error Consequence Possible Cause Solution
The touchscreen does Touchscreen control board Reconnect the connecting

not respond to touch failure/ touchscreen failure/ lines/ replace the touchscreen
loose connection control board or the
touchscreen
When pressing the The connecting lines of the Reconnect the lines/ check is
touchscreen, the cursor touchscreen control board and there are cracks on the
can only move the touchscreen get loose/ the touchscreen; if yes, replace it
horizontally or vertically touchscreen is broken
The cursor fails to move The touchscreen is not Re-calibrate the touchscreen/
to the desired location calibrated/ the touchscreen is check is there are cracks on
broken the touchscreen; if yes, replace
it
7.17 Prefix List of Board Interfaces

Table 7-39 Prefix List of Board Sockets
Quantity Socket
Board name Marking mode
prefix
Data and COME Carrier Board 1 B-J1
B
Drive Control Board 1 C-J1
C
7-76
Motherboard 1 D-J1
D
Heating Control Board 1 E-J1
E
Laser Drive Board 1 F-J1
F
FS Scatter Preamplification Board 1 G-J1
G
SS Scatter Preamplification Board 1 H-J1
H
Fluorescence Preamplification 1
Board I-J1
I
Valve Drive Board 2 JA\JB-J1
JA\JB
Fluid Level Detection Board 1 K-J1
K
Power Board 1 L-J1
L
Indicator Board 1 M-J1.
M
Touchscreen Control Board 1 N-J1.
N
Pneumatic pressure detection 1
board P-J1.
P
Inverter 1 Q-J1.
Q
Input Voltage Patching Board 1 S-J1.
S
Diluent Temperature Control Board 1 T-J1.
T
Network Interface Board 1 /
/
7.18 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches

Table 7-40 Connection of Lines of the Autoloader
Line Marker Connected to

M2-UNLOAD Unload motor
M3-FEED Latitudinal feeding motor
M4-LOAD Longitudinal feeding motor
SE2-XR_S Unload module start position photocoupler
SE3-Y_S Latitudinal feeding module start position photocoupler
SE4-Y_E Latitudinal feeding module stop position photocoupler
SE5-XL_S Longitudinal feeding module start position photocoupler
SE6-XL_E Longitudinal feeding module stop position photocoupler
SE7-YCOUNT_S Latitudinal feeding counter start position photocoupler
SE8-YCOUNT_E Latitudinal feeding counter stop position photocoupler
SE-29-XR_E Unloading Tray Full Detection photocoupler
7-77
SW0-LOAD_E Tube rack longitudinal loading detection micro-switch
Table 7-41 Connection of Lines of the Mix&Pierce Module

M5-ASR Mix motor
M6-SCAN Rotary scanning motor
SE11-PUNCT Piercing position detection photocoupler
SE12-SMUX_S Pincher extension start position photocoupler
SE13-SMUX_E Pincher extension stop position photocoupler
SE14-SMUZ-D Pincher extension start position photocoupler
SE15-SMUZ-U Pincher elevation start position photocoupler
SE16-ASR_S Pincher rotation start position photocoupler
SE17-ASR_E Pincher rotation stop position photocoupler
SE17-SCAN_S Rotary scanning module detection photocoupler
SE28-TUBE Tube detection photocoupler
Table7-42Connection of Lines of Other Motors and Photocouplers

M0-CLEAN Probe wipe motor
M1-MIX Stirring motor
M7-WBC WBC syringe motor
M8-SWB Whole blood intaking motor
M9-RBC RBC syringe motor
SE0-CLEAN Probe wipe assembly photocoupler
SE1-MIX Stirring assembly photocoupler
SE20-WBC WBC syringe assembly photocoupler
SE21-SWB Whole blood intaking assembly photocoupler
SE22-RBC RBC syringe assembly photocoupler
SE23-DOOR Front cover open detection photocoupler
Table 7-43 Connection of Lines of Temperature Sensor and Aspirate Key

ASP_SW Open vial aspirate key switch
7-78
T1-ACT Bath assembly temperature sensor
T2-FCM Sheath fluid bath assembly temperature sensor
T4-PRE Preheating bath assembly temperature sensor
T5-CELL Flow cell assembly temperature sensor
T6-ENVI Ambient temperature sensor
Table 7-44 Connections of the heating connecting lines

TS1-ACT Bath assembly temperature switch
HT1-ACT Heating membrane of reaction bath assembly
TS2-FCM Sheath fluid bath assembly temperature switch
HT2-FCM Heating membrane of sheath fluid bath assembly
TS3-PRE Preheating bath assembly temperature switch
HT3-PRE Heating membrane of preheating bath assembly
HT4-CELL Heating membrane of flow cell assembly
OPTI-Heat Heating membrane of the optical system
OPTI-T-SW Optical system temperature switch
CELL-T-SW Flow cell temperature switch
Table 7-45 Connections of the float connecting lines

F1-WC1 WC1 waste cistern float switch
F2-DIL DIL cistern float switch
F3-FCM FCM cistern float switch
F4-WC2 WC2 waste cistern float switch
F5-SCI SCI cistern float switch
Waste container float switch (connected to the

F6-WASTE
BNC extension line if the back panel)
7-79
8 Mechanical System
8.1 Analyzer Structure
The instrument consists of the analyzer (with autoloader), pneumatic unit and the PC, and is
connected with 2 types of Diluents, 4 types of Lyses and 3 types of Dyes.
8.2 Appearance
The front of the analyzer is shown Figure 8-1 as follows.
Figure 8-1 Front of the Analyzer
No.- Name No.- Name

1 Touch screen 5 Tube
2 Indicator 6 Tube rack
3 Sample probe 7 Autoloader
4 Aspirate key 8 Reagent compartment cover
8-1
The touchscreen and power indicator are on the front of the analyzer. The sample probe and
aspirate key are on the right of the front. The reagent compartment cover is on the left of the
front, you can open the cover and change the reagents. The autoloader is in front of the
analyzer.
The back of the analyzer is shown Figure 8-2 as follows.
Figure 8-2 Back of the Analyzer
No.- Name No.- Name

1 AC input 8 Diluent inlet
2 Pneumatic unit control interface 9 Pressure interface
3 Network interface 10 Vacuum interface
4 Waste sensor connector 11 HGB lyse inlet
5 Waste outlet 12 DIFF lyse inlet
6 RET diluent inlet 13 NRBC lyse inlet
7 BASO lyse inlet
The back of the analyzer mainly consists of the AC input, network interface, pneumatic unit
control interface, lyse inlets, waste outlet and waste sensor connector, pressure interface and
vacuum interface.
Power switch and pressure/vacuum regulators are on the left of the analyzer; there are 4 USB
interfaces on the right.
8-2
8.3 Layout Introduction
Components of the front cover are shown as Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 Front of the analyzer (front cover open)
No. Name No. Name
1 Cover and touchscreen module 6 Mix&pierce module
2 Cover stop bar 7 Fluorescent reagent package
3 Reaction bath and pinch valve 8 Fluorescent diaphragm pump module

module
4 Manual sampling module 9 RBC module
5 HGB module
8-3
The manual sampling module and HGB module are on the right front of the analyzer. The
Mix&pierce module and reaction bath module are in the middle while the RBC module and
fluorescent diaphragm pump module are on the left.
Components on the right side of the analyzer (right door open)is shown Figure 8-4 as follows.
Figure 8-4 Right side of the analyzer (right door open)
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Optical system 5 USB interfaces
2 Sheath fluid valve module 6 Reagent preheating module
3 Right rotary bearer module 7 Sheath fluid preheating module
4 Fluidic valve module
The fluidic and optical system are on the right side of the analyzer, which include the valve
module, heating module, cisterns, waste cistern and so on.
Components on the left side of the analyzer is shown Figure 8-5 as follows.
8-4
Figure 8-5 Left side of the analyzer (left door open, air valves presented)
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Boards integrating module 6 Power module
2 Left rotary bearer module 7 Power switch
3 Drying and filter module
The left side of the analyzer mainly consists of the electronic components, which includes the
pressure/vacuum modules, power module, boards and so on.
8-5
9 Replacing the FRU
9.1 Overview
This chapter introduces how to replace the FRU unit and the related FRU codes. The general
requirements of servicing include:
Be sure to power off the analyzer before servicing it, and take proper antistatic measures.
When servicing the fluidics system, pay attention to the liquid in the tubing; the pneumatic
unit must be turned off when servicing tubes with pressure; and tissues must be used as
protection.
After finishing servicing, restart the analyzer to perform startup initialization. Make sure the
analyzer is in normal status and run several fresh blood samples to verify the analyzer status.
For major servicing actions involving the performance or parameters of the analyzer, be sure
to perform gain calibration or re-calibration after servicing. For example, after servicing the
optical system, the optical gain must be re-calibrated. Re-calibration shall be performed too
after servicing data board and the aperture.
9.2 Removal and Installation of the Board
9.2.1 Open the Left Door

Purpose
Open the left door of the analyzer, check or perform troubleshooting of the
pressure/vacuum modules and electrical system of the analyzer.
Tools
107 cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
z Remove the 3 M4X8 screws at the back of the left door (as Figure 9-1 shows).
z Pull back the left door a little, after the slot of the left door is disconnected with the
front board and the bottom plate completely, remove the left door.
9-1
Figure 9-1 Removal of the left door
No. Name No. Name
1 Bottom plate 3 M4X8 screws
2 Left door 4 Back panel
9.2.2 Open the Gas Valve Assembly

Purpose
Open the gas valve assembly, and then check or perform troubleshooting of the inner
part of the analyzer.
Tools
Procedure
1) Open the left door of the analyzer, see Section 8.2.1 for details.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fixing the gas valve assembly with the front cover with
cross-head screwdriver.
9-2
3) Lift the whole gas valve assembly up 1-2mm to disconnect it from the buckle (as Figure
Figure 9-2 shows), and then revolve outward around the hinge and open the valve
assembly (as Figure Figure 9-3 shows).
Figure 9-2 Position of the buckle
Figure 9-3 the opened gas valve assembly
No. Name No. Name
1 M4X8 screws 3 Power supply assembly
2 Gas valve assembly
9.2.3 Open the Right Door

Open the right door with the same procedures as opening the left door.
9-3
9.2.4 Open the Bath Integrating Assembly
Purpose
Open the bath integrating assembly, and then check the fluidics status or perform
troubleshooting.
Tools
Procedure
1) Open the right door of the analyzer, see Section 8.2.3 for details.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fixing the bath integrating assembly and the front cover
with cross-head screwdriver.
3) Lift the whole bath integrating assembly up 1-2mm to disconnect it from the buckle, and
then revolve outward around the hinge and open the bath integrating assembly (as Figure
9-4 shows).
Figure 9-4 The opened bath integrating assembly
No. Name No. Name
1 Bath integrating assembly 2 M4X8 screws
9-4
9.2.5 Open the Front Cover
Purpose
Open the front cover, check the assembly on the front cover of the analyzer or
perform troubleshooting; meanwhile the touch screen can be left aside individually to
perform troubleshooting.
Tools
Procedure
1) Uplift the assembly on the front cover, revolve the stop bar that support the assembly on
the front cover, the head of the stop bar shall fit into corresponding slot of the front
cover.(as Figure 9-5 shows).
2) If you need to watch the screen after the front cover is lifted, just loosen the 2 screws that
fix the touch screen assembly without removal, then convolve and lay the touch screen
assembly back on the front cover (as Figure 9-6 shows).
Figure 9-5 open the front cover

9-5
No. Name No. Name
1 Front cover 3 Stop bar
2 Touch screen assembly 4
Figure 9-6 the opened touch screen
9.2.6 Open the Top Cover

Purpose
Open the top cover, check the status or perform troubleshooting of the circuit board,
optical system and connectors of the analyzer.
Tools
Procedure
1 Open the front cover assembly, and then fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
9-6
2 Remove the 3 M4X8 screws that respectively fix the top cover with the front board
and the back board, pull back the top cover a little and then remove the top cover (as
Figure 9-7 shows).
Figure 9-7 Removal of the top cover
No. Name No. Name
1 Top cover 4 Front cover
2 M4X8 screws 5 Front board
3 Back panel
9.2.7 Open the Left Lower Cover

Purpose
Open the left lower part of the cover, check the status and perform troubleshooting of
the RBC fluidic valve assembly and RBC syringe assembly.
Tools
9-7
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly, and then fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fix the protective cover with the left and right lower cover
with cross-head screwdriver, and then remove the protective cover (as Figure 9-8 shows).
3) Open the left door of the analyzer.
4) Loosen the 2 M4X12 stainless-steel sunk screws that fix the left lower cover and the left
of the front cover, uplift the left lower cover a little, when the bottom of the cover is
disconnected with the slot of the bottom plate, pull the left lower cover leftward (as Figure
9-9 shows).
Figure 9-8 Removal of the protective cover
No. Name No. Name
1 Right lower cover 4 Cover of the autoloader
2 M4X8 screws 5 Left lower cover
3 Protective cover
9-8
Figure 9-9 Removal of the left lower cover
No. Name No. Name
1 Bottom plate 3 Left lower cover
2 M4X12 stainless-steel sunk screws 4 M4X8 screws
9.2.8 Open the Right Lower Cover

Purpose
Open right lower cover; perform troubleshooting of the Start switch or SRV.
Tools
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly; and then fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2) Loosen the M4X8 screws that fix the protective cover with the left lower and right lower of
the cover, and then remove the protective cover.
3) Take out the waste collecting tray and put it aside.
4) Loosen the 3 M4X8 screws that fix the bottom of the autoloader with the stop bar, and
then pull the autoloader outward a little. (Note: Do not damage the cables and lines on the
left of the autoloader.)
5) Remove the right door and remove the 2 stainless-steel sunk screws that fix the right
lower cover and the right side of the front cover, and also remove the M3X8 screw that
9-9
fixes the top left of the right lower cover and the front cover (as Figure 9-10 shows).
6) Move the right lower cover ahead a little to disconnect it with the aspirate key, and then
remove the cover rightward (as Figure 9-11 shows).
Figure 9-10 Removal of the autoloader
No. Name No. Name
1 Right lower cover 3 Autoloader
2 Waste collecting tray 4 M4X8 screws
Figure 9-11 Removal of the right lower cover

9-10
No. Name No. Name
1 M4X12 stainless-steel sunk screws 3 Open vial aspirate key
2 Right lower cover 4 M3X8 screws
9.3 Sheath Fluid Impedance Bath

Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, socket screwdriver, nipper pliers, and tweezers.
Procedure
1) Take off the fluorescent reagent detecting assembly and the reagent pack first, and
then take off the outer shielding cover of the sheath fluid impedance bath. Be careful
of the fluorescent reagent.
2) Take off the inner shielding cover of the bath.
3) Remove the tubes connected to the bath. Be sure to discharge fluid in the ISU cistern
before removing the tubes.
4) Loose the screws fixing the impedance bath to the shielding box with the cross-head
screwdriver, take off the bath. shows. (before replace the bath, you must take off the
connection line of the bath and the data board)
5) Install a new sheath fluid impedance bath.
6) If you need to replace the ISU cistern, remove the screws fixing the bath and then
take off the tubes.
Figure 9-12 Replacing the sheath fluid impedance bath

9-11
No. Name FRU code No. Name FRU code
1 Sheath fluid 801-3201-00029-00 4 Aperture 045-000023-00

impedance bath
2 ISU cistern 801-3201-00027-00 5 Steel tube 801-3201-00026-00

with copper
seat
3 ISW cistern 801-3201-00027-00
No. Name FRU code Remarks
1 Sheath fluid impedance bath 801-3201-00028-00 without aperture

(without aperture)
2 Sheath fluid impedance 801-3201-00025-00 includes the bottom plate,

shielding box assembly bath and the shielding box
3 Shielding box cover 042-001676-00 Inner shielding box cover
4 Outer shielding box cover 042-001677-00 Outer shielding box cover
Confirmation
1) Prime the ISU cistern and RBC bath to make sure all tubes connected to the sheath
fluid impedance bath are filled with diluent and the fluidics system is in normal status.
2) Perform background aging for 5 or more times, and the analyzer reports no error.
3) Then you can re-install the shielding cover of the sheath fluid impedance bath.
9.4 Aperture
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, socket screwdriver, nipper pliers, and tweezers.
Procedure
1) Remove the impedance bath assembly.
2) Loose the screws that fix the bath with a socket screwdriver, take off the protective
pad of the aperture, then remove the aperture as below.
3) Be sure to install the aperture in the right direction, the concave of the aperture must
be facing the sample probe. There is one protective pad by the two sides of the
aperture, as below.
9-12
Figure 9-13 Replacing the aperture
1 Aperture 045-000023-00 3 Protective 801-3110-00076-00

pad of the
front bath
2 Fluoro rubber 801-3110-00077-00

pad
Figure 9-14 Installing direction of the aperture
Confirmation
1) The aperture must be installed in the right direction.
2) Prime the ISU cistern and RBC bath to make sure all tubes connected to the sheath
fluid impedance bath are filled with diluent and the fluidics system is in normal status.
3) Perform background aging for 5 or more times, and the analyzer reports no error.
4) Then you can re-install the shielding cover of the sheath fluid impedance bath.
5) After replacing the aperture, you must re-calibrate the MCV gain, and then re-adjust
9-13
the MCV calibration factor. The gain calibration procedure is as follows:
MCV gain calibration procedure
1. Select OV-WB-CBC mode.
2. Mix the calibrator and present it the sample probe for analysis.
3. After the analysis finishes, calculate the deviation of the MCV result and the
target. The deviation must be smaller than 1%, if not, re-adjust the MCV gain.
4. Tap "Setup" - "Gain Setup" to enter the screen and record the current MCV gain.
5. Before the step above, you must log in the system with service password and
enter the "Calibration" - "Manual Calibration" screen, modify the calibration factor
of MCV and the manufacturer's calibration factor to 100, see Figure 9-15. Note:
this step must be done at first, and after recalibrating the gain, MCV
calibration factor must be re-adjusted.
Figure 9-16 Manual calibration screen
6. Tap "Calibration" - "CBC Gain Calibration" to enter the screen shown in Figure
9-17.
9-14
Figure 9-17 CBC gain calibration
7. Enter the MCV target into the MCV reference value cell at the CBC gain
calibration screen, see Figure 9-18.
MCV target
Figure 9-18 Enter MCV target
8. Run analysis of well mixed calibrator for 3 or more consecutive times until the
results are OK.
9. Tap "OK" at the pop-up dialog box to save the gain when exiting the screen.
10. Go back to the "Setup" - "Gain Setup" screen to confirm is the gain is refreshed.
See Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 MCV gain
11. Go to the analysis screen, run calibrator once under OV mode, check if the MCV
result is close to the target. The deviation must be smaller than 1%, if so, the gain
calibration is done. Then you must verify the calibration factor of MCV again.
9-15
9.5 HGB Bath Assembly
Tools
Procedure
Note: Make sure no liquid is spilled to the light-emitting diode, dash receiver or socket to
avoid damage.
1) Open the top cover of the analyzer.
2) Remove the sealing box of the HGB bath assembly at the upper right part of the front
cover with a cross-head screwdriver.
3) Drain the HGB bath.
4) Take off the lines and tubes connected to the HGB bath.
5) Loose the screws that fix the HGB bath to the front cover and replace the entire HGB
bath assembly.
6) Then connect the lines (to the data board) and tubes.
Figure 9-20 Replacing the HGB bath assembly
1 HGB Bath 801-3201-00030-00 2 Sealing box 042-001508-00

Assembly
Confirmation
1) Install the sealing box of the HGB bath.
2) Prime the HGB bath.
3) Perform background aging count 3-5 times.
4) Re-adjust the HGB background voltage to 4.5V (with service access level).
9-16
9.6 RBC Bath Assembly
Tools
Procedure
2) Loose the screws that fix the RBC bath with the cross-head screwdriver.
3) Disconnect the tubes connected to the RBC bath.
4) Replace the RBC bath assembly and re-connect the tubes.
Figure 9-21 Replacing the RBC bath
1 RBC Bath
801-3201-00033-00
Assembly
Confirmation
1) Perform RBC bath priming after starting up the analyzer.
2) Run analysis several times to make sure the RBC channel works properly.
9.7 SRV Assembly

Tools
M1.3-5mm inner hexagon spanner, cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
1) Power off the analyzer, open the front cover assembly and fix it.
2) Put some tissue under the SRV, as when replacing the SRV, a bit of diluent may flow
out.
3) Remove the two blood sensor photocouplers by the left of the SRV with the 2.5mm
9-17
inner hexagon spanner; make sure no liquid is spilled to the sensor to avoid damage,
as Figure 9-22 shows.
4) Cut off the plastic cable ties that fix the SRV tubes with cutting pliers, take out the
waste tray and remove the tubes connected to the SRV.
Figure 9-22 Removing the blood sensor
1 Photocoupler 011-000041-00 2 Inner hexagon /

screws
5) Loose the 4 M3x12 inner hexagon screws that fix the bearer of the probe wipe with
the2.5mm inner hexagon spanner, take off the tightening block, bearer of the probe
wipe and the probe wipe itself, and then remove all tubes connected to the SRV
assembly.
6) Loose the 4 M3x8 inner hexagon screws that fix the SRV assembly with the 2.5mm
inner hexagon spanner, and take them off, then remove the SRV assembly, as Figure
9-23 shows.
7) Replace the SRV assembly. Make sure the guide rod is in the middle of the locating
stopper. Make sure to align the SRV holes and the probe wipe height gauge.
9-18

Figure 9-23 Removing the SRV assembly
No.- Name FRU code No.- Name FRU code
1 Open vial aspiration / 5 M3x8 inner /

assembly hexagon screw
2 Tightening block / 6 Open vial /

aspiration probe
wipe
3 M3x12 inner / 7 SRV assembly 801-3201-00048-00

hexagon screw
4 Bearer of the probe / 8

Sample probe 801-3201-00073-00
wipe
9-19
Figure 9-24 Structure the SRV assembly
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Tightening screw assembly 3 Middle plate assembly
2 Outer plate assembly 4 Inner plate assembly
Confirmation
1) After installing the SRV assembly, make sure the SRV holes are aligned. Enter the
probe wipe and SRV screen of the maintenance module and tap the up and down
positions of the SRV to make sure if the fixture can go through the outer, middle and
inner plates. If the holes are not aligned, re-align them.
2) Loose the retaining nuts of the upper and lower locating blocks with the inner
hexagon screwdriver. You may only loose one of the two nuts.
3) Tap SRV up position on the debug screen (see Figure9-27), rotate the guide rod
manually so that it is close to the lower locating block, and make sure the SRV fixture
can go through the outer, middle and inner plates. Push the lower locating block to
the guide rod and fix the tightening screws. Likewise, when the SRV is at down
position and the fixture goes through the SRV assembly, push the upper locating
block to the guide rod and fix the tightening screws, as Figure 9-26 shows.
4) And then check if the fixture can go through the SRV assembly completely.
9-20
Figure 9-25 SRV adjusting fixture
Figure 9-26 Adjusting SRV position
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Lower locating block 4 SRV cylinder block adjusting fixture
2 Guide rod 5 Outer plate
3 Upper locating block 6 Cylinder piston rod
9-21
5) Fix the bearer of the probe wipe without fastening it.
6) Tap the "Initialize" button of the Probe Wipe Position Set, and then tap "Start setup",
insert the probe wipe height gauge into the probe wipe from its bottom, when the
fixture contacts the sample probe, fasten the screws of the bearer, as Figure 9-28
shows.
7) Tap "Initialize-Start setup-End setup" to make the probe wipe reciprocate. Make sure
the probe wipe does not get away from the sample probe and the sample probe tip is
aligned with the tube above the probe wipe, and no harsh sound is produced when
the probe wipe is moving.
8) Tap "End setup" to exit from the screen.
Figure9-27 "Debug" screen
9-22
Figure 9-28 Adjusting position of the probe wipe bearer
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Light screen 5 Bearer of the probe wipe
2 M3X12 inner hexagon screws 6 Sample probe
3 Tightening block 7 Open vial aspiration probe wipe
4 Photocoupler 8 Height gauge
9.8 Sample Probe

Tools
Inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
1) Remove the outer plate of the SRV.
2) Loose the 2 M2.5X4 inner hexagon screws that fix the sample probe with the 1.3mm inner
hexagon spanner, and take the screws off, then take off the pad. Screw off the joint
9-23
sleeve, and then pull off the sample probe and sealing tube.
3) Replace the sample probe and install the outer plate back.
Figure 9-29 Replacing the sample probe
1 Sample Probe 801-3201-00073-00 4 Joint sleeve /
2 M2.5X4 inner hexagon / 5 Sealing tube /

screw (TEFLON)
3 Pad / 6 Outer plate /
Confirmation
1) Check if the probe wipe position is proper, if not, reset the position of the probe wipe.
2) Perform aging count several times to restore the status of the SRV tubing.
9.9 Pneumatic Unit

Tools
107 cross-head screwdriver, tweezers and monkey spanner
Procedure
9-24
Note: The pneumatic assembly can be different for different power specification, pay
attention to the power specification when you are applying for servicing spare parts.
1) The pneumatic assembly can be replaced separately.
2) Remove the left and right doors and the top cover of the pneumatic unit with a
cross-headed screwdriver.
3) After removing the shielding cover of the pneumatic control board, the board can be
replaced separately.
4) Remove and replace the filter with the monkey spanner.
5) After removing the pneumatic unit relief valve and unplug the gas pipe, the relief
valve can be replaced.
6) The fuss of the pneumatic unit is in its receptacle. You may open the receptacle with
tweezers and replace the fuss.
The pneumatic unit has 3 types of FRU for its various specifications.
1 Pneumatic 3 Pneumatic
assembly 801-3201-00051-00 unit (220V, 801-3201-00069-00
(220V) outlet)
2 Pneumatic unit
801-3201-00068-00
(110V)
Figure 9-30 Replacing air pump
9-25

Figure 9-31 Replacing fuss of the pneumatic unit
1 Pneumatic 4
THOMAS air
unit control 051-000760-00 801-3100-00238-00
pump (220V)
board
2 Relief valve 5
Fuss of the
of the
801-3100-00027-00 pneumatic unit M07-00067F---
pneumatic
(110V)
unit
3 6 Fuss of the
Filter 801-3110-00217-00 pneumatic unit M07-00046F---
(220V)
Confirmation
1) The pneumatic unit works properly after startup, and its output pressure is normal.
9.10 Barcode Scanner Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1) Remove the lower right cover of the analyzer.
2) Remove the autoloader assembly.
3) Disconnect the lines connected to the barcode scanner assembly.
4) Remove the screws that fix the barcode scanner assembly and replace the
assembly.
9-26

Figure 9-32 Replacing the barcode scanner assembly
1 Barcode scanner 3 Stationary barcode

801-3201-00052-00 023-000032-00
assembly scanner
2 M4 panhead 4
/ Rotary head 043-001082-00
screws
Confirmation
1)You need to confirm if the rotating scanning function is working properly after starting up
the analyzer.
2)The rotary head must be straight aligned with the tube, if not, be sure to adjust the
position when you are fixing the barcode scanner assembly.
9.11 Radiator Fan

Tools
Procedure
1) Screw off the screws that fix the radiator fan assembly to the back panel with the
cross-headed screwdriver.
2) Disconnect the lines connected to the fan, and replace the fan assembly.
3) The dust screen can be taken out from the back panel directly for maintenance or
replacement.
9-27

Figure 9-33 Replacing the radiator fan assembly
1 Radiator fan 3 Dust screen

801-3201-00014-00 048-001670-00
assembly with frame
2 Bearer of the
radiator fan and /
dust screen
Confirmation
1) Connect the lines of the fan.
2) Go to the radiator fan screen of the Debug module; tap the buttons to see if the fan
works properly.
9.12 Power Supply Assembly

Tools
Procedure
Note: Power off the analyzer before replacing the power supply assembly and unplug the
power cord.
1) Open the left door of the analyzer and the gas valve assembly; rotate the gas valve
assembly to a proper position to facilitate servicing of the power supply assembly.
2) Disconnect the lines connecting the power supply assembly to the transformer and
9-28
motherboard.
3) Screw off the 2 screws that fix the binding bearer of the power supply assembly, and
separate the bearer from the assembly to avoid damaging the tubes fixed to the
bearer when removing the power supply assembly.
4) Loose the 2 M4 screws that fix the power supply assembly, move the assembly to the
direction of the front cover so that the screws can go through the hardy holes, and
the clip at the bottom of the assembly gets away from the slot in the bottom plate,
then take the assembly out upwards (as Figure 9-34 shows).
5) Replace the power supply assembly, re-connect all the lines and fix the binding
bearer.
Figure 9-34 Removal of the power supply assembly
1 Binding bearer \ 3 Bottom plate \
2 M4X8 screws \ 4 Power supply 801-3201-00012-00

assembly
Confirmation
1) After replacing the power supply assembly, check if its connection with other parts,
including the transformer and motherboard.
2) Power on the analyzer, check if the startup and initialization process goes right.
3) Enter the "Status" - "Voltage&Current" screen to check if the 24V, 12V and 5V
voltages are in normal range; if yes, the power supply of the analyzer is OK.
4) Or check the power indicators by the side of the power board, if the indicators of
P24V, VCC and VDD are all on, the power supply of the analyzer is OK.
9-29
9.13 Diaphragm pump
Tools
Procedure
Note: There are 12 diaphragm pumps on the analyzer, DP9, DP10 and DP11 are
fluorescent reagent diaphragm pumps, and they form an assembly with the valves. The
other 9 pumps are separate pumps. 4 of these 9 diaphragm pumps (DP1,DP2, DP3, DP8)
are fixed on the fluidic valve assembly on the right side of the analyzer, while the other 4
(DP4, DP5, DP6, DP7) are fixed on the valve assembly on the right of the back panel,
DP12 is fixed on the bath integrating assembly (as Figure 9-35 shows).
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fix the bath integrating assembly and the front cover,
revolve and open the bath integrating assembly.
3) Loosen the 2 panhead screws that fix the diaphragm pump without removal (as
Figure 9-36 shows).
4) Take out the diaphragm pump, use the diagonal pliers or scissors to take out the
cables and lines of the diaphragm pump (as Figure 9-37 shows).
5) Replace it with new diaphragm pump and install it, note that if the head of the tubing
is distorted, the tubing needs to be changed.
9-30
Figure 9-35 Distribution of diaphragm pumps
1 DP12 801-3201-00018-00 6 DP6 801-3100-00059-00
2 DP8 801-3100-00059-00 7 DP3 801-3201-00009-00
3 DP5 801-3100-00059-00 8 DP2 801-3100-00059-00
4 DP4 801-3100-00059-00 9 DP1 801-3100-00057-00
5 DP7 801-3100-00059-00 10
Figure 9-36 Removal of the diaphragm pump
Figure 9-37 Removal of tubes of diaphragm pump
1)The fluorescent reagent diaphragm pumps are in the front plate. Remove the
diaphragm pump assembly with the cross-headed screwdriver.
2)Replace the diaphragm pump assembly and re-connect the Teflon tubes and tighten the
joints.
9-31

Figure 9-38 Replacing the fluorescent reagent diaphragm pump
1 DP9 801-3201-00001-00 3 DP11 801-3201-00001-00
2 DP10 801-3201-00001-00
Note: The 3 pumps form one assembly with the valves.
Confirmation
1) After replacing the diaphragm pump, start up the analyzer and perform fluidics
initialization.
2) Observe whether the fluidic tubing is filled with fluid, if not, perform relevant
operations. Perform relevant reagent replacing procedure for the DP4, DP5, DP6
and DP7, priming the FCM bath for DP12, and perform the aging procedure for the
DP1, DP2, DP3 and DP8 for several times. Note: Check if there is air leakage after
the replacement.
Table 9-1 List of diaphragm pumps
No.- ID Specifi Material of Color of Functions

cation diaphragm diaphragm
1 DP1 0.52ml EPDM Black LH lyse dispensing
2 DP2 1.0ml EPDM Black HGB sample and diluent

dispensing
3 DP3 1.5ml EPDM Black RBC sample and diluent

dispensing
4 DP4 1ml EPDM Black LN lyse dispensing
9-32
5 DP5 1ml EPDM Black LB lyse dispensing
6 DP6 1ml EPDM Black LR lyse dispensing
7 DP7 1ml EPDM Black LD lyse dispensing
8 DP8 1ml EPDM Black Sample dosing for flow cell

sample preparation
9 DP9 20uL EPDM Black FD fluorescent dye dispensing
10 DP10 20uL EPDM Black FR fluorescent dye dispensing
11 DP11 20uL EPDM Black FN fluorescent dye dispensing
12 DP12 8ml EPDM Black FCM bath filling
9.14 WBC Mixing Assembly

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
Note: there is grease lubricant on the stirring bar of the mixing assembly. Remove the
whole assembly during replacing rather than disassembling the stirring bar from the
assembly, and prevent the lubricant from dropping into the bath.
1) Open the front cover and secure it with the stop bar.
2) Unplug all connecting wires to the motor and sensor of the mixing assembly.
3) Remove the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the mixing assembly to the WBC bath with the
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the mixing assembly (see Figure 9-39).
4) Install the new mixing assembly, and then fix it with the screws. The connecting wire to
the motor is marked with M1-MIX, and that of the sensor is marked with SE1-MIX.
9-33
Figure 9-39 Removing the WBC mixing assembly
No. Name FRU Code No. Name FRU Code
1 WBC bath 801-3201-00032-00 4 Cross-recessed /

assembly panhead screw
M3X8
2 WBC bath mixing 801-3201-00031-00 5 Sensor /

assembly
3 Stirring motor /
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer. Tap "Service" > "Debug", and then tap "Motor Debug" (as
shown in Figure 9-40).
2) Set the "Speed_T" to 13, and "Time_T" to 8, select "No" for "Hold Moment", and then
tap "Action" to get the "Speed of Rotation" which is supposed to be within 1400200.
Set the "Speed_T" to 5, and then tap "Action" to get the "Speed of Rotation" which is
supposed to be within 600200. Set the "Speed_T" to 15, and then tap "Action" to get
the "Speed of Rotation" which is supposed to be within 1600200.
9-34
Figure 9-40 Stirring Motor Debug Screen
9.15 WBC Bath Assembly

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver, diagonal pliers, tweezers
Procedure
Note: make sure you drain the reaction bath before removal.
1) Open the front cover and secure it with the stop bar; or open and bring the front cover
to the top and make it lie on the top of the analyzer securely;
2) Unplug all connecting wires and tubes (wires connecting the heating membrane,
temperature sensor and protection switch, and pinched tubes, tubes used in
fluorescent channels, as well as waste discharging tubes, etc.); remove or loosen the
4 M4 screws fixing the assembly, and then remove it (Figure 9-41).
3) Install the new bath, and then connect all wires and tubes.
Figure 9-41 Removing the WBC bath assembly
9-35
1 Composite \ 2 WBC bath 801-3201-00032-00

screw M4x8 assembly
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and check if the initialization completes.
2) Drain and prime the reaction baths and check if they are normal.
3) Run several blank counts and check if the fluidic system is in normal status.
9.16 Reagent Pre-Heating Bath Assembly

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver, diagonal pliers, tweezers, tissues
Procedure
Note: as there may be reagent residues in the reagent pre-heating bath, put some tissues
under the bath while replacing the bath.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the bath assembly to the front plate, and then unscrew
the bath assembly.
3) Remove the right bottom cover.
4) Remove the tubes connecting to the reagent pre-heating bath with the diagonal pliers or
tweezers, and remove the valve on the bracket of the pre-heating bath, and then unplug
the wires from the bath.
5) Remove the 4 M4X8 composite screws fixing the pre-heating bath to the front plate.
6) Remove the reagent pre-heating bath assembly and install the new one. Install SV13-16
back, and then connect all tubes and wires according to the fluidic diagram.
9-36
Figure 9-42 Removing the reagent pre-heating bath assembly
1 Front plate / 3 Reagent 801-3201-00045-00

pre-heating bath
assembly
2 Composite screw /
M4X8 (stainless steel)
Figure 9-43 Reagent pre-heating bath
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and complete the fluidics initialization.
2) Run the reagent priming procedure for LB lyse, LN lyse, LD lyse, DR diluent and DS
diluent, check if the outlet tubing on top of the reagent pre-heating bath is filled with
reagent.
3) Check if the temperature of the reagent pre-heating bath is in normal state.
9-37
9.17 Sheath Fluid Pre-heating Bath Assembly
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver, diagonal pliers, tweezers, tissues
Procedure
Note: Put some tissues under the sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly to collect residue
drops before replacing.
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the bath assembly to the front plate, and then unscrew
the bath assembly.
3) Unplug all tubes and wires connecting to the sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly.
4) Loosen the composite screws fixing the sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly and the
optical system bracket (do not remove the screws).
5) Move the sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly horizontally backwards to the rear panel.
Remove the bath assembly when the screws get to the larger end of the hole in the upper
plate of the assembly. (Figure 9-43).
6) Install the new sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly and connect all tubes and wires
properly.
Figure 9-44 Removing the sheath fluid pre-heating bath assembly
9-38
1 Optical system / 3 Sheath fluid 801-3201-00046-00

bracket pre-heating bath
assembly
2 Composite screw /
M4x8
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and complete the fluidics initialization.
2) Run several aging counts, and then check if the exit tube of the sheath fluid
pre-heating bath is filled with fluid.
9.18 Diluent Heating Bath Assembly

Tools
107cross-headed screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
1) Open the right door with cisterns and baths;
2) Remove the screw fixing the diluent heating bath with a M2.5 inner hexagon spanner;
3) Unplug all wires and tubes from the bath;
Figure 9-45 Removing the diluent heating bath

9-39
1 2 Diluent
Sheath fluid
801-3201-00065-00 preheating 801-3201-00066-00
filter
assembly
Confirmation
1) Run the diluent prime program;
2) Check if the diluent heating bath is filled with diluent and there is no bubble in it;
3) Check if the temperature of the diluent is normal which means the temperature control
system works properly.
9.19 Sheath Fluid Filter

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the right door, and the panel of chambers;
2) Loosen the screw(s) fixing the sheath fluid filter with the screwdriver, as shown in
Figure 9-45;
3) Disconnect the tubes to the sheath fluid filter;
4) Remove the old filter and install a new one.
Confirmation
1) Check if the connecting tubes to the sheath fluid filter are fully filled with diluent
without bubble;
2) Run several aging counts, and then check if the blank count results are normal.
9.20 Waste Filter

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the left door;
2) Remove all connecting tubes to the waste filter;
9-40
3) Remove the filter assembly with the screwdriver and install a new one.
Figure 9-46 Waste Filter
1 Filter assembly (for liquid

waste in 3201 pneumatic 801-3201-00064-00
parts)
Confirmation
1) Check if the connection to the waste filter is correct without leakage.
9.21 START Switch Assembly

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver and #2.5 inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
2) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fix the bath integrating assembly and the front cover,
revolve and open the bath integrating assembly.
3) Open the front cover assembly; fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
4) Remove the right lower cover.
5) Remove the connector of the switch cables, remove the 3 M4 screws that fix the
assembly and the front board with cross-head screwdriver, and then take off the Start
switch assembly and the aspirate key.
9-41
6) Remove the 2 M3 inner hexagon screws that fix the aspirate key with #2.5 inner
hexagon spanner, the key can be replaced individually.
Figure 9-47 Removal of the START switch assembly
No. Name FRU code No.- Name FRU code
1 M3x8 inner / 4 M4X8 screws /

hexagon screw
2 START switch 801-3201-00049-00 5 Front board /

assembly
3 Open vial aspirate 801-3100-00194-00

key
Confirmation
1) Check whether the aspirate key is elastic, the key works normally after pressing.
9.22 Pressure Regulator

Tools
Procedure
1) Note: There are 3 pressure regulators on the analyzer and they are fixed on the valve
assemblies on the left of the analyzer.

9-42
3) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fix the valve assemblies and the front cover, revolve
and open the valve assemblies to a proper position.
4) Remove the pressure lines that connecting to the pressure regulator to be removed,
screw the pressing rings anticlockwise and remove the pressing rings, take off the
main body of the pressure regulator from the back.
5) Install a new pressure regulator assembly and screw the pressing rings tightly,
connect the pressure lines.
Figure 9-48 Removal of the pressure regulator
1 Pressing rings / 2 Pressure 801-3201-00007-00

of the pressure Regulator
regulator
Confirmation
1) After the replacement, start up the analyzer and go to the "Temp & Pres" screen.
2) Pull out the blue head of the pressure regulator manually; adjust the positive and
negative pressure until the pressure is within normal range.
3) Press the blue head heavily.
9.23 Vacuum Overflow Valve

Tools
9-43
Procedure
Note: The pneumatic unit shall be turned off.
1) The vacuum overflow valve is fixed under the valve assembly on the left of the
analyzer.
3) Remove the 2 M4X8 screws that fix the valve assemblies and the front cover, revolve
and open the valve assemblies to a proper position.
4) Remove the lines that connecting the vacuum regulator, loosen the pressing rings on
the vacuum overflow valve anticlockwise and take off the rings, move horizontally
downwards to take off the main body of the vacuum overflow valve.
5) Install a new vacuum overflow valve and screw the pressing rings tightly, connect the
lines again.
Figure 9-49 Removal of the vacuum overflow valve
1 Vacuum 801-3201-00008-00 3 Directional pin /

overflow valve
2 Regulator / 4 Pressing rings of /

bracket the vacuum
9-44
overflow valve
Confirmation
1) After the replacement, start up the analyzer and go to the "Temp & Pres" screen.
2) Loosen the retaining nut of the vacuum overflow valve, revolve the regulating bar,
and screw the nut until the pressure is within the required range.
9.24 Screen Assembly

Tools
Removal
1) Open the right door; remove all the cable connectors of the screen assembly.
2) Open the front cover assembly; use the stop bar to support the cover assembly.
3) Remove the 4 M4 screws that fix the screen assembly with NO.107 cross-head
screwdriver, then loosen the other 2 M4 screws with hands without removing them,
and then take off the screen assembly.
Figure 9-50 Removal of the screen assembly 1
1 Front cover / 4 M4X8 screws /
2 Screw loosened / 5 Stop bar /
9-45
with hands
3 Screen assembly 801-3201-00050-00
Figure 9-51 Removal of the screen assembly 2
1 LCD display 801-3110-00180-00 3 Touch screen 801-3100-00229-00
2 Inverter 801-1805-00027-00 4 Touchscreen /

frame
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and check whether the screen status is normal.
2) Check if the touchscreen responds to pressing rapidly and stably.
9.25 Tube Clamp for Mixing

Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly; fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2) Remove the protective cover of the autoloader.
3) Use the short side of the inner hexagon spanner to loosen the M3 screws on the left
of the mixing tube clamp, pull the tube clamp forward and take the tube clamp off.
4) Replace and install a new tube clamp.
9-46
Figure 9-52 Removal of the mixing tube clamp
1 Tube clamp 801-3201-00042-00 2 M3x8 inner /

for mixing hexagon screw
Confirmation
1) Replace the tube clamp for mixing and then perform autoloading to check if the
clamp works properly.
9.26 Autoloading Assembly

Tools
Removal
1) Open the front cover assembly, and fix the cover firmly with the stop bar; or lift the
front cover with the angle of 180, and then place the cover on the top cover stably.
2) Remove the protective cover of the autoloader;
3) Remove the autoloader;
4) Take off the tray and remove the left lower cover and the right lower cover;
5) Remove the 4 M4 screws that fixing the assembly, move the assembly horizontally
9-47
forward a little, remove all the tubes and cables that connecting the assembly, and
then take off the assembly.
Figure 9-53 Removal of the autoloading assembly
No.- Name No.- Name
1 M4X8 screws (top) 3 M4X8 screws (bottom)
2 Autoloading Assembly
9.27 Piercing Unit

Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon spanner, NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly, and fix the cover firmly with the stop bar; Or lift the
2) Loosen the screws that fix the protective cover of the autoloading piercing unit, and
9-48
then remove the protective cover from the analyzer.
Figure 9-54 Removal of the piercing unit-1
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Protective cover of the piercing 2 M4 screws loosened with hands

unit
3) Remove all the tubes connected to the piercing unit, and remove the 2 M3 screws
that fix the piercing probe wipe and piercing unit with the #2.5 inner hexagon spanner,
then remove the 2 M4 screws at the bottom of the piercing probe to take off the entire
piercing unit.
9-49

Figure 9-55 Removal of the piercing unit-2
1 Protective cover of / 4 Piercing Unit 801-3201-00043-00

the piercing unit
2 M3x20 inner / 5 Piercing probe /

hexagon screw wipe
3 M4X10 /
cross-headed
panhead screw
Confirmation
1) After replacing the piercing probe, take an empty tube and stick with adhesive tape
and perform autoloading counting;
2) Check if the piercing action is normal; after the piercing, check if the pin hole on the
tube cap is in the middle.
3) Check the piercing depth of the probe into the tube, and fine tune the adjusting screw
of the cylinder to ensure proper piercing depth for effective sample aspiration.
9.28 Autoloader
Tools
9-50
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly, and fix the cover firmly with the stop bar; Or lift the
2) Remove the protective cover.
3) Remove the screws that fix the autoloader at the front and pull the autoloader out a
little, remove the cable connectors and lines on the left of the autoloader that
connected to the analyzer, and then pull the autoloader forward a little horizontally to
take it off.
Figure 9-56 Removal of the autoloader
1 M4X8 screws / 4 Connecting part /

between the
autoloader and the
analyzer
2 Cover of the 043-000661-00 5 Autoloader assembly

801-3201-00035-00
autoloader
3 Bridging beam of /
the autoloader
Confirmation
1) There is pin hole at the left bottom of the analyzer, note that when installing the
autoloader, the relevant pins on the autoloader shall align to the hole, ensure that the
position is right.
2) The cables and pipes shall be connected properly, there are 2 pipes, including those
of the back supporting board and the pusher dog.
3) Start up the analyzer, go to "Maintenance" -"Debug" screen, select "Autoloader" ,

9-51
perform initialization and one-step operation, check if the autoloader works normally.
Figure 9-57 Cables and pipes installation of the autoloader
9.29 Tube Sensor Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the front cover assembly, and fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2) Open the right door, and pull out the autoloader a little and then take off the lower
right cover.
3) Disconnect the lines connected to the tube sensor assembly, and remove the 2 M3
screws that fix the assembly with the NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver to take the
assembly off.
Figure 9-58 Removal of the tube sensor assembly
9-52
1 Correlation / 3 Tube sensor 801-3201-00036-00

photocoupler assembly
installation board
2 M3X8 screws /
Confirmation
1) After replacing the tube sensor assembly, start up the analyzer, then put some tube
racks with occasional empty tubes into the loading tray.
2) Go to "Maintenance" -"Debug" screen, and select the autoloading and tube sensor
screen; tap "Start", the analyzer will run autoloading and detect tube status.
3) Check if the detection results displayed on the screen match with the actual situation.
The software displays green color for valid tube position.
Figure 9-59 Tube sensor screen
9.30 Cistern and Waste Bath

Tools
Procedure
9-53
Note: The cistern and waste baths are fixed on the bath integrating assembly on the right
of the analyzer, such as DIL cistern, FCM cistern, SCI cistern, WC1 cistern and WC2
cistern, identify the cistern with the printing; the removal procedure of the 5 cisterns
is the same. Before replacing the cisterns, perform the draining procedure with the
software; replace the cisterns after the fluid in each cistern is drained. Note: Do not
take off the fluid pipes when the pneumatic unit is on or the fluid has not been
drained to avoid fluid blowout, and human injury or equipment damage occurred
thereupon.
2) Open the bath integrating assembly.
3) Remove all the tube and line connectors connecting the cistern, loosen the M4
screws that fix the cistern with NO.107 cross-head screwdriver, and then take off the
cistern.
Figure 9-60 Removal of the cistern/waste bath
9-54
1 M4X8 panhead / 4 WC2 cistern 115-015168-00
screw with pad
2 DIL cistern 801-3110-00105-00 5 WC2 cistern 801-3201-00016-00
3 FCM cistern 801-3110-00105-00 6 SCI cistern 801-3201-00017-00
Confirmation
1) Perform the priming procedure on the relevant cisterns after replacing the cistern,
ensure that the DIL cistern, FCM cistern and the SCI cistern are filled with fluids;
2) After replacing the waste cistern, perform counting to ensure the fluid dispensing is
normal.
Notes
Before replace, must choose the right type of Cistern Bath, the wire of new floater is white, the
wire of old floater is black.
Configuration of floater: setup-advanced -select floater
9-61 floater configuration
Notice
1Drain the cistern, and the turn off pneumatic unit, and then select right floater, replace the
cistern. After this, prime the cistern.
2When replace CF card, must select the right floater configuration,or will make diluent flow
backwards.
3The wire of new floater is white, the wire of old floater is black.
9-55
9-62 old and new floater
9.31 Syringe Assembly

Tools
NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner, and slotted head screwdriver
Procedure
Note: There are 3 types of syringe: 250ul syringe (pump syringe), 2.5 ml syringe (sheath
syringe) and 100ul syringe (RBC syringe). The 250ul syringe and 2.5 ml syringe are fixed on
the valve assembly while the 100ul syringe is fixed on the right side of the front board.
The removal procedure of the 250ul syringe and 2.5 ml syringe that fixed on the valve
assembly is as follows:
2) Remove the 2 M4 screws that fixed the bath integrating assembly with NO.107
cross-headed screwdriver, revolve and open the bath integrating assembly
rightward.
3) Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe, remove the earthing screws (M3) and
pinching screws of the syringe with NO.107 cross-head screwdriver, pull the syringe
outward a little and disconnect the photocoupler motor lines at the back of the
syringe, and the syringe can be removed from the analyzer.
9-56
Figure 9-63 Removal of the syringe assembly-1
No.- Name No.- Name
1 2.5ml syringe assembly 3 M3X12 panhead screw with pad
2 250ul syringe assembly 4 Stainless-steel carrier ring (big)
The removal procedure for the 100ul syringe that fixed on the front board is as follows:
1) Open the left door.
2) Remove the left lower cover.
3) Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe, remove the earthing screws (M3) and
pinching screws (M3) of the syringe with NO.107 cross-head screwdriver, pull the
syringe outward a little and disconnect the photocoupler motor lines at the back of the
syringe, then the syringe can be removed from the analyzer.
9-57
Figure 9-64 Removal of the syringe assembly-2
No.- Name No.- Name
1 100ul syringe assembly 3 M3X12 panhead screw with pad
2 Stainless-steel carrier ring (big) 4 Front board
Figure 9-65 Breakdown drawing of the syringe assembly
9-58
No.- Name No.- Name
1 Syringe (100uL\250UL\2.5mL) 4 Syringe drive assembly
2 Syringe motor 5 Syringe fixing plate
3 Motor position sensor 6 Tailor-made screw 2
Procedure
1) Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe (unscrew the connectors that
connected to the 100ul/250ul Mindray syringe);
2) It is not necessary to remove the whole syringe assembly, remove the 10ml syringe
fixing plate and 2 tailor-made screws, remove the Mindray syringe unit with 107
cross-head screwdriver, slot-headed screwdriver, as shown in Figure 9-65:
3) Components of the syringe drive assembly can be replaced separately, including the
motor and sensor.
FRU of 2.5mL syringe
1 2.5mL 801-3900-00007-00 3 Motor position 801-2800-00020-00

syringe sensor
2 Syringe 801-2002-00001-00 4 Single syringe drive

801-3102-00004-00
motor assembly (FRU)
FRU of 250ul syringe
1 250ul 801-3201-00010-00 3 Motor position 801-2800-00020-00

syringe sensor
2 Syringe 801-3100-00108-00 4 Syringe drive 801-3110-00197-00

motor assembly (43F4K)
FRU of 100ul syringe
1 100ul 801-3201-00047-00 3 Motor position 801-2800-00020-00

syringe sensor
2 Syringe 801-3100-00108-00 4 Syringe drive 801-3110-00197-00

motor assembly (43F4K)
Confirmation
1) After replacing the syringe, connect the cables and lines properly.
2) Start up the analyzer, go to "Maintenance"-"Debug" screen, select "Syringe Debug"

9-59
in the "Fluidics", perform self-test of the syringes and see whether the syringes work
properly.
Figure 9-66 Self-test screen of the syringe
9.32 Filter and Drying Assembly

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver and #3 inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
1) Open the left door.
2) Unscrew the valve assemblies
3) Disconnect the tubes connected the filter and drying assembly, take off the assembly
after removing the screws.
4) The filter or dryer can be replaced separately if necessary.
9-60

Figure 9-67 Removal of filter and drying assembly
1 M4X8 screws / 3 Filter assembly 801-3201-00024-00
2 Dryer assembly 801-3201-00023-00
Confirmation
1) Connect the tubes after the installation;
2) Start up the analyzer and check whether the pressure of the pressure system is
within the required range, make sure there is no air leakage of the filter and drying
assembly.
9.33 Replacing the Backwater Bath Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1) Take off the left door.
2) Disconnect all tubes connected the backwater bath assembly, use the NO.107
cross-head screwdriver to remove or unscrew the 2 M4 screws that fix the backwater
bath assembly, then the backwater bath assembly can be removed.
9-61
Figure 9-68 Removal of backwater bath assembly
1 M4X8 screws / 2 Waterback bath 801-3201-00005-00

assembly
Confirmation
1) Check if the pressure of the pressure system is normal.
9.34 USB Assembly

Tools
Procedure
3) Disconnect the USB connectors, and remove the 2 M4 screws that fix the USB
assembly with the NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver to take off the USB assembly.
9-62
Figure 9-69 Removal of the USB assembly
1 M4X8 screws / 2 USB assembly 801-3201-00022-00
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, connect the mouse to the USB port to see if it works
properly.
9.35 Mindray Valve

Tools
NO.107 cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
Note:
There are 3 types of Mindray valve on the analyzer, namely 2-way Mindray valve, 3-way
Mindray valve and pressure proof 2-way Mindray valve.
The distribution of the valves is broad. They are fixed on the valve assembly on the left of the
analyzer, bath integrating assembly on the right, fluid valve assembly, reagent preheating
assembly, valve assembly on the back panel, sheath valve assembly in the optical system and
RBC fluid valve assembly at the front board.
The removal of the valve is quite simple, remove the 2 screws that fixed the valve and pull it
outward a little, disconnect the cables at the back and then remove the valve. For magnetic
valve on the valve assembly, open the left door and start removing; For magnetic valve on the
9-63
RBC fluidic valve assembly, open the front cover>open the left door>remove the left
lower cover>take off the fluorescent reagent package>remove the RBC module
cover>remove the valve; For valve fix on the right of the analyzer, open the right
door>unscrew the bath integrating assembly>remove the valve.
The removal difficulty is the various tubes connected the connectors, the tubes shall be
disconnected strictly based on the removal procedure, or the connectors may be damaged, or
the deteriorated sealing performance after reconnecting the tubes may cause higher risks of
leakage.
1) Disconnect the lines connected the valve with diagonal pliers or tweezers with even
force. The tubes at the mouth of the valve can be cut by the blade.
2) Remove the 2 screws fixed the valve with cross-head screwdriver and pull the valve
out slowly.
3) After the valve is pulled out a little, remove the connector of the valve tube and the
valve can be removed.
4) Replace a new valve and connect the tube connector and fix the valve onto the
bracket, since the tubing connecting the valve is distorted, replace new tubes to
ensure there is no leakage of air and fluid.
Figure 9-70 Removal of the tubes
Figure 9-71 Removal of the Mindray valve
9-64
1 2-way 801-3201-00002-00 3 Pressure-resistant 801-3201-00004-00
Mindray 2-way Mindray
valve valve.
2 3-way 801-3201-00003-00
Mindray
valve.
Confirmation
1) Install the new valve and connect the valve lines, connect the tubes after the valve is
fixed;
2) Start up the analyzer, go to "Maintenance"-"Debug" screen, and go to "Valves Test" in

the "Fluidics".
3) Turn off the pneumatic unit (with button) based on the tips;
4) Select the "Multi-Tests" item;
5) Select the position of the valve, tap the valve number to be replaced, perceive
whether there is action of the valve carrier rod, check if there is sound of "tuck" and if
the valves work normally.
Figure 9-72 Valve debug screen
9-65
9.36 Burkert Valve
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver and #2.5 inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
3) Remove all the tube and line connectors that are connected to the Burkert valve, and
remove the 2 M3 screws that fix the Burkert valve with #2.5 inner hexagon spanner,
then the Burkert valve can be removed.
Figure 9-73 Removal of the Burkert valve
1 3-way Burkert 3 Bracket of Burkert \

801-3201-00020-00
valve valve
2 2-way Burkert 4 M3x12 inner \

801-3201-00019-00
valve hexagon screw
Confirmation
1) After replacing the Burkert valve, connect the cables and tubes.
2) The confirmation action of the Burkert valve is the same as that of the Mindray valve,
9-66
which is detecting the status and observing the sound of the blue protrusion.
9.37 Waste Valve

Tools
Procedure
2) Disconnect the tubes connected to the waste valve, remove the 2 M3 screws that
fixed the waste valve bracket with NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver, and pull the
waste valve with the bracket out a little, and then disconnect the cable connector at
the end of the waste valve to remove the waste valve and the bracket.
3) Remove the 2 screws that fix the waste valve to the bracket with NO.107
cross-headed screwdriver, and then the waste valve can be removed.
Figure 974 Removal of the waste valve
No.- Name FRU code No.- Name
1 Waste valve 801-3201-00011-00 3 M3X8 screws (fixing the waste

valve)
2 Bracket of the / 4 M3X8 screws (fixing the bracket)
9-67
waste valve
Confirmation
1) The confirmation action of the waste valve is the same as that of the Mindray valve. After
starting up the analyzer, tap the No. of the waste valve in the valve debug screen to check if
the valve works properly.
9.38 Gas Valve

Tools
M1.5 cross-headed screwdriver, 107 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
Note: The valves on the analyzer include the Mindray valve, 3 way pressure normally closed
gas valve, 3 way pressure normally open (-11) gas valve, and two-position 5-way gas valve.
They are mainly located on the left of the gas valve assembly.
1) Use the cross-headed screwdriver to unscrew the screws that fix the gas valves.
2) Disconnect the cables and lines on the valves.
3) Remove the 2 screws that fix the 2-way valve with 107 cross-headed screwdriver,
disconnect the cables and lines and the valves can be removed.
4) Pay attention of the model of the valves, one is GA0101E1 while the other is
GA010E1-11, which cannot be mistaken. The sealing rubber washer can not be
dropped, or it may cause air leakage on the confluence board.
Figure 9-75 Gas valve and two-position 5-way gas valve
Figure 9-76 Sealing rubber washer at the bottom of the gas valve
9-68
1 Gas valve M6Q-020002--- 3

Gas valve GA010E1-11 801-3100-00010-00
GA010E1
2 4 Gas valve 0104E1-21

801-3201-00071-00
(two-position 5-way)
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer.
2) The confirmation action is the same as that of the Mindray valve debug. Go to the
"Valve Test" screen in the software, and tap relevant valve No., if the indicator is on,
the power of the valve is normal.
9.39 SMC 2-way Fluidic Valves

Tools
Cross-head screwdriver and tweezers
Procedure
Note: There SMC 2-way fluidic valves are only used in 2 valves, which are SV08 and
SV09.
1) Power off the analyzer.
2) Open the front cover assembly add take off the left lower cover.
4) Disconnect the tubes and lines connected to SV8 and SV9 with tweezers.
5) Remove the SMC fluidic valve with the cross-headed screwdriver and disconnect the
lines.
6) Replace the fluidic valve and connect the lines.
Figure 9-77 Removal of SMC valve
9-69
1 SMC 2-way Fluidic valve 801-3201-00063-00

assembly
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, complete fluidics initialization and overall priming of the
analyzer.
2) Run several fresh blood samples to make sure RBC measurement works normally.
9.40 Probe Wipe of the Open-Vial Module

Tools
Tweezers
Procedure
1) Pull the probe wipe assembly of the open-vial module down to the lowest position,
and then remove it from the sample probe.
2) Separate the probe wipe from the probe wipe assembly along the shedding direction,
pull it out from the bracket along the direction of the arrow.
3) Disconnect the tubing from the probe wipe with tweezers.
4) Replace the probe wipe; connect the tubing of the waste and the diluent, put in onto
the bracket.
Figure 9-78 Removal of the probe wipe of the open-vial module
1 Probe wipe of the 041-005497-00 2 Bearer of the /

open-vial module probe wipe
Confirmation
9-70
1) After starting up the analyzer, run open-vial sample analysis, and check if the probe
wipe moves normally along the sample probe.
2) Check and make sure there is no liquid leakage around the probe wipe of open-vial
module during the washing process of the probe wipe and exterior wall of sample
probe.
9.41 Optical System

Tools
Procedure
Note: After replacing the optical system, you need to re-calibrate the optical gain and
check if the scattergrams of fresh blood sample analysis are normal.
1 Optical 801-3201-00034-00
system
1) Check and make sure the analyzer is shut down and the power cord is unplugged;
2) Wear a pair of clean rubber gloves (disposable) and take proper electrostatic
prevention measures;
3) Remove the top cover and right door of the analyzer, as shown in Figure 9-79;
Figure 9-79 Removing the top cover and right door
4) Remove the screw fixing the panel of chamber assemblies to open the panel and get
9-71
to the right side of the optical system, as shown in Figure 9-80.
Figure 9-80 Open the panel of chamber assemblies
5) Remove the 2 M3x8 cross-recessed panhead composite screws (with washer) fixing
the flow cell tray with a cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the tray, as
shown in Figure 9-81;
Flo
Sample
SV18, SV19
preparation
tubing of
SV26
WBC bath
Flow SV45
SV20
Figure 9-81 Fluidic structure of the optical system
6) Disconnect the tubes shown in Figure 9-81. If the reagent comes out, wipe it up with
tissues or wet cloth to prevent from corrosion.
7) Remove the 4 M4x8 cross-recessed panhead composite screws (with washer)

shown in Figure 9-82 with the cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the
heating wire of the detection assembly (HEAT-Flux / red) and the temperature control
connector (T4-Flux / white), as shown in Figure 9-82 and Figure 9-83;
9-72
Figure 9-82 Optical system fixing screws
T4-Flu
HEAT-F
Figure 9-83 Temperature control connector of the detection assembly
8) Unplug D-J2, D-J17 and E-J4 from the mother board of the analyzer one by one, and
then remove the heating control board, as shown in Figure 9-84.
9-73
Figure 9-84 Optical system fixing screws
9) Remove the 4 M4x8 cross-recessed panhead composite screws (with washer)

shown in Figure 9-84 with the cross-headed screwdriver;
10) Hold the optical system with both hands and move it upwards vertically;
11) Install the new optical system in the reverse order of the steps above.
Confirmation
1)After replacing the optical system, you need to prime the fluidic system, confirm the
proper functioning of the optical system and re-calibrate the optical gain.
2)Follow the steps below to check the optical system and re-calibrate the optical gain:
This chapter describes how to test the optical system by using standard particles
to verify the status of the optical system. 7um standard particles are used for the
check and calibration. There are two standard particle test modes, which are
Latex(CAL) mode and Latex(Debug) mode. The CAL (calibration) mode use the
same sequence as normal whole blood analysis, while the Debug mode use a
dedicated sequence for the optical system. Test must be done in the two modes.
Note: the standard particle mixture ratios of the two modes are different, please pay
attention to the ratios.
1.Confirmation in Latex(Debug) mode
Prepare standard particle
9-74
7um standard particle: 5ml purified water + +1 drops of standard particle
Tap "Calibration" - "Optical Gain" in the system menu. Select "Latex(Debug)" in the
"Mode" area. Present the prepared 7um standard particles to the open vial sample
probe, press the aspirate key to start analysis.
When the analysis finished, check if the standard particle results are in required range.
Record the data of which the "Total" is more than 2000. The scattergrams are
supposed to be with well congregated particles, and without tiering or tailing.
The requirements for the 7um standard particle are as follows:
Table 9-27um standard particle index of debug mode
Position of FS gravity center 34.00~46.00
FS CV 2.3%
Position of SS gravity center 51.00~71.00
SS CV 17.2%
Figure 9-85 Optical gain calibration (standard particle debug) screen
2.Standard particle (calibration) mode confirmation
9-75
Prepare standard particle
7um standard particle: 1ml purified water + +4 drops of standard particle
Select "Latex (CAL)" in the "Mode" area of the optical gain calibration screen. Present
the prepared 7um standard particles to the open vial sample probe, press the aspirate
key to start analysis. When the analysis finished, check if the standard particle results
are in required range. Record the data in the total number of particles cell.
Table 9-37um standard particle index of calibration mode
FS CV 3.9%
Figure 9-4 Optical gain calibration (standard particle calibration) screen
If the standard particles tested in the Latex(CAL) mode and Latex(Debug) mode both meet
requirements, the optical system is working properly.
Note: if the CV of the particle is out of expected range, there may be contamination in the
optical system. You can perform probe cleanser soaking or wash the flow cell manually to
clean.
Note: After the confirmation procedures above are completed, you need to re-calibrate the
optical gain.
9-76
Preparations:
z The analyzer is working properly, and its background, optical gain, performance
stability and carryover all meet the requirements.
z The refrigerated RD calibrator must be warmed up in room temperature for at least

15 minutes and then mixed for about 3 minutes (the bottom of the tube is clear and
without buildup). Remember to put the calibrator back into refrigerator after it is in
room temperature for 1 hour.
1) Log in the system with R&D password, click "Calibration" - "Optical Gain Calibration"
in the system menu.
Note: select working material on the mode screen. If calibrators are tested under the
standard particle mode, the flow cell may be clogged or get dirty, see the following
figure. Under such case, run probe cleanser under open vial mode for 1-2 times and
exit the screen, then run blank counting at the analysis screen and the background
results meet requirement.
Figure 9-86 Testing calibrator under standard particle mode
2) Select mode as working material, test the mixed calibrator under open vial mode for
3 consecutive times (the analysis can go on normally only when the screen is not
grayed out).
3) Select the DIFF, BASO, RET and NRBC channel respectively to perform the
verification.
4) The mean of the 3 analysis results will be calculated automatically, including FS, SS
and FL.
5) Enter the calibrator targets of FS, SS and FL channels into the CG Target cell, the
relative deviations of the 3 means and the targets will be calculated automatically.
The deviations must be smaller than 2%.
Note: Run analysis for 3 times with different channels selected, the optical data of each
channel will be displayed.
If recommended that you test calibrators first and then enter the targets to avoid making
mistake.
9-77
6) If the deviations of the calibrator means and the targets of all channels are smaller
than 2%, the optical channel of the analyzer meets requirements, recalibration is not
needed.
7) If the deviations exceed 2%, click " ", a new gain will be calculated
automatically (displayed in the Gain cell). When the FS, SS and FL gains of a
channel (e.g. DIFF channel) are calculated, click "Save", the current gains will
replaced by the preset gains. When the calibration of DIFF channel finishes, select
BASO, RET and NRBC channels to perform the gain calibration operations above.
There is no FL direction for the BASO channel. Remember to click "Save" at the
screen of each channel.
Note: you can only set up the preset gain once. Do not go back the previous screen to
set up the gain again after the switching.
8) When the gain calibration operations are done, switch mode to "Standard Particle",
the software will prompt you to clear data, click "OK" and select mode as "Working
Material", then run calibrators for 3 times to see if the deviations of the means of DIFF,
BASO, RET and NRBC channels and the target are smaller than 2%, if not, perform
calibration again until the requirement can be met.
Figure 9-87 Analysis results of calibrator
Note: when the calibration requirement is met, take a picture for the verification screen of DIFF,
BASO, RET and NRBC channel, or tapping F11 on the USB keyboard to capture the screens,
and then save the pictures to a USB.
9-78
9.42 Units in the Autoloader
9.42.1 Loading Unit

Tools
Procedure
1) Shut down the analyzer, and then remove the autoloader;
2) Remove the autoloader shell;
3) Remove the deck plate of the autoloader;
4) Remove the 4 M3X8 small panhead composite screws with the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver as shown in the figure below, disconnect the connecting wire for
auto-sampler&PHC2, and then remove the assembly.
Figure 9-88 Removing the loading unit
1 Small panhead composite / 2 Loading unit 801-3201-00038-00

screw M3X8
Confirmation
1) Check if all parts are properly installed and secured;
2) Check if all communication wires are properly connected;
3) Start up the analyzer, and check if the autoloader works properly.
9-79
9.42.2 Feeding Unit
Tools
Procedure
1) Shut down the analyzer, and then remove the autoloader ;
screwdriver as shown in the figure below, and then disconnect the connecting wire
for auto-sampler&PHC2, as well as the gas tubes. Then remove the assembly.
Figure 9-89 Removing the feeding unit
1 Small panhead composite / 2 Feeding unit 801-3201-00039-00

screw M3X8
Confirmation
2) Check if all communication wires are properly connected;
9.42.3 Air Cylinder Claw Unit

Tools
9-80
Procedure
4) Remove the feeding unit;
5) Remove the 2 small panhead composite screws with the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver as shown in the figure below, and then remove the shielding cover;
6) Loosen the M3X8 small panhead composite screw on the pressing block of the
synchronous belt, and then the air cylinder claw is apart from the synchronous belt;
7) Loosen the 2 screws fixing the towline of the feeding PHC barrier, and then the air
cylinder claw is apart from the towline;
8) Loosen the 4 M3X5 inner hexagon screws with an inner hexagon spanner, and
remove them from the slider;
9) Pull out the gas tube from the towline, and then remove the air cylinder claw unit.
Figure 9-90 Removing the air cylinder claw unit
1 Autoloader Cover \ 4 Pressing block \

of the
synchronous
belt 1
2 Small panhead \ 5 M3X5 inner \

composite screw hexagon screw
M3X8
3 Cylinder pusher unit 801-3201-00040-00
9-81
Confirmation
2) Check if all communication wires and gas tube are properly connected;
9.42.4 Unloading Unit

Tools
Procedure
screwdriver as shown in the figure below, disconnect the connecting wire for
auto-sampler&PHC2, and then remove the assembly.
Figure 9-91 Removing the unloading unit
No. Name FRU No. Name FRU Code

Code
1 Small panhead / 2
composite screw Unloading unit 801-3201-00041-00
M3X8
Confirmation
9-82
1)Check if all parts are properly installed and secured;
2)Check if all communication wires are properly connected;
3)Start up the analyzer, and check if the autoloader works properly.
9.42.5 Tube Rack Side Pressing Unit

Tools
Procedure
1 Tube rack lateral

801-3201-00037-00
compressing unit
1)Shut down the analyzer, and then remove the autoloader;
2)Remove the autoloader shell;
3)Remove the tube rack side pressing unit
4)Remove the circlip with circlip pliers as shown in the figure below, and then remove
the tube rack side pressing board;
5)Remove the M5X10 inner hexagon screw and 4 M6X12 inner hexagon screws with
the inner hexagon spanner, pull out the gas tube, and then remove the cylinder.
Figure 9-92 Removing the tube rack side pressing unit
9-83
No. Name No. Name
1 8 Inner hexagon bolt, stainless steel, M5X10,

Cylinder holder
passivated
2 9 Cylinder, thin, single-action, pressed back by

Lifting decelerating tube
spring
3 Connector, 4X2.5mm rubber 10 Small panhead composite screw M3X8,

tube, M5 stainless steel
4 11 Inner hexagon bolt, stainless steel, M6X12,

Joint block
passivated
5 Pressing board shaft 12 Rubber tube. PU, 4mmX2.5mm, transparent
6 Tube rack pressing board 13 Connector, straight coupling, 40D,40D
7 Elastic collar for the shaft
Confirmation
1)Check if all parts are properly installed and secured;
2)Check if all communication wires and gas tube are properly connected;
9.42.6 Tube Counter Unit

Tools
Cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
1)Shut down the analyzer, and then remove the autoloader;
2)Remove the autoloader shell;
3)Remove the screws fixing the counter unit (next to the back plate of the autoloader)
with a cross-recessed screwdriver;
4)Unplug all connecting wires of the counter PHC;
5)Install a new counter unit.
9-84
Figure 9-93 Removing the counter unit
7 Guide plate / 9 Small panhead /

composite screw
M4X8
8 Tube counter 801-3201-00087-00

unit
Confirmation
1)Check if the counter unit is installed correctly.
9.43 Power Board and Power Conversion Board

Tools
Procedure
Note: 1. Make sure the analyzer is powered off before replacing for safety reasons; 2. Take
proper electrostatic prevention measures.
1) Remove the power supply assembly from the analyzer (see the section of replacing
the power supply assembly).
2) Remove the 6 screws fixing the outer shielding cover of the power supply manually,
and then remove the outer shielding cover.
3) Remove the 4 screws fixing the inner shielding cover, and then pull out the inner
9-85
shielding cover (do not remove it by pulling the wire).
4) Unplug all wires, remove the M3 screws fixing the power board/power conversion
board manually, and then remove the board.
5) Install a new board, and fix it properly. Make sure all wires and components are
properly connected, and then install the inner and outer shielding cover.
Note: there are 2 protective tubes on the main power board and power conversion board
respectively.
Outer
shielding
Inner
shielding
Figure 9-94 Components of the power supply board
Figure 9-95 Power supply specification
9-86
1 Main power 051-000616-00 4 Mains filter 006-000155-00

board
2 Power 051-000406-00 5 Power switch 801-BA40-00254-00

conversion
board
3 Protective 010-000006-00 6 Power fan and 801-3101-00022-00

tube connecting wire
Confirmation
1)Check the power specification indicated on the side of the power supply assembly
while installing, and make sure it meets the requirement;
2)After installation, start up the analyzer, and then check the power related data in the
corresponding screens are correct.
3)Run autoloading and open-vial cycles. Check if the analyzer works properly without
error report.
9.44 Pressure Detection Board

Tools
Procedure
Note: 1. Power off the analyzer while replacing; 2. The Pressure detection board is above the
pressure regulator of the gas valve assembly on the left of the analyzer.
1)Open the left door of the analyzer;
2)Remove the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the gas valve assembly to the front plate, and
then open the panel of the gas valve assembly to the right position.
3)Unplug the 6 tubes connecting to the sensor under the pressure detection board
using tweezers or diagonal pliers.
4)Remove the 6 M3 screws fixing the pressure detection board and the protection
plate to the metal sheet with the cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the
pressure detection board.
5)Install a new pressure detection board, and then connect the tubes to the pressure
sensors.
9-87
Figure 9-96 Removing the pressure detection board
1 Panhead screw / 4 Gap in the gas /

with washer, valve bracket
M3X6
2 Protection plate of 047-003995-00 5 Gas valve bracket /

the detection
board
3 Pressure 801-3201-00080-00
detection board
Confirmation
1)Start up the analyzer, and check the pressure data in the status screen, making
sure there is no error report;
2)Run autoloading and open-vial counts, and check if the analyzer works properly
without error report.
9.45 Indicator Board

Tools
9-88
Procedure
Note: the indicator board is on the back of the front cover.
1)Open the front cover and secure it with the stop bar.
2)Unplug the connecting wires of the indicator board, remove the 2 M3 screws fixing
the shielding cover of the indicator board with the cross-headed screwdriver, and
then remove the shielding cover.
3)Remove the 2 M3 screws fixing the indicator board with the cross-headed
screwdriver, and then remove the indicator board.
4)Install a new indicator board, and then plug all connecting wires to it.
Figure 9-97 Removing the indicator board
1 Front cover / 4 Shielding cover /

of the indicator
2 Indicator Board 801-3101-00031-00 5 Composite screw /

M3x8
3 Composite /
screw M3x8
9.46 Valve Control Board

Tools
Procedure
9-89
There are 2 valve control board in the analyzer, one on the back of the gas valve assembly,
and one on the middle plate.
1)Open the left door;
2)Open the panel of the gas valve assembly;
3)Unplug all wires connecting to the valve control board; remove the 4 M3 screws
fixing the valve control board with the NO. 107 cross-headed screwdriver, and
then remove the control board.
Figure 9-98 Removing the valve control board
1 Gas valve bracket / 3 Panhead screw with /

washer, M3X6
2 Valve control board 051-000329-00 4 Valve control board 051-000329-00

(on the gas valve (on the middle
assembly) plate)
Confirmation
1) Startup the analyzer, and check if all valves work properly.
9-90
9.47 Heating Control Board
Tools
Procedure
1)Open the front cover;
2)Unplug all wires connecting to the heating control board; remove the 6 M3 screws
fixing the heating control board with the NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver, and
then remove the heating control board.
Figure 9-99 Removing the heating control board
1 Panhead screw with / 3 Heating control /

washer, M3X6 board bracket
2 Heating control board 051-000328-00
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and check if the heating of all baths are proper.
9-91
9.48 Data Board and Power Drive Board
Tools
Procedure
Note: the integrated PCBA includes the data PCBA and driver board PCBA, the removing
procedure of which are the same.
1) Open the left door and the front cover;
2) Unplug all wires needed for removing the board (for data board PCBA, you need to
the top cover of the shielding box before unplugging the wires inside the shielded
area); remove the 2 M4 screws fixing the assembly with the NO. 107 cross-headed
screwdrivers, pull the 2 PCBA holders outwards and make the PCBA apart from the
mother board to remove it.
Figure 9-100 Removing the integrated PCBA
1 Drive board 051-000326-00 5 Top cover of the 042-001893-00

PCBA shielding box
2 Composite \ 6 Panhead screw with \

screw M4x8 washer, M3X6
3 PCBA holder \ 7 Mother board PCBA \
9-92
4 Data board 051-000596-00
PCBA
Figure 9-101 Service parts on the data board
1 COME 3 CF card 801-3201-00072-00

023-000230-00
module
2 Button cell M05-100R29-02 4 Data board bottom

042-001894-00
shielding cover
Confirmation
1) Start up the analyzer and check if it can run samples properly without error.
9.49 Mother Board

Tools
Procedure
1)Open the left door and the top cover;
2)Remove the data board assembly and drive board assembly;
3)Remove the M4 screws fixing the tray holders with the cross-headed screwdriver,
and remove the tray holders (2 pieces).
9-93
Figure 9-102 Removing the mother board -1
No. Name No. Name
1 Tray holder -1 3 Tray holder -2
2 Circuit bracket 4 Composite screw M4x8
4)Open the front cover; remove the 4 M4 screws (2 fixing the bracket to the back
plate, 2 fix it to the front plate) fixing the circuit board bracket with the NO.107
screwdriver, and then remove the circuit board bracket.
9-94
No. Name No. Name
1 Front plate 3 Composite screw M4x8
2 Circuit bracket 4 Back plate
5)Open the panel of the gas valve assembly;
6)Unplug all wires connecting to the mother board; remove the 15 M3 screws fixing
the mother board using the NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove
the mother board.
1 Mother Board 051-000327-00 2 Panhead screw with /

washer, M3X6
9.50 Liquid Level Detection Board

Tools
Procedure
The liquid level detection board is on the right back of the analyzer. Remove it following the
steps below:
1) Open the right door;
2) Open the panel of chamber assemblies;
9-95
3) Unplug all tubes and wires connecting to the liquid level detection board, raise the
protective shield of the board, remove the 4 M3 fixing screws with the NO.107
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the liquid level detection board.
Figure 9-105 Removing the liquid level detection board
1 Liquid level 051-000565-00 3 Protective shield 047-003942-00

detection board of liquid level
detection board
2 Panhead screw \ 4 Reagent 043-000829-00

with washer, detecting tube
M3X6
Confirmation
1)Start up the analyzer and check the reagent detection function works properly.
9.51 Network Port Patching Board

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the Left Door
2) Rotate and open the gas valve assembly to make room for removing the network port
9-96
patching board.
3) Take off the filter and drying assembly.
4) Disconnect all lines connected to the network port patching board, and remove the 4
M3 screws that fix the board with the NO. 107 cross-headed screwdriver to take it off.
Figure 9-106 Removal of the network port patching board
1 Small network 051-000595-00 2 M3x6 cross-headed \

board screw with pad
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the network connection of the analyzer and the
PC is normal.
9.52 Diluent Heating Control Board

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the left door of the analyzer and open the valve integrating assembly.
2) The diluent heating board is in the partition. Disconnect the lines connected to the
board and remove the screws that fix the board with the cross-headed screwdriver.
9-97
3) Replace the diluent heating board.
Figure 9-107 Replacing the diluent heating board
1 Diluent heating control

051-000919-00
board
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the heating function of the diluent heating
control board is normal.
9.53 Touchscreen Control Board

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the front cover of the analyzer and fix it with the stop bar.
9-98
2) Take off the shielding cover of the touchscreen control board (on the back of the
touchscreen assembly) with the cross-headed screwdriver.
3) Remove off the screws that fix the touchscreen control board and replace the board.

Figure 9-108 Replacing the touchscreen control board
1 Touchscreen 801-3100-00230-00
control board
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the touchscreen works properly.
9.54 Pneumatic Unit Control Board

Tools
Procedure
1) Shut down the analyzer and disconnect the power cord of the pneumatic unit.
2) Open the left and right doors of the pneumatic unit with the cross-headed
screwdriver.
3) Open the top cover of the pneumatic unit with a cross-headed screwdriver.
9-99
4) Remove the protection shielding cover of the pneumatic control board.
5) Remove the pneumatic control board and replace with a new one.
6) Install the top cover and side doors of the pneumatic unit.

Figure 9-109 Replacing the pneumatic control board
1 Pneumatic unit 051-000760-00

control board
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the pneumatic unit works properly.
9.55 Boards inside the Optical System

Tools
Cross-headed screwdriver and inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
Note: Be sure to power off the analyzer with replacing the boards inside the optical
system.
3) Remove the shielding cover of the optical system.
4) Replace the laser drive board.
9-100
5) Replace the FS preamplification board.
6) Replace the SS preamplification board.
7) Replace the fluorescence signal assembly.
Figure 9-110 Replacing the boards inside the optical system
1 3 PCBA of SS
scatter
Laser Drive Board 051-000318-00 051-000320-00
preamplification
board
2 PCBA of FS scatter 4 Fluorescence 801-3201-00079-00

preamplification 051-000319-00 signal assembly
board
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the optical system works properly.
2) After replacing the board, the optical gain must be re-calibrated; for more details, see
Chapter 6 Optical System.
9.56 Cap Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1) Shut down the analyzer.

9-101
2) Wear a pair of gloves and then screw off the reagent cap assembly.
3) Install a new cap assembly.
1 M-68LN NRBC lyse cap 7 Fluorescent reagent

801-3201-00058-00 801-3201-00084-00
assembly cap assembly (FN)
2 M-68D diluent cap 8 Fluorescent reagent

801-3201-00053-00 801-3201-00085-00
assembly cap assembly (FD)
3 M-68DR RET diluent cap 9 Fluorescent reagent

801-3201-00054-00 801-3201-00086-00
assembly cap assembly (FR)
4 M-68LB BASO lyse cap 10 Waste cap assembly

801-3201-00055-00 801-3201-00060-00
assembly (6800 direct discharge)
5 M-68LH LH lyse cap 11 Waste cap assembly

801-3201-00056-00 801-3110-00070-00
assembly (waste container)
6 M-68LD DIFF lyse cap

801-3201-00057-00
assembly
9.57 Transformer
Tools
Procedure
3) The transformer is beside the power supply assembly.
4) Disconnect the lines that are connected to the transformer.
5) Screw off the M4 screws that fix the transformer with the cross-headed screwdriver.
6) Take out the transformer and replace it with a new one.
7) And then connect all the wires.
9-102

Figure 9-111 Removal of the transformer
1 Transformer 006-000121-00
Confirmation
1) After starting up the analyzer, check if the preheating baths are functioning properly,
as the transformer provides heating AC power.
9.58 Replacing the Wires

Tools
Cross-headed screwdriver, cutting pliers
Procedure
1) Open the side door or top cover of the analyzer.
2) Disconnect the damaged wires and replace them with new ones.
Description of the wire markers:
The wire marker in Figure 9-112 is D-J19/C00948-0.1, in which D suggests board type
(motherboard), J19 suggests port No. in the board, C000948 is the numbers in the middle of
the wire code (the FRU code of the wire is 009-000948-00, and you can apply the wire needed
using the code); and 0.1 is the version No..
9-103
Figure 9-112 Wire marker
Confirmation
1) Make sure the wires are correctly connected.
2) Make sure the analyzer works properly after being started up.
9.59 Replacing the Connectors

Tools
107 cross-head screwdriver, nipper pliers, cutting pliers and monkey spanner
Procedure
Note: The connectors that need to be replaced include 5-way waste connector, the BNC
socket of waste sensor, the helical connector connected to the gas pipe, and the manually
screwed Teflon connector.
1)The 5-way waste connector is on the back panel; screw off the 2 cross-headed
screws, and then take off the liquid tube to replace the connector.
2)The BNC socket of waste sensor is on the back panel inside the analyzer.
Remove the screws that fix the socket with the nipper pliers, and take off the
wires connected to it, then replace the socket and re-connect the wires.
3)Remove the screws that fix the helical connector with the monkey spanner, and
replace with a new one.
4)The Teflon connect can be taken off by hand. Be sure not to drop the white tapered
fastener inside the Teflon connector when replacing it.
9-104

Figure 9-113 Connectors on the back panel
Figure 9-114 Connectors
9-105
1 HEADER RF BNC 4
509B-10-05973 Connector, CNS, 1/4-28 082-000525-00
socket 50ohm
2 Waste connector(5-way) 5
801-3110-00112-00 Pipe hoop, 0.16"x0.19" 082-000526-00
(FRU)
3 Connector, helical
M6Q-030001---
connector, 6OD,M14
Note: When installing the CNS connector, be sure to install the white pipe hoop together to
ensure the leak tightness.
9.60 Components inside the Assemblies

Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner, nipper pliers, and cutting pliers.
Procedure
1) Take out the assembly from the analyzer.
2) Replace the components inside the assembly, like motors and belt.
3) And then connected the wires.
4) Make sure the analyzer works properly after being started up.
Figure 9-115 Longitudinal feeding pusher
1 Linear guide rail 032-000134-00 4 Synchronous M6C-010002---
9-106
belt wheel
2 5 Synchronous M6C-020006---
Stepper motor 0000-10-10985
belt
3 Synchronous 6 Photocoupler 011-000021-00

M6C-010001---
belt wheel
Figure 9-116 Latitudinal feeding pusher
1 Synchronous 5 Synchronous M6C-020006---

M6C-010002--
belt wheel belt
2 Linear guide 6 Drag chain BA33-10-35085

032-000134-00
rail
3 Stepper motor 3100-21-49048 7 Photocoupler 011-000021-00
4 Synchronous M6C-010001---
belt wheel
9-107

Figure 9-117 Unload unit 1
Figure 9-118 Unload unit 2
1 4 Synchronous M6C-010002--
Stepper motor 0000-10-10985
belt wheel

M6C-010001---
belt wheel
3 Synchronous 6 Linear guide M6H-010003---

801-3110-00155-00
belt rail
9-108

Figure 9-119 Manual loading assembly
1 4 Linear guide M6H-010001---

Stepper motor 801-3005-00004-00
rail
2 Synchronous 5 Synchronous M6C-010002---

M6C-010001---
belt wheel belt wheel

801-3110-00084-00
belt
9-109

Figure 9-120 Auto mixing assembly
1 Lifting cylinder M6Q-010002--- 4 Linear guide rail M6H-010003---
2 Linear guide 5 Stepper motor 0000-10-10985

M6H-010004---
rail
3 Oil buffer 082-000620-00 6 Telescoping cylinder M6Q-010003---
Figure 9-121 Piercing unit
1 Linear guide rail M6H-010009--- 3 Photocoupler 011-000021-00
9-110
2 Piercing cylinder 082-000143-00
9.61 Replacing the Photocoupler (PHC/Sensor)
9.61.1 Open-vial Probe Wipe PHC

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the front cover and secure it with the stop bar;
2) Pull the wipe carriage to separate the PHC barrier from the wipe PHC, and then
unplug the connecting wire.
3) Remove the M4 screw fixing the PHC using the cross-headed screwdriver, and then
remove the wipe PHC.
4) Install a new PHC or the old one after it is repaired.
Figure 9-122 Removing the open-vial probe wipe PHC
1 Open-vial probe wipe PHC \ 3 Cross-recessed \

barrier panhead screw M4X10
2 Open-vial probe wipe PHC 011-000021-00
9-111
9.61.2 Front Cover PHC
Tools
Procedure
2) Unplug all wires to the PHC;
3) Remove the M4 screw fixing the PHC using the cross-headed screwdriver, and then
remove the PHC.
4) Install a new PHC or the old one after it is repaired.
Figure 9-123 Removing the front cover PHC
1 Front plate \ 3 Panhead screw M4X10 \
2 Front cover PHC 011-000021-00
9.61.3 Syringe PHC

Tools
9-112
Procedure
1) Open the left door, and then the panel of gas valve assembly;
2) Then you can see the PHC mounting plate on the back of the 2.5ml syringe and 250ul
syringe assembly on the middle plate, and the PHC mounting plate on the back of the
100ul syringe assembly on the front plate. Remove the mounting plates with the
screwdriver.
3) Install a new PHC.
4) See the section of syringe replacing for reference.
9.61.4 PHCs in the Autoloader

Note: the layout of the PHCs and connected parts in the autoloader are shown in the
figure below.
Figure 9-124 PHCs in the autoloader
Type Name Function ID of

connecting
wire
Interruptible Unloading pusher home

Unloading motor initialization SE2
position sensor
photoelectric
sensor Feeding motor home Feeding motor initialization
SE3
position sensor
Last tube rack unloading Determine the initial position of

SE4
position sensor unloading for the last tube rack
Loading motor home Loading motor initialization

SE5
9-113
position sensor
Loading motor end Determine the end position of the

SE6
position sensor loading motor
Tube rack home position Detect the position of the tube

SE7
counter racks on the right tray
Tube rack end position Detect the position of the tube

SE8
counter racks on the left tray
Unloading tray state Detect whether the unloading

SE29
detection sensor tray is full
Micro-switch Tube Rack detection Detect whether there is any tube

S2
micro-switch rack on the loading tray
Tub Rack Detection Micro-Switch
Tools
M1.5 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
1 Remove the micro-switch with the cross-headed screwdriver;
2 Unplug the connecting wire of the micro-switch. Install a new micro-switch and plug
the connecting wire.
1 Micro-switch M07-00143S---
PHC of Tube Counter Unit
Tools
Procedure
3) Remove the whole counter unit;
4) Remove the M4X10 cross-recessed panhead screw with the 107 cross-headed screw
driver, and then remove the PHC in the counter, and replace with a new one.
9-114
Figure 9-125 Removing the PHC of Tube Counter Unit
1 Sensor 011-000022-00 3 Cross-recessed panhead screw \

M4X10
PHC of Loading Unit
See 9.60.
PHC of Feeding Unit
See 9.60.
PHC of Unloading Unit
See 9.60.
Unloading Tray State Detection PHC (Transmissive)
Tools
Procedure
Note: this PHC is the same with the tube detection PHC.
1) Remove the autoloader assembly;
9-115
3) Remove the transmissive PHC with the screwdriver, and unplug the wires;
4) Install a new PHC.
Figure 9-126 Removing the unloading tray state detection PHC
1 Transmissive PHC 801-3201-00036-00 Small panhead \

composite screw
M3X8
2 Mounting plate of \ Deck plate of the \

the transmissive autoloader (A)
PHC
9.61.5 PHC of the Auto Mixing Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1) Open the front cover and the left door of the analyzer;
2) Find the PHC of the mixing assembly, and the remove the fixing screw with the
cross-headed screwdriver. Install a new PHC.
9-116
Figure 9-127 Location of the PHC and stepping motor
No. Name No. Name
1 Piercing cylinder PHC 5 Pincher rotation home position PHC
2 Pincher lifting end position PHC 6 Pincher rotation stepping motor
3 Pincher lifting home position 7 Pincher telescoping end position PHC

PHC
4 Pincher rotation end position 8 Pincher telescoping home position PHC

PHC
All PHCs in the mixing assembly shares one material code. Their FRU codes are as
follows:
1 Sensor 011-000021-00
9.61.6 Blood sensor

Tools
A set of inner hexagon spanners
Procedure
2) There are 2 blood sensors, both on the left of the SRV. Remove the inner hexagon
screws fixing the sensors using the inner hexagon spanner. Unplug the connecting
9-117
wires, and then remove the sensors;
3) Install new sensors.
Figure 9-128 Removing blood sensors
1 Blood sensor 011-000041-00 2 M3 inner hexagon screw /
9.61.7 Fluorescent Reagent Sensor

Tools
A set of inner hexagon spanners
Procedure
1) Open the front cover of the analyzer; remove the inner hexagon screw fixing the sensor
with the spanner;
Figure 9-129 Removing fluorescent sensor
9-118
1 Fluorescent 2 M3 inner /
011-000047-00
reagent sensor hexagon screw
9.61.8 Tube Maintenance

Tools
Blade, tweezers, cross-headed screwdriver
Note:
Since Tube 9 is a hard gas tube, use tweezers or diagonal pliers while plugging
and unplugging. Do not use violence in service which may damage the parts
that the tube is connected to (e.g. valve port);
The tube connecting the piercing probe and the SRV is of fixed capacity. When
this tube is damaged, make a FRU application for a new one to replace.
In SRV maintenance, after the TEFLON tube is unplugged, it shall be replaced

by a new one, since loose connection may cause the formation of too may
crystals, and the performance of the analyzer may compromise.
Double tube can not be replugged since the TEFLON tube inside may get
damaged and lead to liquid leakage. Therefore, replace any double tube if it is
unplugged in maintenance.
Note: the tube from the piercing probe to the SRV is a independent unit in FRU, and is
calibrated separately.
If you want to replace this tube, unscrew the connector to the bottom of the piercing probe,
remove the blood sensor, and then remove the tube and install a new one.
Figure 9-130 Autoloading sampling tube

9-119
1 Autoloading
801-3201-00044-00
sampling tube
9.61.9 Other Parts

Tools
Procedure
1) Put on gloves and replace manually.
Figure 9-131 Service parts 1

Figure 9-132 Service parts 2
1 Waste 3 Waste collecting 043-000672-00

collecting 801-3100-00205-00 tray (open-vial)
tray (SRV)
2 Waste 4
Tube rack (rotating
collecting
801-3110-00156-00 scanning 801-3201-00062-00
tray
supported)
(autoloading)
9-120
1 Hand-held barcode 3 Tube rack 801-3110-00194-00

scanner, with USB 023-000056-00 (syringe tube)
connector
2 Supporting board of
diluent container 801-3110-00167-00
(FRU)
9-121
10 Error Code
10.1 Overview
There are 2 areas for error information in count screen. One is message area which is on the
right side and the other one is at the bottom which is called error area. Please refer to
Figure10-1 for details.
The reason why we divide it into 2 parts is to separate errors of analyzer itself from errors
which come from samples.
Message Area
Error Area
M-68DR expired
Figure 10-1 Error Information Areas
In message area, there are mainly 3 kinds of messages, insufficient aspiration, clogging and
HGB analysis abnormal. Normally, insufficient aspiration is displayed in WBC Message area,
while clog and HGB channel abnormal are displayed in RBC Message area.
Information of Message Area is resulted by 2 possibilities.
1: If algorithm detects abnormal result, it will display message in message area. This kind of
message does not have error code and we dont need to pay too much attention to it.
2: Abnormal is detected from signals. For example, blood sensor detects aspiration abnormal.
It also may be caused by clumped blood, so it is not recognized as analyzer error thus it is
displayed in Message Area.
Normally, if there is information in Message Area, user doesnt need to do other operation but
to re-test or re-collect blood sample.
10-1
Information in Error Area mainly indicates errors of analyzer itself, such as pressure or
temperature abnormal, reagent insufficient, etc. When this kind of error happens, it needs user
to do some certain operation to remove the error, or it needs engineer to solve the problem.
For errors in Error Area, you can find the error code and description when you click it, very
easy and clear to understand. As long as we know the possible causes, we can repair it
accordingly. Figure 10-2 shows the screen after clicking the Error Area.
Figure 10-2 Error Code and Description in Error Area
In DMU log, Error of Message Area is classified as Error Event, while Error of Error Area is in
both Error Event and Report Error, referring to Figure10-3. So to find Error Area errors we
only need to check Report Error item.
For errors in Message Area, we can only separate them by error codes. Error code is like this:
0X3201XXXX-XXXX-XXXX, in which the first 8 bits are error codes while the rest 2 segments
respectively indicate the current software and the sequence which analyzer is running when
error happens.
Error code of Message Area starts with 0X3201, while Error Area error code starts with
0X0000.
Figure 10-3 Error Code in Log
10-2
10.2 Message Area Error
10.2.1 Insufficient Aspiration
Principle
In autoloader mode, analyzer detects if aspiration is sufficient by analyzing signals

from blood sensors. As shown in Figure 10-4, there are 2 sensors, the first one is
before SRV and the second is after SRV. The first sensor detects sample before it
goes into SRV while the second sensor detects sample after it goes out of SRV.
Analyzer judges aspiration status according to the signals of these two sensors and
notifies user if it is abnormal.
Figure 10-4 Principle of Blood Aspiration
Error Code
Table 10-1 Error Code for Insufficient Aspiration
Error ID Error Name Principle Possible Reasons
Can only be seen in

Insufficient Blood sensor 1 detects tiny bubbles error Log. It will not
0x32010001
aspiration inside sample. affect test result and no
need for troubleshooting.
Blood sensor 1 does not detect

Insufficient
0x32010002 sample during the second time Sample not enough;
aspiration
aspiration.
Blood sensor 1 detects bubbles in 1Sample not enough;

Insufficient
0x32010003 the 20ul sample area during the
aspiration 2Blood is viscous;
second time aspiration.
Insufficient Blood sensor 1 does not detect 1Analyzer does not

0x32010004
aspiration blood signal after the isolation air. aspirate sample;
10-3
2Sample tube is empty;
The tube from piecing

Insufficient Blood sensor 1 detects sample but
0x32010005 needle to SRV is not
aspiration blood sensor 2 does not
standardized;
Blood sensor 1 detects bubbles in 1Sample not enough;

Insufficient
0x32010014 the end of 4ul sample area during
aspiration 2Blood is viscous;
the second time aspiration.
Insufficient Blood sensor 1 does not detect Blood clots block

0x32010015
aspiration isolation air signal. piercing needle;
High light transmittance

Insufficient Blood sensor 1 detects signal which sample, such as
0x32010016
aspiration seems like diluent after isolation air. diluents, WBC linear QC
and PLT QC;
Blood sensor 1 detects many

Insufficient There are many bubbles
0x00000006 bubbles in the diluent before
aspiration in the tube;
aspiration.
Blood sensor 2 detects many

Insufficient There are many bubbles
0x00000007 bubbles in the diluent before
aspiration in the tube;
aspiration.
Possible cause
If Insufficient Aspiration error happens very frequently, it may be caused by the following
reasons:
1.Anticoagulation is not good which causes blood clotting;
2.Special sample, such as too viscous blood sample(low possibility to happen

continuously) or high light transmittance sample;
3.Note: If hospital usually tests this kind of blood sample, it is recommended to disable
blood sensor or use open vial model.
4.Piercing needle is blocked;
5.The tube from piercing needle to SRV is not standardized;
6.Tube abnormal, with many bubbles.
10.2.2 Clog
Principle
Software analyzes aperture voltage and pulse signal systematically to decide if there is clog
error. If there is clog error, result will not be displayed and system will give error message.
10-4
Error Code
Table 10-2 Clog Error Code
Error
Error ID Principle
Name
Aperture voltage exceeds expected range. Expected range is

determined by the following formula, in which T is diluent
0x32018002 Clogging temperature:
16 * (1 + (29 - T) *1.8%) 2.0 < Vhole < 16 * (1 + (29 - T) *1.8%) + 2.0
In the period from the 5 to 11.8s after constant current starts up

analyzer will detect aperture voltage every 0.1s. If there are 3
0x32018003 Clogging
continuous dots whose total variance exceeds 5AD, analyzer will
report clogging error
Impedance signal is interfered. In this case, algorithm will analyze

0x32018004 Clogging statistic information of pulse signals morphologic status to
determine if it is abnormal
Caused by aspiration problem. Blood sensor1 detects bubbles in

the 4ul sample area of the tube. 4ul area is mainly used for HGB
0x32010013 Clogging
and RBC channel. If lots of tiny bubbles are detected, error will be
given out
NOTE: Principle of error code 0013 is different from others. This error is given out by
checking aspiration status. In order to prevent RBC and HGB parameter from fluctuating,
analyzer will give clog error if blood sensor1 detects lots of tiny bubbles in the sample area
which is used for RBC and HGB channel. Normally user only needs to retest if this error
happens and problem will be removed.
Possible Reasons:
Normally clog error does not happen continuously and frequently. If it happens just by
chance, we just need to click Remove Error to remove it.
If it happens continuously, it might be caused by the following reasons:
1.Sample probe blocked;
2.Aperture blocked;
3.Signal interfered;
4.Bubbles exist in the end of aspirated sample.
10-5
10.2.3 HGB Analysis Abnormal
Principle
Software detects HGB channel signal and result. If there is anything abnormal, it will give
error.
Error Code
Table 10-3 HGB Channel Error Code
Error ID Error Name Principle
1Sensor detects that sample for HGB channel is abnormal,

HGB analysis such as bubbles;
0x00008028
abn
2There are no bubbles for mixing in HGB channel.
NOTE: It is different from HGB background abnormal.
Possible Reasons:
If it happens continuously, it might be caused by the following reasons:
1.No bubble is generated for mixing. Please check if tube T206 and T208 are blocked or if
there is liquid left in these tubes, which may result no bubbles for mixing;
2.SV 71 problem, broken or dirty;
10.3 Error Area Error

10.3.1 For Reagents
Principle
Detection principle is the same for lyses and diluent. When there is reagent, signal from
the sensor will be different from that when there is no reagent. When reagents go through
the detection tube, analyzer will detect the signal from sensor and give out error message
if abnormal. Please refer to Figure10-5.
Sensors for fluorescence reagents are the same to blood sensor, so is the principle.
10-6
Sensor
Detection
Reagent
tube
container
Figure 10-5 Reagent Detection Principle
Errors for reagents consist of no reagent error, reagent insufficient error, reagents need to
be replaced or primed after being reloaded, reagents expired and reagent sensor error.
Error Code
1No Reagent Error
Error is given out when detection sensor detects that there is no reagent or there are
bubbles in the detection tube. It may be caused by broken connector, tubing leaking or
empty reagent container. The difference between no reagent error and reagent insufficient
is that: When there is no reagent error, registered reagent volume has not run out and
normally user can remove it by clicking Remove Error. If there is really no reagent, user
needs to reload new reagent barcode and replace reagent.
Table 10-4 No Reagent Error Code
Reagent detection board detects bubbles or

0x00001001 No M-68DS DILUENT
no reagent in DS diluent detection tube.

0x00001002 No M-68LH LYSE
no reagent in LH lyse detection tube

0x00001003 No M-68LD LYSE
no reagent in LD lyse detection tube

0x00001004 No M-68LB LYSE
no reagent in LB lyse detection tube

0x00001005 No M-68DR DILUENT
no reagent in DR diluent detection tube

0x00001006 No M-68LN LYSE
no reagent in LN lyse detection tube
10-7
Fluorescent reagent detection sensor
0x00001053 No M-68FD DYE detects bubbles or no fluorescent reagent for
Diff channel
No M-68FR DYE Fluorescent reagent detection sensor

0x00001054 detects bubbles or no fluorescent reagent for
RET channel
Fluorescent reagent detection sensor

0x00001055 No M-68FN DYE detects bubbles or no fluorescent reagent for
NRBC channel
Analyzer detects bubbles or no reagent in

0x00001080 No M-68 NRBC Kit
either LN channel or FN channel
Analyzer detects bubbles or no reagent in

0x00001081 No M-68 RET Kit
either DR channel or FR channel
2Reagent Insufficient
Error is given out when registered reagent volume runs out. In this case, you need to
reload new reagent barcode and replace reagent.
Table 10-5 Reagent Insufficient Error Code
Registered volume of M-68DS diluent

0x00001041 Insufficient M-68DS diluent
runs out
Registered volume of M-68DR diluent

0x00001042 Insufficient M-68DR diluent
runs out
Registered volume of M-68LD lyse runs

0x00001043 Insufficient M-68LD LYSE
out
Registered volume of M-68LN lyse runs

0x00001044 Insufficient M-68LN LYSE
out
Registered volume of M-68LB lyse runs

0x00001045 Insufficient M-68LB LYSE
out
Registered volume of M-68LH lyse runs

0x00001046 Insufficient M-68LH LYSE
out
0x00001047 Insufficient M-68FN DYE Registered volume of M-68FN runs out
0x00001048 Insufficient M-68FR DYE Registered volume of M-68FR runs out
0x00001049 Insufficient M-68FD DYE Registered volume of M-68FD runs out
Registered volume of M-68 NRBC kit

0x00001082 Insufficient M-68 NRBC Kit
runs out
Registered volume of M-68 RET kit runs

0x00001083 Insufficient M-68 RET Kit
out
10-8
3After reloading analyzer will prime or replace reagent.
After loading new barcode, software will give error. Please click Remove Error and
analyzer will replace or prime reagent automatically. If the former reagent is expired,
analyzer will execute priming after loading new barcode. If it is not expired, analyzer will
execute replacing.
Table 10-6 Error Code for Priming or Replacing Reagent after Loading
If M-68DS is expired, after loading

0x00001061 Prime after loading M-68DS diluent new barcode, software will request
customer to prime reagent.
If M-68DR is expired, after loading

0x00001062 Prime after loading M-68DR diluent new barcode, software will request
customer to prime reagent
If M-68LD is expired, after loading

0x00001063 Prime after loading M-68LD LYSE new barcode, software will request
If M-68LN is expired, after loading

0x00001064 Prime after loading M-68LN LYSE new barcode, software will request
If M-68LB is expired, after loading

0x00001065 Prime after loading M-68LB LYSE new barcode, software will request
If M-68LH is expired, after loading

0x00001066 Prime after loading M-68LH LYSE new barcode, software will request
If M-68FN is expired, after loading

0x00001067 Prime after loading M-68FN DYE new barcode, software will request
If M-68FR is expired, after loading

0x00001068 Prime after loading M-68FR DYE new barcode, software will request
If M-68FD is expired, after loading

0x00001069 Prime after loading M-68FD DYE new barcode, software will request
If M-68DS is used up, after loading

new barcode, software will request
0x00001071 Replace after loading M-68DS diluent
customer to execute replacing
reagent;
If M-68DR is used up, after loading

0x00001072 Replace after loading M-68DR diluent new barcode, software will request
10-9
reagent;
If M-68LD is used up, after loading

0x00001073 Replace after loading M-68LD LYSE
reagent;
If M-68LN is used up, after loading

0x00001074 Replace after loading M-68LN LYSE
reagent;
If M-68LB is used up, after loading

0x00001075 Replace after loading M-68LB LYSE
reagent;
If M-68LH is used up, after loading

0x00001076 Replace after loading M-68LH LYSE
reagent;
If M-68FN is used up, after loading

0x00001077 Replace after loading M-68FN DYE
reagent;
If M-68FR is used up, after loading

0x00001078 Replace after loading M-68FR DYE
reagent;
If M-68FD is used up, after loading

0x00001079 Replace after loading M-68FD DYE
reagent;
If M-68 NRBC kit is expired, after

0x00001084 Prime after loading M-68 NRBC Kit loading new barcode, software will
request customer to prime reagent;
If M-68 RET kit is expired, after

0x00001085 Prime after loading M-68 RET Kit loading new barcode, software will
request customer to prime reagent;
If M-68 NRBC kit is used up, after

loading new barcode, software will
0x00001086 Replace after loading M-68 NRBC Kit
request customer to execute
replacing reagent;
If M-68 RET kit is used up, after

loading new barcode, software will
0x00001087 Replace after loading M-68 RET Kit
request customer to execute
replacing reagent;
10-10
4Reagent Expired
Reagent exceeds expiration period. Please load new barcode and execute priming.
Table 10-7 Reagent Expired Error Code
0x00001011 M-68DS DILUENT expiredM-68DS DILUENT exceeds expiration period
0x00001012 M-68LH LYSE expired M-68LH LYSE exceeds expiration period
0x00001013 M-68LB LYSE expired M-68LB LYSE exceeds expiration period
0x00001014 M-68LD LYSE expired M-68LD LYSE exceeds expiration period
0x00001015 M-68DR DILUENT expiredM-68DR DILUENT exceeds expiration period
0x00001016 M-68LN LYSE expired M-68LN LYSE exceeds expiration period
0x00001017 M-68FD DYE expired M-68FD DYE exceeds expiration period
0x00001018 M-68FR DYE expired M-68FR DYE exceeds expiration period
0x00001019 M-68FN DYE expired M-68FN DYE exceeds expiration period
5Reagent Sensor Error
It includes waste floater and fluorescent reagent sensor error.
Table 10-8 Error Code for Reagent Sensor
Self-test voltage of diff channel

0x00001056 DIFF fluorochrome sensor error fluorescent reagent sensor exceeds
normal range
Self-test voltage of RET channel

0x00001057 RET fluorochrome sensor error fluorescent reagent sensor exceeds
normal range
Self-test voltage of NRBC channel

0x00001058 NRBC fluorochrome sensor error fluorescent reagent sensor exceeds
normal range
Waste floater flows up. When analyzer

detects open circuit signal it will report
0x00001010 Waste container full
error (When floater does not flow up,
the circuit is closed).
10.3.2 Temperature Error

Principle
10-11
Temperature controlling system includes pre-heating bath, reaction bath and analyzer
temperature. Analyzer uses a sensor to detect temperature inside the analyzer. For
pre-heating bath and reaction bath, heating system consists of 3 parts, heater,
temperature sensor and overheat protector. Heater is used for heating, temperature
sensor for detecting while protector is used for protecting.
Temperature error is divided into two kinds, working temperature error and running
temperature error. Running temperature error means analyzer detects that temperature is
abnormal while testing sample or executing some sequence and gives error. Working
temperature error means analyzer detects that temperature is abnormal when it is not
running sample test.
Temperature error also can be divided into 4 kinds: low, high, extremely low and extremely
high. Extremely low or extremely high means temperature exceeds the required working
temperature, and test is not allowed. Low or high means temperature exceeds running
temperature and user can also run test but result may become inaccurate.
Error Code
1Startup Temperature Error
Table 10-9 Temperature Error Code for during Startup
During startup, after long times waiting,

Reaction bath temperature
0x00002011 temperature in reaction bath is still low
initialization process abnormal
than 39C

Flow cell temperature initialization
0x00002012 temperature in flow cell is still lower than
process abnormal
29C

Sheath fluid bath temperature
0x00002013 temperature in sheath fluid bath is still
3C lower than target

Optical system temperature
0x00002014 temperature of optical system is still
lower than 30C

Preheating bath temperature
0x00002015 temperature in pre-heating bath is still
3C lower than target

Diluent temperature initialization
0x00002016 temperature of diluent is still lower
process abnormal
than12C
2Analyzer Temperature Error
Table 10-10 Error Code for Analyzer Temperature

10-12
Analyzer working temperature is in the

0x00002101 Analyzer temperature high
range of(36C ~45C)
Analyzer working temperature is in the

0x00002102 Analyzer temperature low
range of(3C ~12C)
Analyzer temperature extremely Analyzer working temperature is higher

0x00002103
high than 45C
Analyzer temperature extremely Analyzer working temperature is lower

0x00002104
low than 3C
Analyzer running temperature is in the

0x00002111 Analyzer temperature high
range of( 36C ~45C)
Analyzer running temperature is in the

0x00002112 Analyzer temperature low
range of( 3C ~12C)
Analyzer temperature extremely Analyzer running temperature is higher

0x00002113
high than 45C
Analyzer temperature extremely Analyzer running temperature is lower

0x00002114
low than 3C
3Working Temperature of Reaction Bath and Heating Bath
Table 10-11 Error Code for Working Temperature of Reaction Bath and Heating Bath
Reaction bath working temperature is in

0x00002021 Reaction bath temperature high
the range of (45 C ~ 46 C)
Flow Cell working temperature is in the

0x00002022 Flow cell temperature high
range of (38C ~ 45C)
Sheath chamber working temperature is

0x00002023 Sheath fluid bath temperature high 3C higher than target but lower than
45C
Optical system working temperature is in

0x00002024 Optical system temperature high
the range of (38C ~ 45C)
Pre-heating bath working temperature is

0x00002025 Preheating bath temperature high 3C higher than target but lower than
59C
Diluent working temperature is in the

0x00002026 Diluent temperature high
Reaction bath working temperature is in

0x00002031 Reaction bath temperature low
10-13
Flow cell working temperature is in the
0x00002032 Flow cell temperature low
Sheath fluid bath working temperature is

0x00002033 Sheath fluid bath temperature low 3C lower than target but higher than
28C
Optical system working temperature is in

0x00002034 Optical system temperature low
Preheating bath working temperature is

0x00002035 Preheating bath temperature low 3C lower than target but higher than
38C
Diluent working temperature is in the

0x00002036 Diluent temperature low
range of (3C ~ 12C)
Reaction bath temperature Reaction bath working temperature is

0x00002041
extremely high higher than 46C
Flow cell temperature extremely Flow cell working temperature is higher

0x00002042
high than 45C
Sheath fluid bath temperature Sheath chamber working temperature is

0x00002043
Optical system temperature Optical system working temperature is

0x00002044
Preheating bath temperature Pre-heating bath working temperature is

0x00002045
Diluent working temperature is higher

0x00002046 Diluent temperature extremely high
than 45C
Reaction bath temperature Reaction bath working temperature is

0x00002081
extremely low lower than 38C
Flow cell temperature extremely Flow cell working temperature is lower

0x00002082
low than 28C
Sheath fluid bath temperature Sheath fluid bath working temperature

0x00002083
extremely low is lower than 28C
Optical system temperature Optical system working temperature is

0x00002084
Preheating bath temperature Preheating bath working temperature is

0x00002085
Diluent working temperature is lower

0x00002086 Diluent temperature extremely low
than 3C
4Running Temperature Error of Reaction Bath and Heating Bath
10-14
Table 10-12 Error Code for Reaction Bath and Heating Bath
Reaction bath running temperature is in

0x00002051 Reaction bath temperature high
Flow cell running temperature is in the

0x00002052 Flow cell temperature high
Sheath chamber running temperature is

0x00002053 Sheath fluid bath temperature high 3C higher than target but lower than
45C
Optical system running temperature is in

0x00002054 Optical system temperature high
Preheating bath running temperature is

0x00002055 Preheating bath temperature high 3C higher than target but lower than
59C
Diluent running temperature is in the

0x00002056 Diluent temperature high
range of (42C ~ 45C
Reaction bath running temperature is in

0x00002061 Reaction bath temperature low
Flow cell running temperature is in the

0x00002062 Flow cell temperature low
Sheath fluid bath running temperature is

0x00002063 Sheath fluid bath temperature low 3C lower than target but higher than
28C
Optical system running temperature is in

0x00002064 Optical system temperature low
Preheating bath running temperature is

0x00002065 Preheating bath temperature low 3C lower than target but higher than
38C
Diluent running temperature is in the

0x00002066 Diluent temperature low
range of (3C ~ 12C)
Reaction bath temperature Reaction bath running temperature is

0x00002071
Flow cell temperature extremely Flow cell running temperature is higher

0x00002072
high than 45C
Sheath fluid bath temperature Sheath chamber running temperature is

0x00002073
Optical system temperature Optical system running temperature is

0x00002074
0x00002075 Preheating bath temperature Preheating bath running temperature is
10-15
Diluent running temperature is higher

0x00002076 Diluent temperature extremely high
than 45C
Reaction bath temperature Reaction bath running temperature is

0x00002091
Flow cell temperature extremely Flow cell running temperature is lower

0x00002092
low than 28C
Sheath fluid bath temperature Sheath fluid bath running temperature is

0x00002093
Optical system temperature Optical system running temperature is

0x00002094
Preheating bath temperature Preheating bath running temperature is

0x00002095
Diluent running temperature is lower

0x00002096 Diluent temperature extremely low
than 3C
Possible Reasons
This kind of error is mainly caused by:
Power source for heating is broken, such as transformer;
Heater damaged;
Temperature sensor broken
10.3.3 Pressure Error

Principle
Analyzer has 6 pressure sensors which are PS1PS6, detecting 250KP, 160KPA, 40KPA,
70KPA, -40KPA and -70KPA respectively. Analyzer will detect pressure regularly. If there is
any pressure out of normal range, it will give error.
Pressure error is divided into two situations. The first situation is when analyzer is running
test which we call running status and the other situation is when analyzer is not running
test which we call static status.
Error Code
1Static Pressure Errors
Table 10-13 Error Code for Static Pressure
250KPa static pressure exceeds normal

0x00003011 250kPa pressure out of range
range (210,290)KPA
0x00003012 160kPa pressure out of range 160KPa static pressure exceeds normal
10-16
range(150,170)KPA

range(60,80)KPA

range(30,50)KPA
-40KPa static pressure exceeds normal

0x00003015 -40kPa vacuum out of range
range(-35,45)KPA
-70KPa static pressure exceeds normal

0x00003016 -70kPa vacuum out of range
range(-50,-75)KPA
System detects 250KPA pressure all the time.

0x00003031 250kPa pressure out of range If it exceeds the range(150,300)KPA,
analyzer will give error
2Pressure in Running Status
Table 10-14 Error Code for Running Status Pressure
250kPa pressure out 250KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003021
of range range(150,170)KPA
160kPa pressure out 160KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003022
of range range
70kPa pressure out of 70KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003023
range range(60,80)KPA
40kPa pressure out of 40KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003024
range range(30,50)KPA
-40kPa vacuum out of -40KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003025
range range(-35,-45KPA
-70kPa vacuum out of -70KPa running pressure(during counting) exceeds normal

0x00003026
range range(-50,-75)KPA
Possible Reasons
Pressure error is caused mainly by the following reasons:
Pressure sensor damaged;
Pneumatic unit damaged;
Components of air system damaged, such as filter and air drier;
Tubing leaking;
Liquid is primed back into air system
10-17
10.3.4 Floater Error
Principle
When floater is at top position output signal of the floater is different from that when it is at
lower position. System detects the signal of floater to determine liquid status in the
chamber. If abnormal, error will be given out.
Chambers which use floater are DIL chamber, FCM chamber, SCI chamber, WC1
chamber and WC2 chamber.
Error Code
Table 10-15 Error Code for Floater
After finishing DIL chamber priming, analyzer

0x00004301 DIL cistern floater error will check floater status. Normally it should be
FULL now. If EMPTY, it will give error
After finishing FCM chamber priming,

analyzer will check floater status. Normally it
0x00004302 FCM cistern floater error
should be FULL now. If EMPTY, it will give
error
After finishing SCI chamber priming, analyzer

0x00004303 SCI cistern floater error will check floater status. Normally it should be
FULL now. If EMPTY, it will give error
After finishing WC1 chamber draining,

0x00004304 WC1 floater error
should be EMPTY now. If FULL, it will give
error
After finishing WC2 chamber draining,

0x00004305 WC2 floater error
should be EMPTY now. If FULL, it will give
error
Possible Reasons
Floater error may be caused by broken floater, liquid priming or draining problem.
10.3.5 Analyzer Status Error

Principle
System detects analyzer status by sensors, including front cover and optical system.
There are 2 kinds of errors for front cover error. The first one happens when it is running
test, whose error removing does not cost long time. The other kind happens when
analyzer is running test or executing other liquid sequence. Analyzer will reset the system
10-18
during removing error, so it will cost longer time.
Error Code
Table 10-16 Analyzer Status Error Code
Analyzer detects that front cover sensor is not

0x00006001 Front cover open blocked when it is running test or executing
other sequence
There is a micro switch on the cover of optical

system. When it is covered, the switch is
0x00006002 Optical system cover open
pressed. If the cover is opened, analyzer will
give error
Analyzer detects that front cover sensor is not

0x00006003 Front cover open
blocked when it is not running any sequence
10.3.6 Syringe Error

Principle
Analyzer has one RBC syringe(100ul), one WBC syringe(250ul) and one whole blood
syringe(2.5ml). Each syringe has one motor and one home sensor. System detects sensor
signal to check if syringe is working normally. If abnormal, error will be given out.
Error Code
Table 10-17 Error Code for Syringe
Error Code Error Name Principle
RBC syringe Analyzer does not detect correct moving signal of RBC
0x00004402
error syringe
RBC syringe motor position is different from expected(It

RBC syringe
0x00004403 should be at the home position but actually home position
error
sensor is not blocked )
RBC syringe motor position is different from expected(It

RBC syringe
0x00004404 should not be at the home position but actually home
error
position sensor is blocked )
RBC syringe motor position is different from expected (It

should be at the home position but actually home position
RBC syringe
0x00004405 sensor is not blocked). It is detected when analyzer gives
error
aspiration or priming command, while 0x00004403 detects
at the beginning of movement
0x00004406 RBC syringe motor position is different from expected (It

RBC syringe
should not be at the home position but actually home
10-19
error position sensor is blocked). It is detected when analyzer
gives aspiration or priming command, while 0x00004404
detects at the beginning of movement
WBC syringe Analyzer does not detect correct moving signal of WBC
0x00004411
error syringe
WBC syringe motor position is different from expected(It

WBC syringe
0x00004412 should be at the home position but actually home position
error
sensor is not blocked )
WBC syringe motor position is different from expected(It

WBC syringe
0x00004413 should not be at the home position but actually home
error
position sensor is blocked )
WBC syringe motor position is different from expected (It

should be at the home position but actually home position
WBC syringe
0x00004414 sensor is not blocked). It is detected when analyzer gives
error
aspiration or priming command, while 0x00004412 detects
at the beginning of movement
WBC syringe motor position is different from expected (It

should not be at the home position but actually home
WBC syringe
0x00004415 position sensor is blocked). It is detected when analyzer
error
Whole blood
Analyzer does not detect correct moving signal of Whole
0x00004420 aspiration syringe
blood aspiration syringe
error
Whole blood Whole blood aspiration syringe motor position is different

0x00004421 aspiration syringe from expected(It should be at the home position but
error actually home position sensor is not blocked )

0x00004422 aspiration syringe from expected(It should not be at the home position but
error actually home position sensor is blocked )

aspiration syringe from expected (It should be at the home position but
0x00004423 error actually home position sensor is not blocked). It is detected
when analyzer gives aspiration or priming command, while
0x00004421 detects at the beginning of movement
Whole blood WBC syringe motor position is different from expected (It
aspiration syringe should not be at the home position but actually home
0x00004424 error position sensor is blocked). It is detected when analyzer
Possible Reasons
Syringe error is mainly caused by broken motors, broken sensors or hardware problem.
10-20
10.3.7 Error for Mixing Unit and Autoloader
Principle
Both of Mixing unit and autoloader determine position status by checking sensor signal. If
abnormal, analyzer gives error.
Error Code
Table 10-18 Error Code for Mixing unit and Autoloader
In open vial mode, the sensor of sampling unit

0x00004502 Probe wipe error
does not detect correct action of probe wipe
Sensor detects that mixing motor is not rotating

0x00004601 Stirring motor error
or rotation speed is not enough
Sensor does not detect correct movement for the

cylinder of pincher (horizontal) or the cylinder
0x00005001 Pincher abnormal
does not arrive at the expected position in
specified time
Sensor does not detect correct movement for the

cylinder of pincher (vertical) or the cylinder does
0x00005007 Pincher abnormal
not arrive at the expected position in specified
time
Sensor does not detect correct action for mixing

0x00005013 Mixing module abnormal
module
It is expected that there is tube at the piercing

0x00005020 Piercing module abnormal position but it is detected that sensor is not
blocked
It is expected that there is no tube at the piercing

0x00005021 Piercing module abnormal
position but it is detected that sensor is blocked
If any component of autoloader, mixing module

Autoloader not properly
0x00005025 and scanning unit(optional) failed in self test,
initialized
analyzer will give error
Tube rack is moved manually during testing, then

0x00005028 Feeding module error counter sensor will detect abnormal signal and
give error
When feeding, start position and end position

0x00005029 Feeding module error sensor will detect together. If the signal is
abnormal, error will be given out
0x00005030 Cannot unload since the Unloading module end position sensor is blocked
unloading end position
10-21
photo coupler is blocked
Tube rack is not unloaded because of abnormal

action. When executing autoloader initialization
0x00005031 Feeding module blocked
and resetting, tube rack is detected in the
feeding area
Unloading module sensor does not detect

0x00005032 Unloading module error
correct unloading action
Tube rack not properly When autoloader is loading tube rack, micro
0x00005034
accommodated switch does not detect tube rack
Sensor does not detect normal vertical

0x00005038 Feeding module error
movement of feeding assisting pin
Feeding module sensor does not detect correct

0x00005041 Feeding module error
feeding action
Rotary scanning module sensor does not detect

Rotary scanning module
0x00005045 correct vertical movement for rotation head or it
action unidentified
is not in the expected status
Barcode length out of limit or barcode reading

0x00005051 Barcode reading error
overtime
Internal barcode scanner self test failed. If

Internal barcode scanner
0x00005052 scanner is damaged or not connected you will
error
get this error
Unloading tray end sensor is detected to be

0x00005070 Unloading tray full
blocked
Possible Cause
This kind of error is mainly caused by:
1. Motor broken
2. Sensor broken
3. Position is not adjusted
4. User operation problem
10.3.8 Power Supply Error

Principle
Analyzer detects the power output to check if power module is normal or not.
Error Code
Table 10-19 Error Code for Power Supply
10-22
+12v of drive control board exceeds normal range

0x00006013 Power supply error
(10.8,13.2)V
+24v of drive control board exceeds normal

0x00006014 Power supply error
range(22.0,29.0)V
0x00006015 Power supply error A12V exceeds normal range
0x00006016 Power supply error A-12V exceeds normal range(-12.6,-11.4)V
Possible Reasons
Error can be caused by boards, power input or fuse problem.
10.3.9 System Error

Principle
Analyzer determines if it is abnormal by detecting signal or test result.
Error Code
Table 10-20 Error Code for System
0x00006021 Background abnormal Background exceeds specified range
Not initialized in
0x00006022 Analyzer does not finish the whole startup process
startup
0x00008001 HGB abnormal HGB blank voltage exceeds the range of (3.2, 4.8)V
Before the analyzer is shipped from our factory or

when replacing optical system, system will record the
Laser emitter needs to
0x00008005 initial PD current. If the actual value is 5% higher or
be replaced
lower than this recorded value, analyzer will report
Laser PD current abnormal error
Fluorescent signal RBC count in RET channel is more than 5000 and CG
0x00008007
abnormal position of Fluorescent channel is lower than 320
10-23
11 Preventive Maintenance
11.1 Tools and Consumables
11.1.1 Instruction
This manual introduces maintenance for BC-6800/6600, including maintenance contents, maintenance
frequency and parts that need to be replaced regularly.
11.1.2 Tools
Num Name Quantity Remark
1 Cross-headed screw driver 1 pc
2 Flat tip screw driver 1 pc
3 M2.5 Allen wrench 1 pc
4 diagonal cutting pliers 1 pc
5 Nippers 1 pc
6 Blade 1 pc
11.1.3 Consumables
Num Name Quantity Remark
1 Gloves 2-3 pairs
2 Paper 1 Roll
3 Middle-sized Cable Tie 8 pcs
4 Cotton Swab 1 bag
11-1
5 Cleaning tissue 3 pcs
6 Probe Cleanser 1 bottle
7 5ml Syringe 1 pc
8 7um Standard Particle To Check Optical System Status
9 Middle level Quality Control 2 bottles To Check Repeatability
10 High level Quality Control 1 bottle To Check Carry-over
11.2 Service Plan
11.2.1 Maintenance Frequency
It contains quarterly, half yearly and yearly maintenance.
11.2.2 Maintenance Contents
11.2.2.1 Flow chart
11-2
1 Wear gloves when performing maintenance. After maintenance, clean your hands with cleanser or
disinfectant.
2 Probe cleanser is one kind of cleanser with strong causticity. Be careful not to let it spill to your skin or
clothes. If it spills to your skin or clothes, clean with plenty of water immediately or it may hurt your skin or
damage your clothes.
11-3
11.2.2.2 Maintenance Checking List
Hospital name Department: Person in charge
Model Serial number Telephone
Frequency Contents Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec
Clean open vial sample probe and probe wipe
Clean piercing needle and probe wipe
Check piercing needle attrite status

Quarterly
Clean open-vial waste tray
(By User)
Clean piercing waste tray
Probe cleanser maintenance
Check device state
Half-Yearly Clean share valve and waste tray for SRV
(By Engineer) Clear crystal in syringe(Just in case)
Check waste chamber floater
Check buffer bath
11-4
Check air filter
Check tube pincher for autoloading mode
Check mixer of WBC bath
Maintain the tube for pinch valve
Check the tube for HGB bubble mixing
Check reagent cap assembly
Replace piercing needle
Replace sheath fluid filter and NRBC pump
Yearly Clean the nets for whole device heat-dissipating

and filtering
(By Engineer)
Clean crystal of solenoid valves(Just in case)
Replace rotation pressing head
11-5
11.2.2.3 Steps
Quarterly maintenance
Item Maintenance Steps Tools and Remark

contents Consumables
Clean open y Clear the 1 Remove diluent tube and waste tube from the probe wipe; Nippers
vial sample bloodstain at
2 Take out probe wipe; Cleaning tissue
probe and the bottom of
probe wipe probe wipe 3 Add some drops of probe cleanser onto the bloodstain which is on Probe cleanser
the bottom of probe wipe and keep soaking for 3 minutes;
y Clean
exterior 4 Clean probe wipe with water;
surface of
5 Clean exterior surface of sample probe by cleaning tissue with
sample probe
probe cleanser. Leave probe cleanser to the sample probe for
soaking. Clean it with water after 3 minutes;
6 Reassemble the probe wipe and connect relevant tubes;
7 Run background test for 3~5 times to make sure there is no water
remaining at sample probe and probe wipe;
11-6
Item Maintenance Steps Tools and Consumables Remark
contents
Clean y Clean 1 Clean the bloodstain with probe cleanser and leave Cleaning tissue Caution
piercing bloodstain on probe cleanser to the sample probe for soaking.
Probe cleanser 1)Bloodstain in the piercing
needle and the top of Clean it with water after 3 minutes;
hole must be cleared. If you
probe wipe probe wipe
2 Wipe the bloodstain at the end of piercing needle via cannot clear it, please drip
y Clean cleaning tissue with probe cleanser. Leave probe some drops of probe
bloodstain at cleanser to sample probe for soaking. Clean it with cleanser into it and soak
the end of water after 3 minutes; until the piercing hole
piercing becomes clean.
needle 3 Run background test for 3~5 times to make sure
there is no water remaining at piercing needle and
probe wipe.
Check y Check 1 Remove the air tubes for piercing cylinder; /

piercing piercing
2 Push the piercing needle to let it pass through the
needle needle attrite
probe wipe manually. Check the attrite status of
attrite status status
piercing needle tip. If it is seriously attrite, please
replace it.
11-7
Item Maintenance Steps Tools and Consumables Remark
contents
Clean open y Clear the 1Take out the waste tray and add some drops of probe Probe cleanser
vial waste bloodstain cleanser into it
tray
2Soak for 3~5 minutes, clean it with water and then put it
back;
Clean y Clear the 1 Take out the waste tray and add some drops of probe Probe cleanser
waste tray bloodstain cleanser into it
for piercing
2 Soak for 3~5 minutes, clean it with water and then put it
back;
11-8
Probe y Maintain 1. Click Menu-Service-Maintenance to enter this Probe cleanser Note

cleanser the screen;
1) Probe cleanser maintenance for fluidics will take
maintenanc machine
2. Execute probe cleanser maintenance for flow 91 minutes, consuming 35ml probe cleanser and
e with
cell; 1L diluent;
probe
cleanser 3. Execute probe cleanser maintenance for SRV; 2) Flow cell, SRV, BASO bath, NRBC bath must be
4. Execute probe cleanser maintenance for selected when you execute probe cleanser
BASO channel and NRBC channel; maintenance. Others are optional, according to
your actual situation;
5. Execute probe cleanser maintenance for HGB
bath and aperture;
6. Execute probe cleanser maintenance for

fluidic(This is for the whole device)s;
11-9
Half yearly maintenance

Clea y Clean 1. Turn off the analyzer and pneumatic unit. Wait for 3 minutes M2.5 Allen wrench
n SRV until the pressure is released, then start to disassemble SRV;
Cleaning tissue
SRV
y Clean 2. Open the front cover and support it with the supporting bar;
and Probe cleanser
waste
wast 3. Take out the waste tray and wash it with water;
tray Syringe
e
tray SRV
Waste tray
4. Move the probe wipe to the bottom position manually until it

leaves the sample probe completely;
Caution: If probe wipe does not leave

sample probe completely, sample probe
may get bent when taking out the outer
plate of SRV;
11-10
Sample Probe
Probe Wipe
5. Cut the cable tie of SRV, loosen the fixing screw of tighten
screw, anticlockwise rotate it and take out the tightening screw;
Tightening screw
6. Take out SRV assembly slowly, making middle plate leave the
fixing rod of cylinder. Rotate and take out outer plate. Note that
there is diluent in SRV, so please underlay paper to the SRV.
When operating, please be careful not to damage the tubing;
11-11
Outer plate of SRV
7.
8. After moving middle plate out of guide rod, rotate middle plate
to reduce the attraction from inner plate. Slide the middle plate
to take it out. Note that there is diluent inside, please underlay
paper to the SRV. When servicing, dont pull out SRV by force
in case of any damage of inner plate tubing.
Inner plate
Middle plate
Caution
3 Guide rod
1. Dont pull out SRV by force or add
too much force on the tubes of inner
plate.
11-12
9. Use distilled water or 1:5 diluted probe cleanser to clean the 2. Reagent may leak from SRV when
surface of inner and middle plates. Add the diluted probe taking out it. Please prepare some
cleanser to the surface by syringe. Then use cleaning tissue to paper or dry tissue to save or clean it.
clear crystal. After cleaning with probe cleanser, use distilled
3. When taking out the SRV, be careful
water to wash it again. The cleaning for all the 3 plates are the
not to bend the sample probe.
same.
4. The three plates of SRV are stuck
together tightly, please pull and rotate
them slowly to reduce liquid
attraction. Then slide relatively to
take out the plates.
10. During the cleaning make sure there is not any dirt or dust. Be
careful not to scratch the surface. If there is dirt on the surface,
it may lead blood leakage and get incorrect result.
11. After cleaning, assemble SRV and waste tray in the reverse
order, then insert sample probe to probe wipe and move probe
wipe to the top of probe. When assembling middle plate, the Caution
flat end should be faced up and please put the metal rod
Please use probe cleanser to do this
between the two stop pieces of cylinder;
cleaning but not other kinds of cleanser.
SRV has the function of anticorrosion,
but we still need to wash all the
cleanser off in case of problems caused
by other main parts.
11-13
Caution:
Flat end
1. Make sure that the metal rod of
Stop piece middle plate is placed between the
two stop pieces of the cylinder, or it
may cause error.
2. Make sure to move the probe wipe to

the top position after inserting the
sample probe. If the probe wipe stays
Metal rod
at the lower position, the analyzer will
12. Turn on the analyzer and pneumatic unit, and perform give error Probe wipe movement
complete initialization to make sure the SRV is filled with error after startup and test will not be
diluent. Execute background test and make sure that all the allowed;
parameters are in the normal range. If initialization fails, please
execute whole device priming in order to fill SRV with diluent; 3. After SRV is assembled, connect and
fix the tubes around as what it was
13. Run QC test to check if the analyzer is in control. Make sure before.
background, carryover, repeatability are normal and scatter
gram is in normal condition;
11-14
Clear crystal Clear crystal on 1. Open right door and chamber assembly panel; Cleaning tissue Caution
on syringe syringe
2. Check the end point of plunger for 2.5ml syringe 1)Cleaning is only for a little crystal. If
and 250ul syringe. If there is leakage from the there is much, you need to replace
inside, please replace the syringe assembly. If the syringe;
there is crystal, please use cleaning tissue to
clean it;
3. Open the front cover and check the 100ul syringe

plungers end point. If there is crystal, please
remove it and clean;
4. After the cleaning, execute several times of test.

Check the syringes, make sure there is no
leakage;
11-15
Check floater y Check 1. Open right side door and chamber assembly Probe cleanser Caution:
for waste floaters of panel;
syringe 1)When performing probe cleanser
chamber WC1 and
2. Check floaters for WC1 and WC2. If the floater is cleaning for WC1 and WC2, liquid
WC2
dirty, remove one tube which is on the top cover surface should be higher than floater;
y Check the of the chamber and use syringe to add probe
2)Before cleaning waste container
floater of cleanser (concentration more than 40%) into the
floater, please turn off the analyzer in
waste tank chamber. Soak for 10 minutes until it is clean;
case analyzer enters sleeping mode
outside of the
3. If the customer uses waste container, please and waste inside is poured out;
machine
take out the cap assembly and check if there is
any dirt stuck to the floater. Soak with probe
cleanser for 10 minutes until it is cleaned;
11-16
Check yCheck if 1. Open the right door and left door; Cross-headed
buffer bath there is any screwdriver
2. Open chamber assembly panel (right side), check buffer bath TC1 which is
crystal or
beside WC1 and SCI chamber. If there is much crystal or liquid inside,
liquid inside
check if there is reverse pouring;
3. Open left panel and check TC3 which is under vacuum release valve. If
there is much crystal or liquid inside, please find out if any part has problem,
troubleshooting;
11-17
Check air y Check if the 1. Open left door and gas valve assembly panel; Cross-headed
filter air filter is full screwdriver
2. Check air filter which is above power supply unit. There should not be much
of liquid
liquid inside. If there is a lot of liquid inside, the air drier or the drain valve for
waste may be defective;

Check tube y Check tube 1. Open the front panel; Cross-headed

pincher pincher screwdriver
2. Check if the shape is changed or bent or cannot pinch sample tube
tightly. If there is any problem, please replace the pincher;
11-18
Check y Check 1. Open the front panel; Cross-headed

WBC mixer noise screwdriver
2. Check if there is abnormal sound or big noise when the mixer is working. If yes,
mixer
yCheck if please add some lubricating grease. Be careful not to drop the grease into Probe cleanser
there is any WBC reaction bath;
Cleansing tissue
crystal at
3. Check if there is any crystal or impurity on the metal panel which is above
the mixer
mixing unit. If yes, clean it with cleaning tissue and probe cleanser;
11-19
Check silica Check silica gel 1. Open the right door and chamber assembly panel; Cross-headed
gel tube of tube of pinch screwdriver
2. Turn off the pneumatic unit;
pinch valve valve
3. Check the silica tube of PV11~PV13 if there is anything wrong at
the pinching position, such as leakage, breakage and so on. If it is
OK, please change the pinching position;
11-20
Item Maintenance contents Steps Tools and Remark
Consumables
Check y Check tubing for 1. Open the front cover; Cross-headed

tubing for HGB bubble mixing; screwdriver
2. Take out shielding cover of HGB bath;
HGB
y Check the function
bubble 3. Check the bubble mixing tube below HGB bath. It is connected with a T
of HGB bubble
mixing connector. Make sure the inner Teflon tube is 4mm out of the connector;
mixing and waste
draining; 4. Run sample test, make sure HGB bubble mixing is normal and waste can
be drained smoothly;

Check tube of Check the tube of 1. Check the tube at the back of the analyzer and make sure the tubes for all the /
reagent cap reagent cap lyses, diluents are not sharply bent and no leakage;
assembly assembly
2. Tidy up the tubes to make sure they will not be pressed and bent;
3. Check tubes for fluorescence reagent to make sure they are well connected;
11-21
Yearly Maintenance

Clean heat Clean the heat 1. Take out the heat dissipation net from the back panel of analyzer; /
dissipation dissipation(for
2. Clean it with water;
and filtering rear panel fan)
net for and filtering net 3. Re-assemble it after it is dry;
whole for whole device
device

Check crystal Check if there is 1. Open the front cover and chamber assembly panel at the right side; Cross-headed
for solenoid crystal for solenoid screwdriver
2. Check if there is any crystal on the valves. If yes, remove it and
valve valve
clean relevant part; Cleaning tissue
11-22
11.3 Status Check
During PM visit, please kindly check working status according to the following table:
NO. Inspection Item Description Reference Result Remark
1 Pressure/Vacuum 250KPa 25020 KPa Pass Fail 3 months
2 -70KPa NO Error Pass Fail 3 months

Message
3 160KPa 1605 KPa Pass Fail 3 months
4 70KPa 701 KPa Pass Fail 3 months
5 40kPa 401 KPa Pass Fail 3 months
6 -40KPa -400.5 KPa Pass Fail 3 months
7 HGB Blank voltage HGB Blank Voltage 4.50.1 V Pass Fail 3 months
8 Sensor voltage setting Blood sensor 2.302.40V Pass Fail Half yearly
9 Fluorescence 2.302.40V Pass Fail Half yearly

reagent sensor
NO. Inspection Item Description Reference Value Result Remark
10 Background WBC 0.1 109 / L Pass Fail Half yearly
11 Open vial-Whole DIFF-WBC 0.2 109 / L Pass Fail Half yearly
11-23
12 blood NRBC-WBC 0.2 109 / L Pass Fail Half yearly
13 Autoloader-Whole RBC 0.02 1012/ L Pass Fail Half yearly

blood
14 RBC-o 0.02 1012/ L Pass Fail Half yearly
Open
15 vial-Prediluted HGB 1g/L Pass Fail Half yearly
16 PLT 5 109 / L Pass Fail Half yearly
17 PLT-o 5 109 / L Pass Fail Half yearly
18 Particle Quantity 2000~6000 Pass Fail Half yearly
19 FS CG position 34.00~46.00 Pass Fail Half yearly

Standard particle
20 FS CV 2.3% Pass Fail Half yearly
Latex Debug
21 SS CG position 51.00~71.00 Pass Fail Half yearly
22 SS CV 17.2% Pass Fail Half yearly
23 Standard particle Particle Quantity 2000~6000 Pass Fail Half yearly
24 Latex CAL FS CV 3.9% Pass Fail Half yearly
25 Diff channel Shape and / Pass Fail 3 months

position
normal
26 Baso channel Shape and / Pass Fail 3 months

position
Fresh blood scatter
normal
gram
27 NRBC channel Shape and / Pass Fail 3 months
position
normal
28 Ret channel Shape and / Pass Fail 3 months

position
11-24
normal
29 WBC 1.0 Pass Fail Half yearly
30 RBC 1.0 Pass Fail Half yearly
31 Carry over HGB 1.0 Pass Fail Half yearly
32 Open vial-Whole HCT Pass Fail Half yearly

1.0
blood
33 PLT 1.0 Pass Fail Half yearly
Autoloader-Whole
34 blood RBC-O 1.5 Pass Fail Half yearly
35 WBC-D 1.0 Pass Fail Half yearly
36 WBC-N 1.5 Pass Fail Half yearly
37 Scatter gram Group CG position Meet / Pass Fail Half yearly

verification requirement
38 WBC 2.5% Pass Fail Half yearly

Repeatability
39 RBC 1.5% Pass Fail Half yearly
Autoloader-Whole
40 HGB 1.0% Pass Fail Half yearly
blood
41 MCV 1.0% Pass Fail Half yearly
Open vial-Whole
42 blood HCT 1.5% Pass Fail Half yearly
43 PLT 4.0% Pass Fail Half yearly
11-25
11.4 Regular Replacement
11.4.1 Wearing parts list

No. Description FRU Code Position in the analyzer Life time Remark
1 Piercing probe assembly 801-3201-00043-00 Beside the piercing cylinder 30000 times 20 weeks
2 Air filter 801-3201-00024-00 On the left side of rear panel 2 years \
3 Drier assembly 801-3201-00023-00 On the left side of rear panel 4 years \
4 Vacuum relief valve 801-3201-00008-00 On the left panel 4 years \
5 Sheath fluid filter LF3 801-3201-00065-00 Beside the diluents heating bath 6 months \
6 cylinder sleeve(Thomas pump FRU) 801-3110-00215-00 Inside the THOMAS pump 4 years 11800 hours
7 Piston cup(Thomas pump FRU) 801-3110-00216-00 Inside the THOMAS pump 4 years 11800 hours
Inside the barcode scanner

9 Rotation pressing head(Scanner) 043-001082-00 1 year
assembly
NRBC metering pump

10 801-3100-00059-00 On the right side of rear panel 6 months
(DP4)
11 Wearing Parts Kit 801-3201-00081-00 \ \ \
PS:
1Check if the plastic rotation head of barcode scanner presses at the correct position of sample tube(Needs to be maintained every 6 months)
2Lubricate synchronous pulley rotor and straight track of autoloader assembly, piercing assembly and open vial assembly every year.
3Lubricate the lead screw of syringe motor every year.
11-26
11-27
12 FRU LIST
12.1 Board list
No. FRU Code Sub-Component Description
1 051-000326-00 driving controlling board PCBA
2 051-000327-00 base board PCBA
3 051-000919-00 Diluent heating board PCBA
4 051-000760-00 Pneumatic Unit Control Board PCBA
5 023-000230-00 COM EXPRESS module 1G DDR2 radiator
6 801-3201-00079-00 Fluorescent Signal Assembly
7 051-000596-00 3201data&COME carrier board PCBA
8 051-000565-00 Liquid Position Detect Board
9 801-3201-00080-00 Pneumatic Pressure Detection Board
10 051-000319-00 FS dispersion light forward amplifying board PCBA
11 051-000320-00 SS dispersion light forward amplifying board PCBA
12 051-000318-00 laser driving board PCBA
13 801-3201-00072-00 CF Card
14 051-000329-00 Valve Driving Board PCBA
15 051-000595-00 Little Network Board
16 801-3101-00031-00 Indicator Board
17 051-000328-00 heating controlling board PCBA
18 051-000406-00 Power Commutator Board PCBA
19 051-000616-00 3201 powerboard
12-1
12.2 Valve list
1 801-3100-00010-00 Gas valve.
2 M6Q-020002--- Gas valve.
3 801-3201-00063-00 SMC-LVM valve of two-way(3201)
4 801-3201-00019-00 Two-way burcket valve
5 801-3201-00020-00 Three-way burcket valve with
6 801-3201-00071-00 5-Way Gas Valve
7 801-3201-00002-00 2-way Valve (Mindray)
9 801-3100-00099-00 5mm Pinch Valve Assembly
11 801-3201-00011-00 SMC valve with tie-in
12 801-3100-00100-00 8mm Pinch Valve Assembly
13 BA40-10-62038 Pneulinesupply duckbill check valve
12.3 Tube and Connector list
1 082-000109-00 Tube.FEP,0.5mmX1.5mm
2 M6G-020008--- Tubing.
3 M90-000026--- Tube.PTFE,1/32"X1/16",3000074,100ft/coil
4 082-000422-00 TUBE.FEP 714-0161000.040ID0.066OD
5 0040-10-32301 Tube PTFE 0.040"IDX0.066"OD,250FT
6 M90-100031--- tube.PTFE,1.7mmIDX2.55mmOD
7 082-000108-00 Tube.M-87-D3,2mmX3.5mm,AV31X2103
8 082-000432-00 tube.2mmX3.5mm PVDF(inner) TPU(outer)
9 M6G-020054--- Tube TPU,ID3/32,OD3/16,clear
12-2
10 M6G-020055--- Tube.TPU,1/8"IDX1/4"OD
11 M6G-020002--- Tubing. PU tube 4mmX2.5mm transparent
12 082-000531-00 tube.TPU,1/4ID3/8OD
13 M6G-020003--- Tubing. PU tube 6mmX4mm transparent
14 A21-000002--- Tubing,Silicone,1/8"ID,100'
15 M90-000025--- Tygon Tube 1/8"1/16"(10ft)
16 M90-100071--- TUBING(ID 3/32",OD 5/32") 20FT
17 082-000614-00 tube.PharMed,5/32"ODX1/32"ID
18 082-000055-00 Tube.1/16"X3/16",F-5500-A,Fluran
19 0030-20-13339 Transit tube
20 M6G-020034--- 3-way valve tubing(1.6*3.2)
21 082-000416-00 tube.4mmX6mm,PSPTFE-0236-039-328
22 3001-10-07069 TUBING(ID 1/16",OD 1/8") 20FT
23 M6G-020011--- Tubing.PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID1feet
24 801-3201-00044-00 sampling hose
25 043-000750-00 Fittings
26 043-000751-00 Fittings
27 043-000880-00 8.5mm three way connector
28 043-000892-00 straight tube tie-in
29 M6Q-030003--- Connection,Y-type,6 OD,SQY6
30 M90-100009--- FemaleLuer,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID
31 M90-100025--- Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon
32 M90-100027--- StraightReduction,1/8"&3/32"ID
33 M90-100028--- Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
34 M90-100028-03 Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
35 M90-100030--- Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon
36 M90-100065--- Tee Reduction,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
37 M90-100100--- Elbow,400Barb,3/32"ID,White
38 082-000525-00 connector. CNS, 1/4-28
12-3
39 M6Q-030001--- Connection,6OD,M14,SQMH-C6-6
40 509B-10-05973 BNC Skt,PM7,8,8E,9E,9v,MEC12v
41 043-000829-00 reagent detection tube
42 801-3110-00112-00 5 way connector for waste
43 801-3201-00026-00 Brass base with steel pipe
44 801-3100-00208-00 Pneumatic Unit connector package
45 801-3110-00114-00 LYSE reagent connector (six color)FRU
12.4 Part list
1 801-3201-00030-00 HGB module
2 041-005497-00 open-vial wipe
3 801-3201-00073-00 Sample Probe
4 801-3201-00043-00 sampling probe assembly
5 801-3100-00065-00 Waste Chamber 2 Assembly
6 801-3201-00016-00 WC1 Unit
7 801-3201-00017-00 sheath chamber for impedance(SCI)
8 801-3201-00005-00 OverFlow Bath
9 801-3110-00105-00 reagent Chamber assm
10 801-3100-00108-00 Motor for Syringe Assembly(100\250uL syringe)
11 801-2002-00001-00 Syringe Motor(2.5ml syringe)
12 801-3005-00004-00 Motor for Open vial sampling Assembly
13 0000-10-10985 stepping motor SST42D2120 single shaft
14 801-3201-00012-00 power assembly
15 M07-00067F--- FUSE SLOW-BLOW 250V 2.5AGLS D5*20
16 M07-00046F--- FUSE SLOW-BLOW 250V 3AGLS D5X20
17 801-3101-00022-00 Fan of Power Supply Assembly
18 006-000121-00 TRANSFORMER INSULATE 24V 200VA
12-4
19 006-000155-00 Filter power 120/250VAC6A panel mount
20 801-BA40-00254-00 SWITCH Power switch 250VAC 16A (FRU)
21 010-000006-00 Fuse Time-lag 250V 6.3A CER D5X20
22 801-3100-00057-00 0.5ml Metering PumpDP1)
23 801-3201-00018-00 8ml Diaphragm pumpDP12
24 801-3100-00059-00 Metering Pump 1mlDP2\DP4\DP5\DP6\DP7\DP8)
25 801-3201-00009-00 1.5ml Diaphragm PumpDP3)
26 801-3201-00001-00 20ul Diaphragm pumpDP9\DP10\DP11)
27 801-3201-00033-00 RBC reaction chamber
28 801-3201-00032-00 Temperature Control Unit
29 801-3201-00031-00 Mixing Unit
30 801-3201-00048-00 BLOOD SAMPLINGINJECTING VALVE
31 M07-00143S--- SWITCH
32 801-3201-00049-00 start switch subassembly
33 011-000021-00 Optical Sensor
34 011-000022-00 Optical Sensor
35 801-3201-00036-00 Tube detecting assembly
36 011-000041-00 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 940nm 88cm(blood detect)
37 011-000047-00 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 940nm 45cm(reagent detect)
38 801-2800-00020-00 Syringe Motor Pos Sensor Assy
39 801-3201-00034-00 Optical System
40 801-3201-00065-00 sheath filter assembly(LF3)
41 082-000156-00 Inline Filter 65um 1/8I.D.Tubing
42 801-3201-00023-00 air drier
43 801-3201-00024-00 Air Filter assembly
44 801-3201-00064-00 filter(3201)
45 801-3201-00006-00 11-position 'Junction Board
46 801-3201-00070-00 Junction Board 1(R)
47 M6C-020006--- Belt
12-5
48 BA33-10-35085 Drag chain
49 M6H-010003--- Linear guide MGN9-C1-R75-Z0CM
50 082-000620-00 Hydraulic Buffers.SAC0806C
51 M6H-010004--- Linear guide MGN9-C1-R175-Z0CM
52 M6H-010001--- Linear guide MGN9C1R135ZFCM
53 M6C-010002--- Synchronous pulley,P16MXL6.4
54 M6C-010001--- Synchronous pulley,P16MXL6.4DF,5H7
55 801-3110-00155-00 Transmission belt(TBN160MXL025)
56 801-3110-00084-00 Transmission belt(TBN142MXL025)
57 043-001082-00 pressure plate
58 032-000134-00 slide guide.MGN9-C1-R295-Z0CM
59 801-3201-00045-00 pre-heating pool
60 801-3201-00046-00 Sheath Fluid heating pool
61 801-3201-00066-00 subassembly of HSH
62 042-001893-00 Shielding Upper Cover for Data Board
63 042-001894-00 Shielding Lower Cover for Data Board
64 042-002226-00 Right Side Door(white)
65 042-002227-00 Top Cover(white)
66 043-000661-00 autoloader shell
67 801-3201-00061-00 left door asm
68 042-001508-00 Shielding Box
69 801-3201-00014-00 radiator for mainframe
70 043-000813-00 small door
71 043-000670-00 right panel
72 043-000669-00 left panel
73 043-001294-00 upside panel assembledBC-6800)
74 042-001676-00 RBC Shielding Cover
75 042-001677-00 RBC Exterior shielding Cover
76 042-002229-00 Regulator Cover(White)
12-6
77 801-3110-00180-00 10.4TFT screen assembly
78 801-1805-00027-00 Inverter(TPI-01-0207-M19)
79 801-3201-00050-00 LCD Module
80 801-3100-00229-00 Touch screen(For new version)
81 801-3100-00230-00 Touch Screen Control Board
82 801-3201-00053-00 M-68D CAP Component for Diluent
83 801-3201-00054-00 M-68DR RET CAP Component for Diluent
84 801-3201-00055-00 M-68LB CAP Component for Lyse
85 801-3201-00056-00 M-68LH CAP Component for Lyse
86 801-3201-00057-00 M-68LD CAP Component for Lyse
87 801-3201-00058-00 M-68LN CAP Component for Lyse
88 801-3201-00060-00 Waste Tube assm (6800 without sensor)
89 801-3201-00084-00 fluorescence reagent assembly(FN)
90 801-3201-00085-00 fluorescence reagent assembly(FD)
91 801-3201-00086-00 fluorescence reagent assembly(FR)
92 M05-100R29-02 Button Battery,PM8
93 082-000526-00 clamp.0.16"x0.19"
94 801-3110-00156-00 Leaking container(pierce)
95 048-001670-00 dustproof net within frame
96 043-000672-00 salver
97 043-001978-00 Flow limited tube
98 047-003942-00 poncho for reagent detecting asm
99 801-3201-00067-00 cylinder for pierece
100 801-3201-00074-00 Lifting Cylinder
101 801-3201-00075-00 Telescoping Cylinder
102 M6Q-010001--- Cylinder for SRV Assembly
103 801-3201-00076-00 Rotary Scanning Cylinder
104 801-3100-00238-00 Compressor with connector(Thomas,220V)
105 801-3201-00051-00 Pneumatic System
12-7
106 801-3201-00068-00 Pneumatic System
107 801-3201-00069-00 Pneumatic System(220v,export)
108 801-3201-00028-00 particle detector and analyzer
109 801-3201-00027-00 air isolation chamber(ISW)
110 045-000023-00 Ruby Red Cell Counter
111 801-3201-00029-00 particle detector and analyzer
112 801-3201-00025-00 cover for the particle detector
113 801-3201-00008-00 Negative relief valve(-40Kpa)
114 801-3201-00007-00 Pressure regulator(160Kap,40Kpa,70Kap)
115 801-3100-00027-00 Pressure Relief Valve AP100-01'SMC'
116 023-000056-00 Barcode Scanner hand held
117 023-000032-00 fixed bar code scanner
118 801-3201-00022-00 USB assembly
119 801-3110-00197-00 2.5ml Syringe transmission unit(43F4K)(without syringe)
120 801-3102-00004-00 100uL\250uL Syringe Drive Assembly( without syringe)
121 801-3201-00010-00 250uL Syringe
122 801-3201-00047-00 250 injector
123 801-3900-00007-00 2.5ml syringe (FRU)
124 801-3201-00035-00 autoloader
125 801-3201-00037-00 tube bracket side pressing unit
126 801-3201-00038-00 lengthwise loader unit
127 801-3201-00039-00 broadwise loader unit
128 801-3201-00040-00 air cylinder thumb unit
129 801-3201-00041-00 Unloading unit
130 801-3201-00062-00 tube container
131 801-3201-00052-00 Code Scanning assembly
132 801-3201-00042-00 clamp
133 801-3110-00070-00 Waste Cap Assembly
134 801-3110-00077-00 Washer
12-8
135 801-3110-00076-00 Front bath washer
136 801-3110-00194-00 Tube rack unit for Sarstedt tube(FRU)
137 801-3201-00087-00 counter unit
138 043-000671-00 shield
139 801-3100-00205-00 waste container for SRV
140 801-3110-00167-00 Support panel for diluent bottle
141 3100-21-49048 Motor for autoloader assembly
12.5 Cable list
1 009-001185-00 conneting wire for pneumatic unit
2 009-001182-00 conneting wire for aspirate key
3 009-000731-00 connecting cable for heating cup
4 009-000937-00 connecting cable for valve1
5 009-000939-00 connecting cable for valve3
6 009-000948-00 connecting cable for indication board
7 009-000949-00 connecting cable for air pressure PCB
8 009-001195-00 earthing wire for syringe
9 009-001210-00 connecting wire for liquid level detect
10 009-001211-00 connecting wire for buoy detect
11 009-001213-00 connecting wire for heating CTRL board
12 009-001214-00 connecting wire for pre-heating pool
13 009-001219-00 connecting wire for Temp. detect&absorb
14 009-001221-00 connecting wire for mixer&PHC
15 009-001223-00 connecting wire for auto-sampler&PHC2
16 009-001226-00 connecting wire for WBC injector&PHC
17 009-001227-00 connecting wire for RBC injector&PHC
18 009-001228-00 input wire for valve driver P12V source1
12-9
19 009-001229-00 input wire for valve driver P12V source2
20 009-001230-00 connecting wire for valve CTRL signal 1
21 009-001231-00 connecting wire for valve CTRL signal 2
22 009-001239-00 connecting wire for ANA12V source2
23 009-001241-00 connecting wire for AC120V source2
24 009-001242-00 connecting wire for AC24V source
25 801-3100-00220-00 temparature sensor with cable
26 009-001421-00 wire for entironment temperature
27 009-000254-00 Temperature Sensor and Wires
28 009-001402-00 extension cable for network
29 009-00122-00 Motor for Autoloader Assembly
12.6 Wearing parts list
No. Description FRU Code Life time
1 Piercing probe assembly 801-3201-00043-00 30000 times
2 Air filter 801-3201-00024-00 2 years
3 Drier assembly 801-3201-00023-00 4 years
4 Vacuum relief valve 801-3201-00008-00 4 years
5 Sheath fluid filter LF3 801-3201-00065-00 6 months
6 cylinder sleeve(Thomas pump FRU) 801-3110-00215-00 4 years
7 Piston cup(Thomas pump FRU) 801-3110-00216-00 4 years
9 Rotation pressing head(Scanner) 043-001082-00 1 year
10 NRBC metering pump(DP4) 801-3100-00059-00 6 months
11 Wearing Parts Kit 801-3201-00081-00 /
12-10
Appendix A Fluid Chart
12-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MRSZ/R05N01.291.011.0
PS5 PS4 PS6
-40KPa
VAC
T317
T318
PS2 PS3 PS1
250KPa
70KPa T426
Isolation Isolation
Chamber2 Chamber1
160KPa
40KPa
T310
Pneumatic Uint connector Back Plate connector
C117 C118 C119 C120 C122
C97
T270 T271 T277 T300 T302 T304 T306 T308
C95 T418 T421
T415
T276 T325
T424
T275 T327
T419
T272 C112
T416
T422
T299 C111
T412 C110
T273 C75 Air Filter
Drier
T301
T309
T326 GF1
T303
T305
T307
T413
Air Filter C109

GF2 C113 C114 C115 C116 C121
RGV1 T411 C96
T289 T291 T293 T295 T297
GV57 GV58 GV59 GV60 GV61
T376
T454 C108 T414 T417 T420 T423 T425
OPEN
T286 T274 C106 C107
GP1
T322
C94 T406 T409
T403
B T400
T404 T407
A-DP02
A-DP03
A-DP04
A-DP05
T401
Open
GF2
A-DP01
T397
T296
T298
T294
T290
T292
T398
T328 RGV5 C105
Vacuum Relief Valve
T288
C79 T321 GV62 GV63 GV64 GV65 GV66
T399 T402 T405 T408 T410
T396
T314 T320
T431
C85
A-DP06
A-DP09
A-DP10
A-DP07
A-DP11
T278
C82
T360
TC2 T316 C102 C104

T384 T390
J95-T395-J96
C92
C93
T283
C76
T394
T370
T388
T367
A-FCM
C90
C
C78
GV73 GV68 GV70 GV71
T378
T372 T389
C84
T279
T429
A-DP08
A-HGB
A-
A-SCI
C77
T427
T319
RGV2
T428
T379
160KPa Pressure Regulator C80 Confluent Board2

T387 R R
RGV3
T362 T363
T380 T383 P P C131
C81 C126
T368
70KPa Pressure Regulator C101 T285 T358
T381
GV107 GV106 GV105 GV104 GV103 GV102 GV101 GV100 GV99 GV98 GV97 GV108
D
RGV6 T348 T344 T350 T349
T369 T357 T355 T354 T353 T364
Piercing Cylinder
T356 T352
40KPa Pressure Regulator C86 C99 T365
T282 TP2
Lifting Cylinder
PV16
PV15
PV14
C172
SRV Motion Cylinder

T280(T313)
C123 C145 T351

TP3 T366
TP1 T359
T375 T347
T385
Rotation Scanning Cylinder TP6
C83
T324
C157
C87 Telescoping Cylinder Pneumatic Cylinder Pneumatic Back Plate Cylinder T361
T284
T329 T333
C124 C125 Confluent Board1
R
T377(T374)
T330
R
T346
T281
P P
E
GV89 GV88 GV87 GV86 GV85 GV84 GV83 GV82 GV81 GV80 GV79
GV56 GV48 GV44
T340
T342 T341 C177 T343 T345 T339 T338 T337 T336 T335 T334
T332 T382 T386
T392 T391
A-WC1
A-DP12
A-DIL
PV11
PV07
PV10
PV05
PV04
PV13
PV12
PV06
PV03
PV02
PV01
PV09
TITLE 3201 Fluid Chart
F DOC NO A1-115-004835-00

CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for
whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd.
P.CODE 3201 REV. 2.0
SHEET 2 OF24 SIZE A3
12-12
A.1 Rubber Tubing Information
No. Material ID Material Description Feature
1 M90-100071--- Rubber tubing. 3/32"X5/32", S-50-HLAAX02004, Tygon Soft tube, wide, 50mm
2 3001-10-07069 Rubber tubing. 1/16"X1/8", S-50-HLAAX02002, Tygon Soft tube, narrow, 50mm
4 M90-100031--- Rubber tube. PTFE, 0.066"IDX0.098"OD 1.5 TEFLON
5 A21-000002--- Rubber tube. Silicone, 1/8"X1/4"X100ft, 2800546-100 White, widest, silicone
6 M90-000025--- Rubber tube. 1/8"X1/4", R-3603 AAC02007, Tygon 3603 soft tube, wide
10 M6G-020006--- Rubber tube. Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350 Middle-size, silicone, wide
connecting tube
11 0040-10-32301 Rubber tube. PTFE, 0.040"IDX0.066"OD 1.0 TEFLON
13 M6G-020008--- Rubber tube. ChemfluorFEP, 0.062"ODX0.031"ID FEP tube, inside diameter: 0.78
14 M6G-020011--- Rubber tube. PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID Yellow, pinched tube
15 M6G-020002--- Rubber tube. PU, 4mmX2.5mm, transparent PU gas tube, inside diameter: 2.5mm
16 M6G-020004--- Rubber tube. Soft nylon, 6mmX4mm, white, NB0640 Nylon tube, outside diameter: 6
17 M6G-020003--- Rubber tube. PU, 6mmX4mm, transparent PU gas tube, inside diameter: 4mm
18 M90-000026--- Rubber tube. PTFE, 1/32"IDX1/16"OD 0.8 TEFLON
20 M6G-020034--- Rubber tube. Silicon, used with PS pinch valve, White, pinched tube
1.6X3.2mm
21 082-000109-00 Rubber tube. 0.5mmX1.5mm, PSPTFE-0059-020-492 0.5 TEFLON
22 M6G-020055--- Rubber tube. TPU, ID1/8, OD1/4, clear TPU tube, inside diameter: 3.2mm
23 M6G-020054--- Rubber tube. TPU, ID3/32, OD3/16, clear TPU tube, inside diameter: 2.4mm
24 082-000055-00 Rubber tube. 1/16"X3/16", F-5500-A, Fluran Black, connecting tube
25 A21-000010--- Rubber tube. 1/4"X3/8", R-3603AAC02017, Tygon 3603 waste tube, outside of the
analyzer
26 082-000422-00 Rubber tube. FEP 714-016100, 0.040ID0.066OD FEP tube, inside diameter: 1.0
28 0030-20-13339 Connecting tube (1.5mm-3mm)(mold: MR13339) Connecting tube
29 082-000432-00 Rubber tube. 2X3.5mm PVDF(interior) TPU(exterior) Double tube, internal diameter: 2mm
30 082-000108-00 Rubber tube. M-87-D3, 2mmX3.5mm, AV31X2103 TPU tube, inside diameter: 2mm
32 082-000034-00 Rubber tube. 1/16"X1/8", SE-200 AJD00002, Tygon Double tube, internal diameter:
1.56mm
33 082-000531-00 Rubber tube. TPU, 1/4"ID3/8"OD 6.35mm waste tube
34 082-000614-00 Rubber tube. PharMed, 5/32"ODX1/32"ID Wide Pharmed tube
12-13
35 082-000709-00 Rubber tube. Black double tube, PVC ID2.4mm, Black PVC double tube
OD3.5mm
36 082-000664-00 Narrow, black connecting tube 1.1X4mm Narrow, black connecting tube
37 082-000710-00 Rubber tube. silicone, 0.031"X0.197" Narrow 3350 silicone tube
A2. Connector Information

No. Material ID Material Description Feature Remark
1 M90-100028--- 3/32 PE TEE FITTING-WHITE NYL T420-1 Tee connector (middle)
2 M90-100065--- Connector. Tee Reduction, 400Barb, T connector, both ends large, middle part
1/8"&3/32"ID moderate
3 043-000880-00 8.5mm tee connector (PEI85) PEI85
4 M90-100028-03 Connector. Y, 400Barb, 3/32"ID, White Nylon Y connector (middle)
5 M90-100009--- Connector. FemaleLuer, 1/4-28UNF, 1/8"ID FTLB230-1
6 M90-100025--- Connector. Male Luer, 1/8"Barb, White Nylon MTL230-1
7 M90-100027--- Connector. Straight Through Reduction, I connector, large-middle

1/8"&3/32"ID
8 M90-100100--- Connector. lbow, 400Barb, 3/32"ID, White L connector (middle)
9 M90-100030--- Connector. Y, 200Barb, 1/8"ID, White Nylon Y connector-large
10 043-000892-00 N420(PVDF) Connector. Straight through

PVDF, N420
11 043-000750-00 M420-PVDF Male
12 043-000751-00 F420-PVDF Female
13 M6Q-030002--- Y connector. 6OD,4OD Y connector, large-middle Gas tube

connector
14 M6Q-030003--- Y connector. 6OD Y connector-large Gas tube

connector
15 M6Q-030005--- L connector. 6OD, PT1/4(R1/4) L connector-thread-quick connect Gas tube

connector
16 082-000537-00 Pneumatic quick connect connector, straight I connector, large-middle Gas tube
through, 4OD, 6OD connector
17 082-000538-00 Pneumatic quick connect connector, tee Tee connector, large-middle Gas tube
connector, 4OD, 6OD connector
18 082-000529-00 Pneumatic quick connect connector, straight I connector-middle Gas tube

through, 4OD connector
12-14
Name in Diagram Material ID Feature Amount
C7, C13, C14, C15, C20, C21, C24, C32,

C36, C43, C48, C49, C50, C51, C52,
C53, C56, C62, C64, C85, C86, C92,
C93, C94, C95, C96, C97, C99, C102, M90-100028--- Tee connector (middle) 42
C104, C105, C109, C113, C114, C115,
C116, C117, C118, C119, C120, C126,
C131
C6, C26, C27, C28, C29, C30, C70, C71, T connector, both ends large, middle
M90-100065--- 10
C72, C89 part moderate
C8, C9, C10, C11, C22, C23, C33, C37,

C39, C40, C41, C42, C54, C55, C60,
M90-100028-03 Y connector (middle) 24
C61, C63, C73, C106, C107, C108, C110,
C111, C112
Connector. FemaleLuer, 1/4-28UNF,

C132, C164 M90-100009--- 2
1/8"ID
Connector. Male Luer, 1/8"Barb,

C138, C158 M90-100025--- 2
White Nylon
C16, C17, C18, C19, C25, C31, C38,

M90-100027--- I connector, large-middle 13
C46, C47, C65, C66, C69, C127
C12, C121, C122 M90-100100--- L connector (middle) 3
C74 M90-100030--- Y connector-large 1
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C44, C128, C129,

043-000880-00 8.5mm tee connector (PEI85) 9
C130
C34, C45, C57, C58, C59, C67, C68,

C83, C87, C88, C123, C148, C149, C150, Connector. Straight through PVDF,
043-000892-00 23
C151, C152, C153, C154, C155, C156, N420
C157, C170, C171
C139, C140, C141, C142, C143, C159,

043-000750-00 Male 10
C160, C161, C162, C163
C133, C134, C135, C136, C137, C165,

043-000751-00 Female 10
C166, C167, C168, C169
C79, C80, C82, C90, C101, C125 M6Q-030002--- Y connector, large-middle 6
C75, C76, C77, C78 M6Q-030003--- Y connector-large 4
Pneumatic quick connect connector,

C145, C172 082-000529-00 2
straight through, 4OD

C84 082-000537-00 1
straight through, 4OD, 6OD

C124, C81 082-000538-00 2
tee connector, 4OD, 6OD
12-15
A3. Connecting Tubing Information
ID Length Material ID Material Description Feature
1 20mm 082-000055-00 Rubber tube. 1/16"X3/16", F-5500-A, Fluran Black, connecting tube
2 \ 0030-20-13339 Connecting tube (1.5mm-3mm)(mold: wide-narrow connecting tube

MR13339)
3 20mm 082-000614-00 Rubber tube. PharMed, 5/32"ODX1/32"ID Wide Pharmed tube
4 20mm 082-000710-00 Rubber tube. silicone, 0.031"X0.197" Narrow 3350 silicone tube
5 20mm 082-000664-00 Narrow, black connecting tube 1.1X4mm Narrow, black connecting tube
Name in Diagram Material ID Name Unit Amount Remark
Cut off 8mm from the

J6, J7, J15, J78, J79, J80 0030-20-13339 Transit tube EA 6
wide end
J18, J19, J20, J22, J23, J24, J25,

Black
J26, J27, J28, J29, J30, J31, J33,
082-000055-00 connecting mm 25 20mm each
J37, J46, J47, J62, J63, J68, J69,
tube
J72, J73, J86, J87, J88
J4, J5, J8, J9, J10, J11, J12, J13,

J14, J16, J17, J21, J34, J35, J36,
J39, J40, J41, J42, J43, J44, J45,
J48, J49, J50, J51, J52, J53, J54, 3350
082-000710-00 mm 54 20mm each
J55, J56, J57, J58, J59, J60, J61, silicone tube
J64, J65, J66, J67, J74, J75, J76,
J77, J82, J89, J90, J93, J94, J95,
J96, J97, J100
Wide
J1, J2, J3, J71 082-000614-00 Pharmed mm 4 20mm each
tube
Narrow,
black
J83, J84, J85 082-000664-00 mm 3 20mm each
connecting
tube
A4. Other Material Information

Name in Diagram FRU Code Name Amount
GF1 801-3201-00024-00 Air filter. Rc1/8"AF150-00, custom 1
GF2 801-3201-00064-00 Waste filter (under air filter) 1
Drier 801-3201-00023-00 Drier 1
12-16
LF1, LF2 082-000156-00 Small liquid filter 2
LF3 801-3201-00065-00 Sheath fluid filter 1
TP1-TP6 043-001978-00 Decelerating tube 6
Telescoping cylinder 801-3201-00075-00 Telescoping cylinder 1
Lifting cylinder 801-3201-00074-00 Lifting cylinder 1
Same with air

Claw cylinder cylinder claw Claw cylinder 1
Rotary scanning
cylinder 801-3201-00076-00 Rotary scanning cylinder 1
Cylinder for SRV

assembly M6Q-010001--- Cylinder for SRV assembly 1
Pneumatic back plate Same with tube rack

cylinder pressing unit Pneumatic back plate cylinder 1
Cylinder for pierce 801-3201-00067-00 Cylinder for pierce 1
Conflux board 1 801-3201-00070-00 Conflux board 1
Conflux board 2 801-3201-00006-00 Conflux board 1
A5. Valve Information

The valve codes used in the diagrams and the corresponding valves are listed as follows:
Valve
No. FRU Code Material Description
Code
1 CV1 BA40-10-62038 Pneulinesupply duckbillcheck valve
5 PV01 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
6 PV02 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
7 PV03 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
8 PV04 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
9 PV05 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
10 PV06 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
11 PV07 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
12 PV09 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
12-17
13 PV10 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
14 PV11 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
15 PV12 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
16 PV13 801-3100-00100-00 Pinch valve 8mm
17 PV14 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
18 PV15 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
19 PV16 801-3100-00099-00 Pinch valve 5mm
20 SV01 801-3201-00002-00 2-way miniature electromagnetic valve (short cable, new connector)
26 SV08 801-3201-00063-00 Fluidic valve, 2-way, -75~250KPa DC12V
27 SV09 801-3201-00063-00 Fluidic valve, 2-way, -75~250KPa DC12V
28 SV10 801-3201-00001-00 Fluidic valve, LVM105R-6A-2-Q, 3-way, -75~250KPa DC12V
31 SV13 801-3201-00004-00 2-way miniature electromagnetic valve (overpressure resistant)
12-18
61 GV44 801-3201-00003-00 3-way miniature electromagnetic valve (short cable, new connector)
70 SV53 801-3201-00011-00 Fluidic valve, 2 positions, 5 ports, 12VDC, 0-0.4MPa
Fluidic valve, 2 positions, 2 ports, electromagnetic, 3mm orifice,

71 SV54 801-3201-00019-00 12VDC
Fluidic valve, 2 positions, 2 ports, electromagnetic, 3mm orifice,

72 SV55 801-3201-00019-00 12VDC
Fluidic valve, 2 positions, 3 ports, electromagnetic, vacuum-5bar

73 GV56 801-3201-00020-00 12VDC 2mm orifice
12-19
87 GV73 801-3201-00004-00 2-way miniature electromagnetic valve (overpressure resistant)
801-3100-00010-00 Gas valve, electromagnetic, GA010E1-11-MLX-DC12V (without

90 GV79 connector and connecting cable)










101 GV97 M6Q-020002--- Gas valve, electromagnetic, GA010E1-MLX-DC12V
12-20
Gas valve, electromagnetic, 0104E1-21-PLL-DC12V (without

112 GV108 M6Q-020005--- connector and connecting cable)
A6. Table of All Tubes

The tubes are named as "connector No.-tube No.-connector No.". Tube No. is expressed as
"Tube Model-Tube Length".
E.g. in J93-T77-J94, J93 and J94 are sequential numbers for the two connectors, and T77 has
a remark of 11-200 which means tubing No. 11 and length 200mm.
Name in
No. Remark Material ID Name Amount
Diagram
1 T1 29-1800 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1800
2 T2 29-1800 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1800
3 T3 29-1800 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1800
4 T4 29-1800 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1800
5 T5 29-1800 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1800
6 T6 20-180 M6G-020034--- Silicone tube in reagent containers 180
11 T11 22-1800 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 1800
12 T12 6-315 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 315
12-21
13 T13 29-70 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 70
14 T14 29-70 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 70
15 T15 29-400 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 400
16 T16 24-22 082-000055-00 Wide, black connecting tube 22
17 T17 11-650 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 650
18 T18 29-100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 100
19 T19 29-1100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1100
21 T21 29-660 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 660
22 T22 11-280 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 280
23 T23 11-300 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 300
24 T24 26-260 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 260
25 T25 34-15 082-000614-00 Wide Pharmed tube 15
26 T26 29-1100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1100
28 T28 29-760 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 760
29 T29 26-400 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 400
30 T30 26-270 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 270
32 T32 29-1100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1100
34 T34 29-570 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 570
35 T35 11-380 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 380
36 T36 11-280 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 280
37 T37 26-300 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 300
39 T39 29-1100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 1100
41 T41 29-660 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 660
42 T42 11-320 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 320
43 T43 11-130 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 130
44 T44 26-240 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 240
45 T45 22-70 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 70
12-22
46 T46 29-100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 100
47 T47 22-1500 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 1500
48 T48 30-460 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 460
49 T49 29-70 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 70
50 T50 22-20 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 20
51 T51 14-50 M6G-020011--- Narrow Pharmed tube 50
52 T52 22-90 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 90
53 T53 22-150 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 150
54 T54 6-270 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 270
55 T55 22-150 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 150
56 T56 6-240 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 240
57 T57 6-100 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 100
58 T58 22-50 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 50
59 T59 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
60 T60 30-670 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 670
61 T61 30-560 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 560
62 T62 30-590 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 590
63 T63 30-490 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 490
64 T64 11-65 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 65
65 T65 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
66 T66 30-30 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 30
67 T67 30-70 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 70
68 T68 2-410 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 410
69 T69 30-35 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 35
70 T70 30-35 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 35
71 T71 21-300 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 300
72 T72 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
73 T73 11-110 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 110
74 T74 30-50 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 50
75 T75 11-420 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 420
76 T76 28-20 0030-20-13339 Transit tube 1
77 T77 11-200 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 200
78 T78 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
12-23
79 T79 29-100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 100
80 T80 30-120 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 120
81 T81 6-120 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 rubber tube 120
82 T82 21-600 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 600
83 T83 30-700 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 700
84 T84 4-420 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 420
85 T85 30-1660 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 1660
86 T86 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
87 T87 11-110 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 110
88 T88 11-190 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 190
89 T89 30-30 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 30
90 T90 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
91 T91 30-120 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 120
92 T92 29-90 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 90
93 T93 30-30 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 30
94 T94 30-25 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 25
95 T95 30-30 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 30
96 T96 30-25 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 25
97 T97 30-25 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 25
98 T98 21-650 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 650
99 T99 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
100 T100 30-140 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 140
101 T101 30-210 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 210
102 T102 2-65 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 65
103 T103 29-100 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 100
104 T104 29-20 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 20
105 T105 2-160 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 160
106 T106 2-90 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 90
107 T107 29-120 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 120
108 T108 29-120 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 120
109 T109 1-50 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 50
110 T110 2-220 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 220
111 T111 2-25 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 25
12-24
112 T112 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
113 T113 1-910 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 910
114 T114 22-250 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 250
116 T116 13-150 M6G-020008--- 0.78 FEP tube 150
117 T117 4-120 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 120
118 T118 4-250 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 250
119 T119 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
120 T120 1-1150 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 1150
121 T121 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
122 T122 15-25 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 25
123 T123 6-90 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 90
124 T124 6-170 M90-000025--- Wide 3603 tube 170
125 T125 30-490 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 490
126 T126 13-35 M6G-020008--- 0.78 FEP tube 35
127 T127 18-750 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 750
128 T128 1-700 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 700
129 T129 5-1010 A21-000002--- White, widest, silicone tube 1010
130 T130 15-1150 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1150
131 T131 30-480 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 480
132 T132 30-55 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 55
133 T133 2-60 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 60
134 T134 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
135 T135 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
137 T137 15-1800 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1800
139 T139 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
140 T140 4-100 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 100
141 T141 18-50 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 50
142 T142 18-110 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 110
144 T144 2-30 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 30
12-25
145 T145 30-55 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 55
146 T146 30-18 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 18
147 T147 30-65 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 65
148 T148 30-18 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 18
149 T149 30-40 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 40
150 T150 30-18 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 18
151 T151 4-620 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 620
152 T152 4-720 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 720
153 T153 2-30 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 30
156 T156 26-30 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 30
157 T157 30-160 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 160
158 T158 18-100 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 100
159 T159 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
160 T160 11-360 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 360
161 T161 29-20 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 20
162 T162 18-150 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 150
163 T163 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
164 T164 30-30 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 30
165 T165 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
166 T166 30-55 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 55
167 T167 4-530 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 530
168 T168 15-420 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 420
169 T169 15-350 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 350
170 T170 26-250 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 250
171 T171 26-330 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 330
172 T172 4-140 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 140
173 T173 2-50 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 50
174 T174 2-40 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 40
175 T175 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
176 T176 2-45 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 45
177 T177 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
12-26
178 T178 29-700 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 700
180 T180 2-65 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 65
181 T181 2-25 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 25
183 T183 29-580 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 580
184 T184 26-60 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 60
185 T185 1-220 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 220
186 T186 26-430 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 430
187 T187 15-820 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 820
188 T188 1-590 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 590
189 T189 29-400 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 400
190 T190 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
191 T191 1-520 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 520
192 T192 29-30 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 30
194 T194 2-60 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 60
195 T195 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
197 T197 29-410 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 410
198 T198 26-100 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 100
199 T199 26-390 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 390
200 T200 15-600 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 600
201 T201 1-25 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 25
202 T202 1-660 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 660
203 T203 29-400 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 400
204 T204 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
205 T205 1-520 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 520
206 T206 21-1400 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 1400
207 T207 28-20 0030-20-13339 Transit tube 20
208 T208 30-850 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 850
210 T210 29-550 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 550
12-27
213 T213 4-540 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 540
214 T214 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
215 T215 1-490 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 490
218 T218 4-540 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 540
219 T219 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
220 T220 1-470 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 470
223 T223 4-540 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 540
224 T224 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
225 T225 1-460 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 460
228 T228 4-440 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 440
229 T229 2-20 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 20
230 T230 1-540 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 540
232 T232 11-300 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 300
233 T233 13-500 M6G-020008--- 0.78 FEP tube 500
234 T234 4-330 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 330
235 T235 2-25 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 25
236 T236 29-30 082-000432-00 2.0 double tube 30
238 T238 2-660 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 660
239 T239 1-420 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 420
240 T240 18-340 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 340
241 T241 18-250 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 250
242 T242 2-15 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 15
243 T243 18-340 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 340
12-28
244 T244 18-250 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 250
245 T245 2-15 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 15
246 T246 18-340 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 340
247 T247 18-250 M90-000026--- 0.78 TEFLON tube 250
248 T248 25-620 A21-000010--- Waste tube, outside of the analyzer 620
250 T250 2-280 3001-10-07069 Narrow 50 tube 280
251 T251 1-220 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 220
252 T252 15-120 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 120
255 T255 23-220 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 220
258 T258 33-1800 082-000531-00 6.35mm waste tube 1800
263 T263 26-30 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 30
264 T264 26-30 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 30
265 T265 26-30 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 30
266 T266 26-30 082-000422-00 1.0 FEP tube 30
267 T267 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
268 T268 30-15 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 15
269 T269 30-20 082-000108-00 2.0 TPU tube 20
270 T270 27-720 082-000416-00 External diameter 6mm, Teflon 720
271 T271 17-2500 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 2500
276 T276 17-2500 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 2500
12-29
277 T277 17-1000 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 1000
278 T278 15-170 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 170
279 T279 15-50 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 50
280 T280 15-1800 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1800
281 T281 15-270 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 270
282 T282 15-50 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 50
283 T283 15-70 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 70
284 T284 15-2000 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 2000
285 T285 15-40 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 40
287 T287 22-50 M6G-020055--- 3.2 TPU tube 50
288 T288 15-55 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 55
289 T289 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
290 T290 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
291 T291 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
292 T292 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
293 T293 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
294 T294 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
295 T295 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
296 T296 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
297 T297 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
298 T298 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
299 T299 15-60 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 60
300 T300 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
301 T301 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
302 T302 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
303 T303 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
304 T304 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
305 T305 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
306 T306 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
307 T307 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
308 T308 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
309 T309 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
12-30
310 T310 15-140 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 140
311 T311 15-25 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 25
312 T312 15-25 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 25
313 T313 21-200 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 200
314 T314 15-4200 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 4200
315 T315 1-20 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 20
316 T316 17-1150 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 1150
317 T317 15-240 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 240
318 T318 15-430 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 430
319 T319 15-470 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 470
320 T320 15-130 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 130
321 T321 15-40 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 40
322 T322 15-160 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 160
323 T323 1-20 M90-100071--- Wide 50 tube 20
324 T324 28-20 0030-20-13339 Transit tube 20
325 T325 17-700 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 700
326 T326 23-200 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 200
327 T327 17-60 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 60
328 T328 17-2500 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 2500
329 T329 17-55 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 55
330 T330 15-1560 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1560
332 T332 15-280 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 280
333 T333 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
334 T334 15-1570 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1570
335 T335 15-1540 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1540
336 T336 15-1490 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1490
337 T337 15-1490 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1490
338 T338 15-1540 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1540
339 T339 15-1500 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1500
340 T340 15-1110 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1110
341 T341 15-1140 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1140
342 T342 15-1150 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1150
343 T343 15-1150 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1150
12-31
344 T344 15-1700 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1700
345 T345 15-1500 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1500
346 T346 15-80 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 80
347 T347 15-160 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 160
348 T348 15-1300 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1300
349 T349 15-1810 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1810
350 T350 15-1550 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1550
351 T351 15-1790 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1790
352 T352 15-1790 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1790
353 T353 15-1500 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1500
354 T354 15-1300 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1300
355 T355 15-1320 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1320
356 T356 15-1450 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1450
357 T357 15-1120 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1120
358 T358 15-45 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 45
359 T359 15-1200 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1200
360 T360 15-150 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 150
361 T361 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
362 T362 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
363 T363 15-100 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 100
364 T364 15-1660 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1660
365 T365 15-1640 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1640
366 T366 15-1100 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1100
367 T367 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
368 T368 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
369 T369 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
370 T370 15-320 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 320
372 T372 15-1740 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1740
374 T374 11-160 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 160
375 T375 28-20 0030-20-13339 Transit tube 20
376 T376 15-400 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 400
377 T377 15-1700 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1700
378 T378 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
12-32
379 T379 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
380 T380 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
381 T381 15-50 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 50
382 T382 15-370 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 370
383 T383 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
384 T384 15-70 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 70
385 T385 15-1610 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1610
386 T386 15-90 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 90
387 T387 15-90 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 90
388 T388 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
389 T389 15-1380 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1380
390 T390 15-55 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 55
391 T391 15-50 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 50
392 T392 15-50 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 50
394 T394 15-20 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 20
395 T395 21-1500 082-000109-00 0.5 TEFLON tube 1500
396 T396 15-40 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 40
397 T397 15-15 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 15
398 T398 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
399 T399 15-1320 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1320
400 T400 15-40 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 40
401 T401 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
402 T402 15-1370 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1370
403 T403 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
404 T404 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
405 T405 15-1750 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1750
406 T406 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
407 T407 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
408 T408 15-1750 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1750
409 T409 15-60 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 60
410 T410 15-1750 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1750
411 T411 15-35 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 35
412 T412 15-15 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 15
12-33
413 T413 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
414 T414 15-1600 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1600
415 T415 15-40 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 40
416 T416 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
417 T417 15-1550 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1550
418 T418 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
419 T419 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
420 T420 15-1600 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1600
421 T421 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
422 T422 15-30 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 30
423 T423 15-1480 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1480
424 T424 15-60 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 60
425 T425 15-1560 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1560
426 T426 15-210 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 210
427 T427 17-110 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 110
428 T428 17-50 M6G-020003--- 6mm PU tube 50
429 T429 15-1780 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 1780
431 T431 15-270 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 270
12-34
448 T448 23-150 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 150
449 T449 23-25 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 25
450 T450 23-25 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 25
451 T451 4-200 M90-100031--- 1.67 TEFLON tube 200
452 T452 11-280 0040-10-32301 1.0 TEFLON tube 280
453 T453 15-120 M6G-020002--- 4mm PU tube 120
454 T454 23-400 M6G-020054--- 2.4 TPU tube 400
12-35 PN046-002749-002.0

BC 6800 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC 6800 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-6800

Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

zThis equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

This warranty shall not extend to:

Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

unauthorized service people.

Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial

E-mail Address: service@mindray.com

Tel: +86 755 81888998

Fax: +86 755 26582680

EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

Address: Eiffestrae 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany

1.0 First version Released N/A

1Update Error Code TXQ-12009-BC-6800

2Added Preventive Maintenance TXQ-12013-BC-6800

3Updated FRU List SXQ-12001-BC-6800

4Updated PC software name to DMU TXQ-12027-BC-6800

5DMU IP connection screen changed

6RUO parameters updated from12 items

7 Add ASTM protocol option in DMU

8Correct some unclear pictures in

9Update partly materials name and part

11Vacuum Relieve Valve(Regulator)

14Correct DMU light status

15: Add Scanner Rotation Function in

16Add floater setup option

17Add USB protection Open/close

Version Record ........................................................................................................................ V

1 Using This Manual ............................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Introduction............................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 General Operations.................................................................................................. 1-1

1.4 Symbol ..................................................................................................................... 1-2

2 Product Specification........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Equipment Name ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Power Supply Requirement ..................................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Dimension and Weight ............................................................................................. 2-1

2.4 Measurement Mode ................................................................................................. 2-1

2.5 Sample Types........................................................................................................... 2-1

2.6 Minimum Sample Volume ........................................................................................ 2-2

2.7 Throughput ............................................................................................................... 2-2

2.8 Capacity of the Autoloader ....................................................................................... 2-2

2.9 Performance Specifications...................................................................................... 2-3

2.10 Conditions of Use................................................................................................... 2-13

2.11 Sound ..................................................................................................................... 2-14

2.12 Functions of the Analyzer....................................................................................... 2-14

3 Software System................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Introduction of Startup and Shutdown ...................................................................... 3-1

3.3 Menu Structure......................................................................................................... 3-1